09931145H Syngistix For ICP Software Guide

SYNGISTIX™ FOR ICP
Software Guide
Syngistix™ for ICP
Software Guide
i
ii . Syngistix Software Guide
Release History
Part Number Release Publication Date Software Version

09931145 H November 5, 2020 5.1
Any comments about the documentation for this product should be addressed to:
User Assistance
PerkinElmer, Inc.
710 Bridgeport Avenue
Shelton, Connecticut 06484-4794
U.S.A.
Or on the internet go to: http://www.perkinelmer.com/contactus/
Notices
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Except as specifically set forth in its terms and conditions of sale, PerkinElmer makes no
warranty of any kind with regard to this document, including, but not limited to, the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
PerkinElmer shall not be liable for errors contained herein for incidental consequential damages in
connection with furnishing, performance or use of this material.
Copyright Information
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright.
All rights are reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever or
translated into any language without the prior, written permission of PerkinElmer, Inc.
Copyright © 2020 PerkinElmer, Inc.
Trademarks
Registered names, trademarks, etc. used in this document, even when not specifically marked as such,
are protected by law.
PerkinElmer is a registered trademark of PerkinElmer, Inc.
Syngistix is a trademark of PerkinElmer, Inc.
Table of Contents
Introduction to Syngistix ...................................................................................... 1

Important Features of the Syngistix Software............................................................... 2
Related Applications ........................................................................................... 2
Related Documentation ....................................................................................... 3
Important Prerequisites ....................................................................................... 3
Tips and Hints .......................................................................................................... 4
Upgrading from WinLab - What's New ......................................................................... 7
Libraries and Files In Data Manager ............................................................................ 8
Libraries and Data .............................................................................................. 8
Data Manager .................................................................................................... 8
Files .................................................................................................................. 8
Different Libraries............................................................................................... 8
Software Overview................................................................................................ 9
About the Syngistix Ribbon ........................................................................................ 10
Application Button .............................................................................................. 10
Workspace ..................................................................................................... 11
Notifications ................................................................................................... 12
How Switch User Works ...................................................................................... 14
Non-ES mode (folder “browsing” is allowed): ..................................................... 14
ES mode (folder “browsing” is not allowed):....................................................... 14
Express Analysis (Quick Start) .................................................................................... 15
Select a Method ................................................................................................. 15
Select a Sample Information File .......................................................................... 16
Start the Analysis ............................................................................................... 16
The Ribbon Tabs ...................................................................................................... 17
Instrument Tab Commands ................................................................................. 17
Quick Start ..................................................................................................... 17
Plasma Group ................................................................................................. 17
Devices Group ................................................................................................ 17
Spectrometer Group ........................................................................................ 17
Utilities Group ................................................................................................. 18
Analysis Tab Commands...................................................................................... 18
Edit Group ...................................................................................................... 18
Method Group................................................................................................. 18
Sample Information Group ............................................................................... 19
Analyze Group ................................................................................................ 19
Data Correction Group ..................................................................................... 19
Results Tab Commands ....................................................................................... 20
Spectra Group ................................................................................................ 20
Calibration Group ............................................................................................ 20
Examine Group ............................................................................................... 20
Results Group ................................................................................................. 20
Options: ......................................................................................................... 21
Utilities Tab Commands....................................................................................... 21
Applications Group .......................................................................................... 21
Resources Group ............................................................................................. 21
Techniques Commands ....................................................................................... 22
ICP Group ...................................................................................................... 22
Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 22
Hide Login (Non ES only) ........................................................................................... 23
iii
iv . Syngistix Software Guide
Electronic Signature Points (ES only) ........................................................................... 24

Matrix of Groups and Permissions ............................................................................... 27
Messages ................................................................................................................. 28
Status Panel Display and Diagnostics .......................................................................... 29
Status Panel ...................................................................................................... 29
User Details Panel .............................................................................................. 30
Status Icons ...................................................................................................... 30
Plasma Status Icons ........................................................................................ 31
Spectrometer Status Icons ............................................................................... 31
Autosampler Status Icons................................................................................. 31
Scheduler Status Icon ...................................................................................... 31
Particle Counter Status Icon ............................................................................. 31
Remote Access Status Icons ............................................................................. 31
System Messages ............................................................................................ 31
Instrument Diagnostics Window ................................................................................. 32
Spectrometer Page ............................................................................................. 32
IP Configure Dialog ......................................................................................... 33
Configuring IP................................................................................................. 34
Spectrometer Setup......................................................................................... 35
PC Setup ........................................................................................................ 35
Argon Quick Change ........................................................................................... 35
Plasma Page ...................................................................................................... 36
O-ring Maintenance ......................................................................................... 37
Avio Axial Optic Temperature Sensor ................................................................. 37
Autosampler Page .............................................................................................. 38
FIAS Page ......................................................................................................... 39
Instrument Message History: ............................................................................ 39
Particle Counter Page.......................................................................................... 40
Remote Access Page........................................................................................... 41
Firmware Page ................................................................................................... 42
Performing Analyses ............................................................................................. 43
Performing Analyses Overview ................................................................................... 44
Observe Safety Precautions ................................................................................. 44
1 Set Up .................................................................................................................. 45
Summary of Steps .............................................................................................. 45
ESI with prepFAST Software Requirements and Device Configuration ....................... 45
Software Requirements .................................................................................... 45
S400V Hardware Configuration in ESI SC ........................................................... 45
prepFAST Device Configuration in Syngistix for ICP ............................................. 46
prepFAST Software Configuration ......................................................................... 47
Selecting the prepFAST method ........................................................................ 47
2 Optimizing and Verifying Performance ...................................................................... 48
Performance Checks ........................................................................................... 48
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 48
3 Selecting a Workspace, Method, and Sample Information File ..................................... 49
4 Setting Options in Control Window ........................................................................... 51
5 Arranging Samples ................................................................................................. 52
6 Analyze................................................................................................................. 53
Automated Analyses ........................................................................................... 53
Manual Analyses................................................................................................. 54
Manual Analyses Using an Autosampler................................................................. 54
7 Generating Reports ................................................................................................ 55
8 Shutting Down the Instrument ................................................................................ 56
How to Run a Particle Counting Analysis ...................................................................... 58
Table of Contents. v
1. Opening a Predefined Particle Counter Method.................................................. 58

2. Editing the Method Particle Size and Data Formats ............................................ 59
3. Run the Analysis ............................................................................................ 60
How to Run a HTS Analysis ........................................................................................ 62
1. Getting Started ............................................................................................... 62
2. ICP Method Settings ....................................................................................... 62
3. Run the Analysis ............................................................................................. 65
Method Editor........................................................................................................ 67
Method Editor........................................................................................................... 68
What is a method? ............................................................................................. 68
Methods in the Results Library ............................................................................. 68
The Active Method.............................................................................................. 68
The Pages of the Method Editor ........................................................................... 68
Using the Method Editor ............................................................................................ 69
Using Methods ................................................................................................... 69
Summary Procedure ........................................................................................ 69
To Delete, Copy, or Rename Methods................................................................ 69
Useful Conventions ............................................................................................. 69
Creating a New Method ............................................................................................. 70
Periodic Table .................................................................................................... 70
Wavelength Table .............................................................................................. 71
References used in the Wavelength Table .......................................................... 72
Create New Method Dialog .................................................................................. 74
Opening an Existing Method....................................................................................... 77
Modifying a Method .................................................................................................. 79
Selecting Options and Entering Values......................................................................... 80
Saving a Method ....................................................................................................... 81
Opening and Saving Methods and Selecting Results ...................................................... 82
Printing a Method ..................................................................................................... 84
Spectrometer Pages .................................................................................................. 85
Define Elements Page ......................................................................................... 85
Periodic Table ................................................................................................. 86
Wavelength Table ........................................................................................... 86
Settings Page - Continuous Technique .................................................................. 86
Spectral Settings ............................................................................................. 87
Read Parameters ................................................................................................ 87
Settings Page - Transient Technique ..................................................................... 89
Spectral Settings ............................................................................................. 89
Read Parameters............................................................................................. 89
Spectral Windows Page ....................................................................................... 89
Sampler Pages ......................................................................................................... 91
Plasma Page ...................................................................................................... 91
HTS (High Throughput System) Page ................................................................... 93
HTS analysis ................................................................................................... 93
Wash settings ................................................................................................. 94
Recommended HTS Loop Parameters ................................................................ 94
Peristaltic Pump ................................................................................................. 95
Autosampler Page - Continuous Technique ............................................................ 95
Autosampler Wash .......................................................................................... 96
Smart Rinse.................................................................................................... 96
Never ............................................................................................................ 96
Between Samples ............................................................................................ 96
Only after samples whose concentrations exceed limits ....................................... 97
After every sample + extra time if sample concentrations exceed limits................. 97
v
vi . Syngistix Software Guide
Autosampler Page - Transient Technique .............................................................. 98

Frequency ...................................................................................................... 99
FIAS Page (Transient Technique only) .................................................................. 100
Operation ....................................................................................................... 100
Flow Injection Program .................................................................................... 100
Particle Counter Page.......................................................................................... 101
Process Page............................................................................................................ 103
Spectral Peak Processing ..................................................................................... 103
MSF (Multicomponent Spectral Fitting)............................................................... 104
Points Per Peak ............................................................................................... 104
Spectral Corrections ............................................................................................ 105
Assign Internal Standards.................................................................................... 107
Assign Internal Standards ................................................................................ 107
Wash solution contains the internal standard(s) – for use with SmartRinse ............ 107
Internal Standard Options ................................................................................ 108
Perform Internal Standards Checks....................................................................... 108
Perform Internal Standard Checks (check box) ................................................... 109
Internal Standards Limits (spreadsheet)............................................................. 109
Actions Taken after Internal Standard Check Failure............................................ 109
Time Processing ................................................................................................. 110
Calibration Pages ...................................................................................................... 112
Calibration Pages................................................................................................ 112
Define Standards ................................................................................................ 112
Example: Standards Dilution – Generating a Calibration Curve Using a Single Stock Solution
(only for ESI with prepFAST systems) ................................................................ 115
Calibration Units and Standard Concentrations ....................................................... 116
Diluted Standard Concentrations ....................................................................... 117
Calibration and Reagent Blank Usage.................................................................... 118
Calibration Equations and Sample Units ................................................................ 119
Multiline Calibration Page .................................................................................... 121
Initial Calibration Options .................................................................................... 124
When opening this method manually:................................................................ 124
Recalibration Page .............................................................................................. 125
Periodic Recalibrations ..................................................................................... 125
Recalibration Type........................................................................................... 125
Frequency ...................................................................................................... 126
Analyze Standards at End................................................................................. 126
Checks Pages ........................................................................................................... 127
Calculate Limits Dialog ........................................................................................ 127
Recovery Checks ................................................................................................ 127
Concentration Units ......................................................................................... 128
Table ............................................................................................................. 128
Sample Limits Checks ......................................................................................... 128
Using the Sample Limits Page ........................................................................... 128
QC Pages ................................................................................................................. 131
QC Pages .......................................................................................................... 131
QC Sample Definition .......................................................................................... 131
Concentrations and Limits ................................................................................... 132
Schedule QCs..................................................................................................... 133
Schedule for QC Analyses................................................................................. 133
Periodic Timing of Analyses .............................................................................. 134
Failure Actions for After-Calibration and Periodic QC's ............................................. 134
Failure Actions for After-Calibration QCs Parameters............................................ 134
Failure Actions for Periodic QCs Parameters ....................................................... 135
Failure Actions for At-End QC's............................................................................. 136
Table of Contents. vii
Failure Actions for At-End QCs .......................................................................... 137

Maximum Retries After QC Failure ..................................................................... 138
Options Page............................................................................................................ 139
Headers to include in Results Displays and Printed Log ........................................... 139
Sample Data Items ............................................................................................. 139
Summary Items ................................................................................................. 140
Save with Results ............................................................................................... 140
About Universal Data Acquisition (UDA) ................................................................ 141
Enabling Universal Data Acquisition Mode .......................................................... 141
Reprocessing UDA Data ................................................................................... 141
Sample Information Editor ................................................................................... 145
Sample Information Editor ......................................................................................... 146
File Format ........................................................................................................ 146
Using the Sample Information Editor........................................................................... 147
Customizing the Sample Information Editor ........................................................... 147
Editing information in the Sample Information Editor .............................................. 147
Appending Samples to an Automated Analysis ....................................................... 147
Creating a New Sample Information File ...................................................................... 148
Customizing the Sample Information Editor ................................................................. 149
Adding Parameters to the Sample Information Editor.............................................. 149
Removing Parameters from the Sample Information Editor...................................... 150
Opening a Stored Sample Information File ............................................................ 151
Modifying a Stored Sample Information File........................................................... 151
Printing a Sample Information File........................................................................ 151
Editing Sample Information Parameters ....................................................................... 153
Sample Information Editor Pop-Up Menus .......................................................... 153
Sample Information Editor pop-up menu............................................................ 154
Table editing pop-up menu .............................................................................. 155
Sample Preparation: An Example ................................................................................ 156
Dilute Samples Using the ESI with prepFAST System .................................................... 157
Sample Information Parameters and Dialogs ................................................................ 159
Sample Information Parameters ........................................................................... 159
Sample Information Dialogs:................................................................................ 159
Sample Information Parameters Dialog ................................................................. 160
Sample Description Parameters ............................................................................ 161
Batch ID ........................................................................................................ 161
Sample ID ...................................................................................................... 161
Remarks ........................................................................................................ 161
Autosampler Location ...................................................................................... 161
Analyst Name ................................................................................................. 161
User Defined................................................................................................... 162
Sample Preparation Parameters ........................................................................... 162
Analysis Schedule Parameters .............................................................................. 164
Recalibration Before ........................................................................................ 164
Matrix Check Samples ...................................................................................... 164
Analyze QCs Before ......................................................................................... 164
Read Delay..................................................................................................... 164
Wash Time ..................................................................................................... 165
Sample Information Editor Dialogs ....................................................................... 165
Sample Information Parameters Dialog .............................................................. 165
User Defined Entry Field Dialog ............................................................................ 166
Column Fill Dialogs.................................................................................................... 167
Sample Information Editor Column Fill Dialogs ....................................................... 167
Autosampler Location Column Fill Dialog ............................................................... 167
vii
viii . Syngistix Software Guide
Sample ID Column Fill Dialog ............................................................................... 168

Sample Units Column Fill Dialog ........................................................................... 169
Units Column Fill Dialogs ..................................................................................... 170
Initial Sample Weight Column Fill Dialog ............................................................... 170
Diluted To Volume Column Fill Dialog ................................................................... 171
Aliquot Volume Column Fill Dialog ........................................................................ 172
Recalibrate Before Column Fill Dialog.................................................................... 172
Reagent Blanks Usage Column Fill Dialog .............................................................. 173
Analyze QCs Before Column Fill Dialog .................................................................. 175
Solids Ratio Column Fill Dialog ............................................................................. 175
Auto Dilution Factor Column Fill Dialog ................................................................. 176
Remarks Entry Dialog ......................................................................................... 177
Matrix Check Sample Entry Dialog ........................................................................ 177
Duplicate........................................................................................................ 178
Recovery Set Number ...................................................................................... 178
Diluted x fold .................................................................................................. 178
Analysis Control Window ...................................................................................... 181
Analysis Control Windows .......................................................................................... 182
Manual Analysis Tab.................................................................................................. 183
Window Controls and Entries ............................................................................... 183
Analyze Blank ................................................................................................. 183
Analyze Standard ............................................................................................ 183
Analyze Sample............................................................................................... 184
Analyze QC..................................................................................................... 184
Go to A/S Loc. ................................................................................................ 184
Go to Wash .................................................................................................... 184
Override Method ............................................................................................. 184
Read Delay (sec)............................................................................................. 185
Sample Information File ................................................................................... 185
Save Data to Results Data Set .......................................................................... 185
Print Log During Analyses ................................................................................ 185
Run List............................................................................................................. 185
Progress Bar (in the Status Panel) ........................................................................ 186
Automated Analysis Tab ............................................................................................ 187
Window Controls and Entries ............................................................................... 187
Analyze All ..................................................................................................... 187
Calibrate ........................................................................................................ 188
Analyze Samples ............................................................................................. 188
Stopping an Analytical Sequence ....................................................................... 188
Continuing an Analytical Sequence .................................................................... 189
Reset Sequence .............................................................................................. 190
Method Source ................................................................................................... 190
Analytical Sequence Table ................................................................................... 190
Use Sample Info................................................................................................. 191
Save data to Results Data Set .............................................................................. 191
Print Log During Analyses.................................................................................... 191
Automatic Export................................................................................................ 192
Scheduler .......................................................................................................... 192
Auto Wavelength Realign .................................................................................... 192
Run List............................................................................................................. 193
Progress Bar (in the Status Panel) ........................................................................ 193
Enable/Disable Analytes............................................................................................. 194
Autosampler Loading List........................................................................................... 195
Data Reprocessing Window ........................................................................................ 196
Table of Contents. ix
Using this window .............................................................................................. 196

Data Reprocessing Display................................................................................... 197
Equation for Calculating Disk Storage for Results .......................................................... 200
Data Viewer........................................................................................................... 201
Data Viewer Window ................................................................................................. 202
Data Viewer Common Controls ................................................................................... 203
Corrected Intensities Tab........................................................................................... 204
Conc. in Calib. Units Tab............................................................................................ 205
Conc. in Sample Units Tab ......................................................................................... 206
Internal Standards Tab .............................................................................................. 207
QC Tab .................................................................................................................... 208
Advanced Display Options Dialog ................................................................................ 209
Data Export Functions ............................................................................................... 211
Reprint Data Window ................................................................................................ 212
Devices .................................................................................................................. 213
Pump Control ........................................................................................................... 214
Using this dialog................................................................................................. 214
Pump Settings.................................................................................................... 214
Autosampler Configuration......................................................................................... 215
Using this dialog:................................................................................................ 215
Model ............................................................................................................ 215
Tray Type ...................................................................................................... 215
Rinse Options ................................................................................................. 216
FIAS ........................................................................................................................ 217
High Throughput System (HTS) .................................................................................. 218
High Throughput System Settings ..................................................................... 218
To replumb the tubing for operation of the peripump without HTS (that is, the HTS
disabled): ....................................................................................................... 219
Remote Trigger ........................................................................................................ 220
Using this function .......................................................................................... 220
Hardware Control Windows .................................................................................. 221
Hardware Control Windows ........................................................................................ 222
Plasma Control Window ...................................................................................... 222
A Quick Look .................................................................................................. 222
Controls and Displays in the Plasma Control Window ........................................... 222
Overriding Method Settings .............................................................................. 224
Recommended Settings for Plasma Parameters .................................................. 224
Recommended Settings for Nebulizers ............................................................... 225
Spectrometer Control Window ............................................................................. 225
A Quick Look .................................................................................................. 225
Adjusting the Torch Viewing Position ................................................................. 226
Manual Settings: Spectrometer Control Window.................................................. 228
Overriding Method Settings .............................................................................. 229
Table of Spectrometer Alignment and Calibration Controls ................................... 230
Performing a System Wavelength Calibration...................................................... 231
Performing a Mercury Realignment.................................................................... 233
Performing a Detector Calibration ..................................................................... 233
Performing a Detection Limit Diagnostic Check ................................................... 234
FIAS Control Window .......................................................................................... 235
Controls and Displays in the FIAS Control Window .............................................. 235
Controlling a FIAS Pump .................................................................................. 235
ix
x . Syngistix Software Guide
Information Display Windows .............................................................................. 237

Information Display Windows ..................................................................................... 238
Continuous Graphics Display Window ................................................................ 238
Spectra Display Window................................................................................... 238
The Results Display Window ............................................................................. 238
Calibration Display Window .............................................................................. 238
Autosampler Loading List ................................................................................. 238
Continuous Graphics Display Window .......................................................................... 239
Analyte Table..................................................................................................... 239
Y-axis Limits ...................................................................................................... 239
Selecting Settings and Colors ............................................................................... 240
Spectra Display Window: Printing Spectra.................................................................... 242
Results Display Window ............................................................................................. 243
Results Options .................................................................................................. 243
Lines of Data to Display ................................................................................... 243
To select viewing options ................................................................................. 243
Printing ............................................................................................................. 244
Using this Window .............................................................................................. 244
Saving this window ............................................................................................. 245
An overview of this window ................................................................................. 246
Analytical Header ............................................................................................... 246
Replicate Header and Information ........................................................................ 247
Mean Header and Information ............................................................................. 247
Sample Header .................................................................................................. 248
Method Header .................................................................................................. 248
Calibration Summary Header and Information........................................................ 249
Detailed Calibration Summary Header and Information ........................................... 250
Printing Results .................................................................................................. 250
Correcting Saturated Samples .................................................................................... 252
Saturation Codes ................................................................................................ 252
Calibration Display Window ........................................................................................ 254
Selecting Layout and Colors ................................................................................. 254
Reslope ............................................................................................................. 254
Resizing, Labeling and Order ............................................................................... 255
Calib Eq'n .......................................................................................................... 255
Corr. Coeff......................................................................................................... 255
Printing Calibration Curves................................................................................... 255
Autosampler Loading List........................................................................................... 256
Examine Spectra/MSF/Transient Peaks Window ................................................. 257
Overview of Examine ................................................................................................ 258
Overview of Examine/MSF ................................................................................... 258
Using the Examine Spectra/MSF window for the first time ....................................... 258
Overview of Examine Transient Peaks ......................................................................... 259
Using the Examine Transient Peaks window for the first time .................................. 259
Overview of the Examine Spectra Window ................................................................... 260
Using this window .............................................................................................. 260
Menus............................................................................................................ 261
Analyte and Wavelength selection buttons ......................................................... 261
Spectra Display Options Dialog............................................................................. 261
Layout ........................................................................................................... 261
Selecting Colors .............................................................................................. 262
Spectra .......................................................................................................... 263
Setting a New Peak Wavelength for the Method ..................................................... 263
Examine Spectra Window Using the Background Correction Point Option .................. 264
Table of Contents. xi
Identifying Elements Using the Button ............................................................... 266

Update Method Parameters Dialog .................................................................... 266
Update........................................................................................................... 267
Update and Save Method ................................................................................. 267
Exporting Spectra from the Examine MSF Window.................................................. 267
Printing Spectra ................................................................................................. 268
Examine/MFS or Examine Transient Peaks Window....................................................... 269
Selecting an Analyte, Wavelength or Peak to Display .............................................. 269
How to Use the Examine MSF Window .................................................................. 270
What You See in the Examine MSF Window ....................................................... 270
How to Use the Examine Transient Peaks Window ................................................. 271
Selecting peaks to display ................................................................................ 271
What You See in the Examine Transients Peaks Window...................................... 271
Examine Transient Peaks Options: Window Colors .............................................. 272
Examine Transient Peaks Options: Line Colors ................................................... 273
An Overview of How MSF Functions ............................................................................ 274
Steps to Using MSF............................................................................................. 275
Inter-Element Correction ...................................................................................... 277
About Spectral Interferences ...................................................................................... 278
About Spectral Interferences ............................................................................... 278
About Interference Correction .................................................................................... 280
IEC and MSF: Which To Use....................................................................................... 281
Use IEC if... ....................................................................................................... 281
Use MSF if... ...................................................................................................... 281
IEC and MSF: Similarities, Differences, and Restrictions on Use ............................... 281
Similarities...................................................................................................... 281
Differences ..................................................................................................... 281
Overview of the IEC Process ...................................................................................... 282
Preliminary Steps ............................................................................................... 282
Using IEC .......................................................................................................... 282
Notes:............................................................................................................... 282
Interelement Correction Model Builder ........................................................................ 283
How IEC Works .................................................................................................. 283
Creating an Interelement Correction Table ............................................................ 283
Modifying an Interelement Correction Table .......................................................... 284
Set Up Page....................................................................................................... 285
Set Limits Page .................................................................................................. 286
Calculate Factors Page ........................................................................................ 287
Summarize Factors Page............................................................................................ 289
IEC Factors ........................................................................................................ 289
Multiple Wavelengths per Element ........................................................................ 290
Example 1 ...................................................................................................... 291
Example 2 ...................................................................................................... 291
Calibration and Calculations ................................................................................. 293
Calibration and Calculations ....................................................................................... 294
Calibration ......................................................................................................... 294
Calculations ....................................................................................................... 294
Edit Calibration ......................................................................................................... 295
Linear Calibration Algorithm ....................................................................................... 297
Linear Forced through Zero........................................................................................ 299
Non-Linear Calibration Algorithm ................................................................................ 300
Non-Linear Bracketing Algorithm ................................................................................ 302
Correlation Coefficient ............................................................................................... 304
Standard Deviation and Precision................................................................................ 306
xi
xii . Syngistix Software Guide
Weighted Linear Calibration ....................................................................................... 307

Method of Additions Sample Intercept ......................................................................... 309
Method of Additions Calculated Intercept..................................................................... 310
Method of Additions Calibrate..................................................................................... 311
Overview of Method of Additions ................................................................................ 312
Overview for Creating a Method using Method of Additions ..................................... 312
Example: Preparing Standard Solutions ................................................................. 313
Example: Creating a Sample Information File......................................................... 313
Example: Analyzing Samples using Method of Additions -Manual Analyses ................ 314
Example: Analyze Samples using Method of Additions - Automated Analyses............. 315
Overview of Method of Additions Calibrate ................................................................... 316
Overview for Creating a Method using Method of Additions ..................................... 316
Example: Standard Solutions for Manual Analysis ................................................... 317
Example: Creating a Sample Information File......................................................... 317
Example: Analyzing Samples using Method of Additions Calibrate - Manual Analyses .. 317
Example: Analyzing the first sample and the additions ............................................ 318
Example: Analyzing Samples using Method of Additions Calibrate - Automated Analyses 318
Glossary................................................................................................................. 319
Index ..................................................................................................................... 325
I ntroduction to Syngistix
2 . Syngistix™ Software Guide
Im portant Features of the Syngistix Softw are

• This highly usable product was developed by a team of application experts, laboratory
managers, graphic designers, cognitive psychologists, and users from all over the world.
Sample analysis, scheduling, and data reporting can be handled easily and efficiently.
• Operation is simplified. Based on the familiar Microsoft Windows ribbon and graphics,
the software has easy-to-use graphics and familiar menus.
• Complete system controls and useful online information are at the user's fingertips,
making procedures simple and routine, even for new operators with minimal training
in ICP lab procedures. Less training is required and time can be saved, hence
increasing lab productivity.
• The automation of many routine tasks not only saves time, but also avoids expensive,
time-consuming errors.
• Comprehensive data reprocessing and reporting capabilities include: built-in QC
automation routines; full data reprocessing from stored spectra; methods and data
stored in a commercial database; and easy generation of customized reports using
off-the-shelf word processor or spreadsheet programs.
• The flexibility of Syngistix should allow you to comply with all the various quality control
protocols and regulatory procedures associated with Good Laboratory Practice (GLP)
and Good Automated Laboratory Practice (GALP) requirements.
• Email and text notifications for analysis, QC, and hardware failures.
If you have the Enhanced Security (ES) version:
• Syngistix adds electronic signatures, an improved enhanced security audit trail, and
file change history as well as user login functionality for customers bound by the
FDA’s 21 CFR Part 11 regulation.
• There is an ES Tools application with the ability to Review and Approve/Reject
methods and samples.
Related Applications
In addition to the Syngistix software, PerkinElmer provides:
• The Data Manager software application lets you archive, copy, backup, delete, and
rename the data sets created by Syngistix. Within this application, you can select a subset
of the data from a results data set and save it in a file format that can be read by many
off-the-shelf applications, including spreadsheet and database management programs. In
addition, you can create printed reports of data where you control the design of and the
information included in the report.
• The User Setup software application to set up and control Users & Groups, Data Folders,
Email Setup, Notifications, and Settings (for Application Lockout times). If you have the
Enhanced Security (ES) version, manage Electronic Signatures.
• Syngistix Offline is a second copy of the Syngistix application that does not control the
instrument. You can use Syngistix to edit methods, enter sample information, examine data,
build IEC or MSF models, or reprocess data in the software without operating the instrument.
This is useful when you wish to work with methods and data while an analysis is in progress.
• If you have the Enhanced Security (ES) version, the ES Tools application the provides you
with the ability to Review and Approve/Reject methods and samples.
Introduction to Syngistix . 3
Related Docum entation

The following documentation is available for Syngistix:
• Syngistix Data Manager Online Help. The Data Manager Help file is available
online from the Data Manager application. Press the F1 function key to display
information for the window that is currently on screen.
• Syngistix User Setup Online Help
• Mobile Setup Online Help
• Syngistix Document Pack
If you have the Enhanced Security (ES) version:
• Syngistix ES Tools OnLine Help
I m portant Prerequisites
Before you use Syngistix software, you should:
• Understand ICP principles and practices. If you need background information,
you should consult one of the many textbooks available.
• Know how to use a personal computer. If you need further information, consult
your computer manual.
• Understand Windows fundamentals. If you have questions, refer to manuals,
books, USB stick, CD-ROM, or online tutorials on Microsoft Windows.
Tips and Hints

The following list contains Syngistix tips and hints.
• You should maintain your results library on a regular basis. Use the Data Manager to
archive old data sets, delete them from the library, check the library, and pack the
library.
• Analytical results are stored in a Microsoft Access-compatible database. The database
structure is described in an electronic document (Results.pdf) included in the
Syngistix Document Pack.
• You can analyze a priority sample without stopping the system by clicking on the
Insert Sample button on the Analysis page of the Automated Analysis Control
window and entering the autosampler ___location, sample ID, and other descriptive
information.
• If you do not understand how an entry or control is used, pause the mouse pointer
over the item for a few seconds and a tip explaining it will be displayed.
• You can export data from the results library in a comma delimited format using the
Export Data wizard included in the Data Manager.
• You can append samples to the end of the Analysis List while analyzing samples.
Enter the descriptive information in the Sample Information Editor, select the Append
to Analysis List... command from the Automated Analysis submenu of the Analysis
menu, and designate the samples to be added.
• Display the Autosampler Loading List window after selecting your methods and
sample information file for a list of solutions to be placed in each autosampler
___location.
• You can enter elements into the method by simply typing the element symbol into
the Spectrometer page. The most prominent wavelength will be used automatically.
• In the Wavelength Table window, after doing a search you can sort the table by
double-clicking on one of the table headings to sort by the entries in that column.
• After the plasma ignites, it switches to the plasma gas flows and power settings in
the active method. If you want special settings used, open a method containing
those settings before igniting the plasma.
• You can change the colors of your graphical displays. Right-click in the Calibration
Display, Spectra Display, or Examine Display Options dialogs and select Display
Options.
• Change the autosampler tray configuration by selecting the Autosampler tab in the
Devices dialog, on the Instrument tab and selecting the proper tray file. To use
custom trays, create a new autosampler tray file and put it in the directory with the
other tray files.
• The Sample Information Editor can be configured to include only the fields you need
for your samples. Click on the window with the right-mouse button and choose the
Parameter List... command to display a dialog where the fields can be selected. Once
configured, a template describing the configuration can be saved as a design file for
future use.
• Double-click on the header row of most grid-type displays of parameters in the
Method and Sample Information editors to display column fill dialogs that help you
enter parameters in the columns.
• Status displays (normally located just under the tool bar) provide information on
each of the hardware devices connected to your computer. For more information,
double-click on the icon to display the diagnostics window.
• A complete list of units that can be selected in the Syngistix software are contained
in a file called “units.inix” located in the directory:
C:\Users\Public\PerkinElmer Syngistix\ICP\SystemFiles\Configuration
Edit this file (using Notepad) to rearrange, delete, or add units. Instructions for
editing the file are contained in the file.
• You can save the layout of windows on the screen and the names of files currently
open by selecting Workspace from the Application button then use the Save As
command. To recall the workspace and arrange the screen as it was saved, use the
Workspace Open command.
• You can check a method for internal consistency by selecting the Check Method
command from the Method group on the Analysis tab. Any problems discovered will
be reported in a dialog. The same check is automatically performed when the
method is saved and before it is used to analyze samples.
• To print an analytical header during a manual analysis, select the Analytical Header
command from the Analysis menu.
• You can display information on the instrument hardware components attached to
your system by selecting the Diagnostics in the Utilities group, on the Instrument
tab. Each component has a page of information showing its status and commands
that have been exchanged between computer and hardware.
• The system "signs" the data for each sample when it is stored in the results library.
Use the Verify Data Set... command in the Data Manager to check that no changes
have been made since the data were collected by the instrument.
• Select Syngistix Offline from the Applications group on the Utilities tab to display a
second copy of the application where you can edit methods, enter sample
information, examine data, build IEC or MSF models, or reprocess data while
analyses are in progress.
• You can display the autosampler locations for all samples, blanks, standards, and
quality control samples in the currently selected methods and sample information file
using the Autosampler Loading List window.
• When performing multi-method analyses, use the Autosampler Loading List window
to display the ___location of all solutions required by all methods to be sure the
locations are compatible.
• You can automatically export your data as a tab or comma delimited ASCII file at the
end of analyses. Create the export design using the Data Manager, then select it
using the Automatic Export command in the Options menu.
• See the Syngistix Document Pack for application notes, technical papers, and
documents that describe specialized features of the system such as a description of
the file formats used by the software.
• You must analyze the calibration blank before the calibration standards if the
selected calibration algorithm requires a blank. If it is analyzed after the standards,
errors will result.
• You can temporarily delete one or more analytes in a method by selecting the
Enable/Disable Elements... command from the Analysis menu and choosing the
analytes to disable from the dialog that is displayed.
• Using the Scheduler, you can schedule the instrument to automatically shut itself
down at the conclusion of analyses and to automatically start-up again so that it is
ready to perform analyses when you arrive in the morning.
• The system automatically performs a series of checks when you begin analyses to
detect mistakes or conditions that must be corrected before analyses can proceed.
• If you have occasional samples with high concentrations of analyte, it is possible to
schedule an extra wash step following them to minimize carry over to the next
sample. Schedule the extra wash step on the Sampler page of the Method Editor.
• Reagent blanks can be used to compensate for contamination of the samples by the
reagents used during the sample preparation process. Reagent blanks are selected
and scheduled on the Calibration page of the Method Editor.
• If you are only interested in using a small part of the calibration range or if you
cannot prepare a valid calibration blank for some reason, use the bracketing
calibration curve equation options.
• Normally when a method is opened the calibration curves are cleared and new
calibration curves are prepared as the blanks and standards are analyzed. However,
it is possible to automatically load existing calibration curves along with the method
by making selections on the Calibration page of the Method Editor.
• Quality control samples can be automatically analyzed at periodic intervals. The QC
samples are defined on the QC page of the Method Editor. Scheduling can also be
defined as part of the method or, alternatively, as part of the sample information file.
• When one or more measured concentrations in a quality control sample is not within
predefined limits, the system will automatically perform appropriate actions such as
recalibration, recalibration and reanalyzing samples, printing messages, or stopping
the analyses.
• The amount of information to be printed on the log during analyses can be selected
on the Options page of the Method Editor.
• The individual raw spectra can be saved with the other analytical data in the results
library. Saving spectra allows the data to be examined and used to recalculate the
analytical results using different analytical parameters, but requires more disk space.
Turning off this option saves disk space.
• You can have the system play sounds at the end of long operations or if problems
develop during analyses. Choose the Notifications from the Applications button
to turn sounds on or off and to select .wav files containing the sounds you want to
hear.
• Use the Sample Information Editor to enter descriptive information about your
samples such as sample ID's (names), weight and dilution information, autosampler
locations, and descriptive remarks.
• The Wavelength Table window allows you to search a database containing about
50,000 wavelengths. The table also contains recommended lines for most elements
and performance information for many of the lines that can be measured using an ICP.
Upgrading from W inLab - W hat's N ew

When upgrading from WinLab to Syngistix you will have the same functionality that you have
become accustomed to with many new features that provide a simplified workflow. Some of
the new features are:
Ribbon Style Interface - Consolidates the Workflow to 4 tabs with no hidden menus.
Data Viewer - This is a tabular data view to compliment the classic results view.
Expandable Windows (specifically Continuous Graphics, as more time/data points are
added if you expand horizontally)
Updated graphics and user interfaces - Provides a clean look to view your data and
information.
Consolidated Analysis Window - Combines Automated and Manual analysis with a
common run list in one window.
Status Panel (with quick links) - Provides a quick view of your current status and by
double-clicking a graphic to display its associated dialog.
Right-click Menus for Display Options - Provides easy navigation to functions in dialogs.
Most Recently Used Mechanism - Displays the last five methods/files opened.
Combined Devices Window - Puts your devices in one dialog for easy control.
Libraries and Files In Data M anager

Libraries and Data
The Syngistix Data Manager application uses database technology to organize information in
a structured format that is easy to manipulate. This information includes: parameters needed
to perform analyses; data collected during analyses; and parameters used by related
Syngistix applications.
The data generated before, during, and after analyses is stored in libraries. Each library is a
group of related tables and indices that contain data in a structured format.
Data M anager
The Data Manager is a Syngistix application that helps you organize and manage the data
stored in libraries. You can rename, copy, archive, and delete data sets.
Im portant Note: Library maintenance should be done periodically to prevent your Results Library
from becoming too large. A large Results Library can lead to disk problems.
Maintenance procedures include archiving, deleting, and packing data sets. For
additional information, please refer to Data Manager Help: What's Important
About Managing Data.
Files
Not all Syngistix information is stored in database libraries. For example, sample information
is stored in ASCII files, so that you can easily create compatible sample information files
using off-the-shelf applications such as spreadsheet programs. You can use the Windows
Explorer to copy, rename, move, or delete these files.
Different Libraries
You may want to create separate libraries for each person using the system. You can do this
by creating new libraries for the methods and results using Data Manager. Refer to the Data
Manager Help file for information.
Softw are Overview
About the Syngistix R ibbon

The Ribbon helps you quickly find the functions you need to complete a task. It consists of an
Application button and commands organized by tabs and groups within each tab. The
Application button contains a drop-down menu of commands that involve doing something to
or with a file that is not directly related to a specific command window. The Ribbon itself
contains commands that affect the content a window. Major task are organized into tabs that
contain groups of functions to help you perform a specific task.
Application Button
Clicking on the Application button provides the following commands that are available at all
times:
Workspace: When you click on Workspace, you can

open a previously saved workspace or save the
displayed workspace. Clicking Open displays the Open
dialog, which lists stored workspaces. To create a new
workspace, see the Workspaces section.
Notifications: Displays the Notifications dialog to
select sounds to play at the end of a task to signal
completion or to signal their attention.
Arrange Windows: Select how you want your
windows arranged in a workspace; Arrange All,
Cascade, Tile Horizontally, Tile Vertically, or Close All
Windows.
Print Active Window: Select how you want to
preview and print the active screen.
Print Setup: Use this command to set options for
printing, such as printer name, paper size and
orientation. (See your Windows manual for further
information on printing, if needed.)
Switch User: Clicking Switch User stops your access
to Syngistix and displays a Login dialog so that one
could login as a different user. (All processes continue
to run in the background.)
Lockout: Clicking Lockout stops your access to Syngistix
and displays a Login dialog. (All processes continue to run
in the background.) You may want to do this if you leave
the computer to do something else.
Show Login (Non-ES only): Clicking Show Login
displays the login window with the check box for hide
login. A user can then uncheck the box and login so that
the next initialization of Syngistix will show the login
screen. This must be first set in User Setup (by selecting the No Passwords Login on the
Passwords Control tab).
Tool Tips: Select the tool tip language and select to show or not show them.
Help: Select the Help, Consumables Catalog, Support Form, and About Syngistix.
Software Overview . 11
W ork space
Workspace let you store a group of selected windows for later use. The workspace saves all of
the entries you have made in the windows for your methods and analyses. It also saves the
___location of each window on the screen. The workspace is saved in a workspace file, which has
the extension .ifsx. Using workspaces, you can fill in and arrange windows once, saving time
whenever you set up methods or perform analyses.
Entries that you can save using a workspace include the names of the method and sample
information file, information contained in the Automated Analysis window (Set Up page), and
any information concerning multi-method analysis. It also saves decisions that you have made
for your analysis, such as if data is to be saved and where, if it is to be printed, and if the
method in memory is to be used.
Note: When you close Syngistix, the current Workspace is automatically saved and will redisplay
when you restart Syngistix.
To create a workspace:
1. Open the desired windows, fill in the entries for your methods and analyses and arrange the
windows on the screen.
For example, suppose you have run an analysis and arranged the windows as follows:
2. You can save the entire screen with all of the displayed windows and entries in a
"Workspace" file to redisplay later.
3. To save the position of these windows and the entries within them, from the
Application button select Save As from the Workspace menu item.
4. In the dialog that appears, type a name for the workspace and click the Save button.
For example, suppose you type "analysis".
5. When you wish to view (or use) these windows and their entries again, in the
Application button, select Workspace then Open.
6. In the dialog that appears, select a saved file and click on Open. The windows with the
entries appear exactly as before.
Notifications
Users may elect to play sounds (to notify them) at the end of certain tasks to signal completion
or to signal their attention. Sounds are included in the software and are located in the same
drive in which the application was installed. In order to use sounds, you must have a sound
card installed in your computer. In addition to a sound a user can get an Email or text
notification.
To display this dialog:
 From the Applications button , click on Notifications.
To select sound notifications:
Note: You may use any Windows sound files with a .wav document extension or any .wav sound files
that you might have installed.
1. Select Play sounds for each of the following notifications.

• End of Analysis: Signals when an automated analysis is completed.
• QC Failure: If the Quality Control sample fails and the analysis is stopped, you
can be alerted by a pre-selected sound.
• QC Paused: If the Quality Control sample fails and you have selected to pause
the system (using the Alarm & Pause failure action) you can be alerted by a pre-
selected sound.
• Hardware Error: If a hardware error occurs such as the plasma gases are turned
off, you can be alerted by a pre-selected sound.
• Plasma Extinguished: You will be alerted if the plasma is unexpectedly turned
off (not a manual shut-off).
• End of Optimization Procedure: You are alerted when this procedure is
complete.
• Internal Standard Failure: If an Internal Standard Check fails, you can be
alerted with a pre-selected sound.
• Nebulizer Back Pressure Failure: If the nebulizer back pressure is out of
range, you can be alerted with a pre-selected sound.
2. Click the corresponding Select Sound Effect button to display the Sound Details
dialog to select a sound.
3. Choose either a Default sound or Custom sound.

4. Click the Play Sound button to hear the sound.
Sounds are set to defaults and are interchangeable. For example, you may replace the
End of Analysis sound with that of the QC Failure.
5. After you have checked the appropriate sounds and their related .wav files, click on OK.
The name of the .wav file displays in the Select Sound Effect column in the
Notifications dialog..
To select email notifications:
Note: Before setting email notifications in this dialog, set up the email in the User Setup application.
Refer to the instructions for Email Setup in the User Setup Software Guide (P/N 09931535) of
the User Setup help file.
1. Select an Email/text for each notification.

2. Click the button in the corresponding Select Email/Text Addresses column to
display the Email/Text Selection dialog.
3. Select an Email or text address.
4. Click OK.
The address appears on the button.
How Sw itch User W ork s

1. Click the Switch User button (available in Syngistix application, online and offline).
A confirmation dialog displays forcing the user to verify switching users.
2. Once confirmed the current user is automatically logged off and the standard login
dialog is displayed, forcing a user to login with a new user name/password.
The login dialog will remain until a user logs in with a valid user name/password (the
process cannot be cancelled at this point).
3. Once a new user has logged in the following occur:
• Other running Syngistix applications (Syngistix Online/Offline, Data Manager, ES
Tools) are automatically notified that a new user is logged into Syngistix.
• The “User Name” display on the Status Panel is updated with new user name.
• User-specific settings (e.g. colors on the graphics windows) are immediately
implemented. This means, for example, that if the Spectra window is open and
displaying data, it will be immediately redrawn using the new user’s saved color
settings.
• After a switch user event has occurred, folders in Data Manager will open as per
the main application as follows:
• Log on as User 1 and open the default results database.
• Switch user to User 2.
• User 2 has all their databases in a different path.
• The database currently open, User 1’s, will stay open.
• Click on Open Library.
• This leads to the data path for User 2, now the currently logged in user.
Non-ES m ode (folder “brow sing” is allow ed):

• Opened files/databases (methods, Sample Information…) remain open with the same
names, just as if Browse had been used to open them. No special action needed.
• Further folder selection operations (Open/SaveAs) will immediately use the new user’s
default folders.
ES m ode (folder “brow sing” is not allow ed):

• Open files/databases remain open with the same names.
• Any analysis in progress continues with currently open files/databases.
• Further folder selection operations (Open/SaveAs) will use the new user’s default folders.
• Any open file that comes from a folder that is not the new user’s default folder will be
marked as “not saved”. A “SaveAs” will be needed to save these files.
• Check Analysis (done at the start of any analysis) will check that, if data storage is
turned on, the results database is the correct one for current user (Results.mdb in the
user’s results folder). If it is not, this is a fatal Check Analysis error.
Ex press Analysis (Quick Start)

The Quick Start analysis, based on Workspaces, is a way to quickly run an analysis. Here you
can select a Workspace, Method, Sample Info, and Dataset files, switch the Plasma On or Off,
and then Analyze the samples. Entries that you can save using a workspace include the names
of the method and sample information file, information contained in the Automated Analysis
window (Set Up page), and any information concerning multi-method analysis. It also saves
decisions that you have made for your analysis, such as if data is to be saved and where, if it is
to be printed, and if the method in memory is to be used.
To use Quick Start, follow this procedure:
1. On the Instrument tab, in the Quick Start group, click on the Express Analysis
button.
The Quick Start dialog appears.
2. Click the Plasma on/off button to turn the plasma on.

The Plasma on/off button turns green when the plasma is on.
3. Optionally, if you desire, click the Select Workspace drop-down button v and select
Open or a Recent Workspace name from the drop-down list.
You don't need to select a Workspace to run Quick Start.
Note: Select W orkspace functions in Quick Start the same as if you selected W orkspaces from the
Syngistix application button (ball) in the ribbon.
Select a M ethod
A method controls instrument settings and how the instrument acquires and processes data in
an analysis.
1. Click the open button to display the Open Method dialog.
2. Browse for a method database Library to open.

3. Select the database Library then click Open.
The methods display in the Open Method dialog.
4. Select a method then click the OK button.

The selected method name is displayed.
Select a Sam ple I nform ation File

The Sample Information File contains information about the sample. This information is
recorded in the database after sample data has been collected.
1. Click the open button to display the Open Sample Information dialog.
2. Browse for a Sample Information File to open.

3. Select a Sample Information File then click the Open button.
The selected Sample Information File name is displayed.
Start the Analysis

1. Click the Analyze button.
The analysis starts indicated by the green light.
2. If you want to stop an analysis click the Analyze button.
The Stopping an Analytical Sequence dialog appears.
The R ibbon Tabs

The Ribbon consists of the following tabs.
Instrument, Analysis, Results, Utilities, and Techniques.
I nstrum ent Tab Com m ands
Quick Start
Express Analysis: Use this command to display the Quick Start dialog so that you can turn on
the Plasma and "quickly" set up and run an analysis based on previously stored information.
Plasma Group
Plasma Control: Use this command to view the Plasma Control window. You use this window to
ignite and adjust the plasma, control the peristaltic pump and check instrument status.
Devices Group
Devices: Click Devices to display the dialog to control your devices; Pump, Autosampler, FIAS,
and Remote Trigger.
Probe Up/Down: Use this command to move the autosampler probe up or down, depending
on its current position.
Pump On/Off: Use this command to select options for the peristaltic pump. When you click
on this command, the Configure Pump appears, where you make your selections.
Flush Pump: Use this command to flush the pump.
Go to Wash: Use this command to go to the autosampler ___location of the wash solution. The
___location of the wash solution is selected in the method on the Sampler: Autosampler Wash page.
Go to Location...: Use this command to select the ___location where the autosampler probe will
move. When you click on this command, the Go To Location dialog appears.
Load Tray Use this command to move the autosampler probe up and then to the back left
position. This is the same as clicking on Load Tray in the Automated Analysis Control window.
Spectrom eter Group

Continuous Graphics: The Continuous Graphics window appears. Here you view the data for
selected analytical wavelengths in a continuous readout mode. Use this command to change
the parameters for Settings, Lines, and Colors in the Continuous Graphics display.
Spectrometer Control: Use this command to view the Spectrometer Control window. You
use this window to align the torch viewing position and select spectrometer settings.
Align View: Displays the Spectrometer Control Align view dialog.
Performance Checks: Displays the Spectrometer Control Performance Checks dialog to set
detection limits.
Hg Realign: Displays the Hg Realignment dialog.
Utilities Group
Diagnostics: Displays diagnostic information for Spectrometer, Plasma, Autosampler, and FIAS.
Scheduler: Displays the Scheduler dialog to set the automatic Start up and Shutdown times.
Plasma Cam: When you click the Camera icon the Plasma Camera window displays from
where you can view the Plasma.
Analysis Tab Com m ands
Edit Group
Column Fill..: Use this command to fill a selected column in the Method Editor or Sample
Information Editor. When you click on this command, a dialog appears where you enter values
to fill the selected column.
Insert Rows: Use this command to insert an empty row into a table of parameters such as
those in the Method Editor or Sample Information Editor. Select a position in the line after the
one you want to insert and then select the command. A line will be inserted before the line
containing the cursor. All entries below the inserted line move down one position.
Delete Rows: Use this command to delete selected rows from a table. All entries below move
up respectively one position.
Cut: Use this command to remove selected text or values in a table and place in the Windows
clipboard.
Clear: Use this command to remove selected text or values in a table.
M ethod Group
Method: Use this command to view the Method Editor, where you enter analytical parameters.
New: Use this command to create a new method. The Create New Method dialog appears,
where you can select a set of plasma conditions in a new method for different types of
analyses, for example, organic or aqueous. Or, you can choose to use a copy of the active
method or another stored method as a starting point.
Open: Use this command to select a stored method for editing or performing manual analyses.
The Open Method dialog appears.
Save: Use this command to save changes to the active method. The first time you save a
Method, the Save As Method dialog will appear prompting you for a name. Note: If, for any
reason, a method is not ready to be saved, a check method dialog will appear.
Import Method: Use this command to import a method.
Check Method: Use this command to check for any problems or inconsistencies in the method.
Sort by...
Wavelength - Ascending/Descending: When the Method Editor Instrument page is
open, use this command to sort the elements in the method by the wavelength.
Analyte - Ascending/Descending: When the Method Editor Instrument page is open, use
this command to sort the elements in the method alphabetically by the element name.
Element Symbol: When the Method Editor Instrument page is open, use this command to
sort the elements in the method alphabetically by the element symbol.
Function: When the Method Editor Instrument page is open, use this command to sort the
elements in the method by the function (as indicated by "analyte" or "internal standard").
Sam ple Inform ation Group

Sample Info: Use this command to view the Sample Information Editor, where you enter the
___location of the samples in the autosampler, sample IDs, sample weights and sample volumes.
New: Use this command to create a new sample information file. The New Sample Information
File dialog appears, in which you select the default design (default.sidx) or a design you have
created. The design (.sidx) file is a template that contains the sample parameters that you
want to use. To create a design file, see Using the Sample Information Editor.
Open: Use this command to select a stored sample information file for editing or performing
manual analyses. An Open dialog appears, where you can select a sample information file.
Save: Use this command to save changes to the active sample information file. The first time
you save a sample information file, the Save As Sample Information File dialog will appear
prompting you for a name.
Parameter List: Use this command to open the Sample Information Parameters dialog ,
where you can add parameters to a sample information file. Parameters can be common to all
samples or they can vary by sample.
Analyze Group
Analysis: Use this command to open the Manual and Automated analysis window.
Enable/Disable Analytes: Use this command to include or exclude an analyte from your
method in an analysis. When you click on this command, the Enable/Disable Analytes dialog
appears, where you can make your selections.
Automatic Export: Use this command if you want to automatically export data contained in a
results data set and write it into a file that can be read by many other programs, including
spreadsheet and database management programs. The Automatic Export dialog appears. The
export file contains ASCII data records.
Autosampler Load List: Use this command to open the Autosampler Loading List dialog to
view and print the list of solutions you need to fill the autosampler tray. The information shown
is taken from the active method and the current sample information file.
Data Correction Group

IEC: Use this command to view the Interelement Correction Model Builder. You use this tool to
create factors that correct for spectral interferences.
New IEC Model...: Use this command to create a new Interelement Correction model.
The Interelement Correction (IEC) Model Builder appears showing the Set Up page.
Open IEC Model...: Use this command to open an existing Interelement Correction
model. An Open dialog appears, where you can select an IEC model.
Save IEC Model...: Use this command to save changes to the active Interelement
Correction model.
MSF: Use this command to create a new Multicomponent Spectral Fitting model.
Open MSF Model...: Use this command to open an existing Multicomponent Spectral
Fitting model. An Open dialog appears, where you can select an MSF model.
Save MSF Model...: Use this command to save changes to the active
Multicomponent Spectral Fitting model.
Results Tab Com m ands
Spectra Group
Spectra: Use this command to change the number of panes and the colors that appear in the
Spectra Display window. You can also optimize colors for printing screens of this window in a 2-
column by 3-row format. When you click on this command, the Spectra Display Options dialog
appears.
Clear: Clears the display on the Spectra or Peaks window.
Calibration Group
Calibration: Use this command to view the Calibration Display window, which shows the
active calibration curves.
New Calibration: Use this command to clear the existing calibrations from the Calibration
Display window. You can generate a new calibration by analyzing the calibration standards.
Calibration Summary: When you are performing a Manual Analysis, use this command to
view a summary of the calibration data. When you click on this command, a calibration
summary is added to the information in the Results Display Window. (In an Automated
Analysis, the calibration summary appears automatically in the Results Display Window after
the last standard is analyzed, provided that this option is selected on the Options page of the
Method Editor.)
Recall Calibration...: Use this command to recall a stored calibration from the results library.
After you click on this command, select the results data set where the calibration is stored. If
several sets of calibrations have been run, the most recent one will be recalled.
Clear Calibration Blank: Use this command to clear the calibration blank concentrations from
the analysis. If multiple calibration blanks have been analyzed, all calibration blank
concentrations are cleared.
Clear Reagent Blank: Use this command to clear the reagent blank values for all analysis. If
multiple reagent blanks have been analyzed, all reagent blank values are cleared.
Edit Calibration: Use this command to display the Edit Calibration window where the active
calibration curve can be modified.
Ex am ine Group
Examine: (Spectra/MSF) Use this command after data is acquired and saved to view the
Examine Spectra window, where you can examine the spectra in detail, one element at a time.
You can use this window to overlay spectra and to select peak wavelength and background
points. You also use this window for Multicomponent Spectral Fitting (MSF) by creating models
for analytes and interferents. You must save the data in order to perform these functions in this
window.
Results Group
Results: Use this command to view the Results Display window, which shows the
measurements made on the current sample, the calculated concentration values, and statistical
information.
Clear: Clears the display.
Options:
User Message: Use this command to print or save a message with your results. The
Message dialog appears, where you enter the message.
Analytical Header: Displays the Analytical header in the Results window.
Find: Displays the Find dialog to search within the Results window.
Reset Page Numbers: When information in the Results window is printing, use this
command to reset the page number of the next page to be printed to 1. This overrides the
usual situation where the page numbers are consecutive when the Results window is
printed.
Skip Line: In the Results window, use this command to add a blank line after the end of
the text. When the Results window is printed, it will contain the added space.
New Page: When information in the Results window is printing, use the command to force
a page to print, even if the page is only half filled with information. Usually, a page does
not print until it is completely filled.
Data Viewer: Launches the Data Viewer window containing your Results.
Reprint Data: Use this command to view the Reprint Data window. You use this window to
specify which results data you want to reprint.
Reprocess: Use this command to view the Data Reprocessing window. You use this window to
reprocess existing data.
Utilities Tab Com m ands
Applications Group
Syngistix Offline: Use this command to run Syngistix Offline without the software controlling
the ICP. This allows the user to edit methods and reprocess the data.
Data Manager: Use this command to open Data Manager for reporting, data export, and
database maintenance.
ES Tools: (Displays in ES only) Use this command to open ES Tools application to Review and
Approve/Reject methods and samples.
Resources Group
Wavelength Table: Use this command to view the Wavelength Table window. You use this
window to select wavelengths when creating or editing a method or identifying interferences
viewed in the Examine Spectra window.
Periodic Table: Use this command to open the Method Periodic Table, where you enter
elements and wavelengths to create a new method or modify an existing method.
Techniques Com m ands
ICP Group
Click the appropriate button to change techniques from Continuous to Transient.
Note: The Transient Technique is not available on the Syngistix 4.0 ES version.
Continuous: The default technique is Continuous.

Transient: The Transient technique will also be available if the following conditions are met:
• The configured spectrometer is simultaneous (i.e. Avio 500, Avio 550 Max, Avio 560 Max,
Optima 7300, and Optima 8300).
• A FIAS device with 2 pumps (FIAS-400 or FIMS-400) is configured.
K eyboard Shortcuts
The following keyboard shortcuts are available in Syngistix.
Key Function
F1 Help Help
F2 ---
F3 ---
F4 ---
F5 Analyze Blank
F6 Analyze Standard
F7 Analyze Sample
F8 Cancel Analysis
F9 Plasma On/Off
F10 Goto Location
Shift-F10 Goto Wash
F11 Probe Up/Down
Shift-F11 Load Tray
F12 Pump On/Off

Hide Login (N on ES only)

The "Hide Login" feature is only for the Non-ES version. If the ES version has already been
installed and user wants to use this feature, what user needs to do is not only to uninstall the
ES version, but also to remove GSC data before installing Non-ES version.
The login window contains a Hide login upon initialization check box that when checked,
hides the login window upon initialization of the application (i.e., Syngistix main app, Offline,
and Data Manager) when in No Passwords mode.
1. The Hide Login feature must be first set in the User Setup application by selecting the
Users & Groups tab then selecting No Passwords Login on the Passwords
Control tab.
2. Once this feature is set in User Setup, when logging in to Syngistix, a user checks the
Hide login upon initialization check box and logs in. Upon the next initialization,
Syngistix will login using the last logged in user.
3. To change back to show the login upon initialization, in the ball menu of Syngistix,
there is a menu item: "Show Login". Once selected, the login window with the check
box for hide login will be shown. User can then uncheck the box and login. Upon next
initialization of Syngistix will show the login screen.
Note: This setting does not apply to the Installer, Reconfigure, User Setup and Switch User. Meaning
that user would not see the check box.
Electronic Signature P oints (ES only)

From the User Setup window, click Electronic Signatures. Managing electronic signatures at
signature points is handled through the Electronic Signatures dialog.
The user must supply their user name and password to apply their signature. For the first
signature during a given session, both name and password require user entry. For subsequent
signatures during the same session the User name is pre-populated based on last user name
entered and only password entry is required to implement. A session lasts until the user logs
out, or until a preset amount of time has been reached as determined by the Administrator.
The original user is allowed to remain logged into the application while another user applies a
signature. The person signing may be different from the person currently logged in and using
Syngistix at the bench. The two users may have different permission levels within the
application.
Electronic signatures are required for critical operations, such as those operations which cause
data to be collected, administer security, or cause modifications to protected files.
What is an electronic signature?
An electronic signature as defined by 21 CFR Part 11 means a computer data compilation of
any symbol or series of symbols executed, adopted, or authorized by an individual to be the
legally binding equivalent of the individual's handwritten signature.
What is a signature point?
A Signature Point is a point in the software that requires a signature. The Signature Points are
pre-defined. The user has to enter their User name, Password (if this option has been selected)
and Reason for saving the method. They may also be able to add additional Comments if this
option has previously been selected by the Administrator.
What settings are available for a signature point?

The list of Signature Points within the software are already defined. The Administrator is able to
define the settings (that is, whether a signature and comments are required) for each
Signature Point individually or apply the same settings to all Signature Points. In addition, the
Administrator defines the list of reasons that may have caused each Signature Point to occur.
The user then selects a reason from this pre-defined list in the Signature Point dialog.
A Signature Point will only require a signature if Signature required is selected. Otherwise, the
software will ignore the Signature Point and the user will not be prompted for a signature.
To define settings for each signature point:
1. Select a Signature Point Name from the drop-down list.
2. Select the check box if a Signature is required and if you want to Prompt for
comments.
When the Signature Point dialog is displayed in the software, the user will be prompted
to select a reason. For example, if they are rejecting data because they used the wrong
method, they would select Wrong method implemented from the drop-down list of
available reasons. The list of reasons is also defined on this tab.
3. To add a new reason, click New and type a reason for that signature point.
You can create many reasons for a signature point. You can also Edit or Delete a reason.
4. Click Update All... if you want to update all signature points.
The Update All Signature Points dialog appears.
5. Make you selection for Require Signature and Prompt For Comments then click OK.
6. When done click Apply or click OK to save your entries and exit the dialog.
How do I add a reason for a signature point ?

1. Select the Name of the Signature Point to which you wish to add a new reason.
2. Click New.
The New Reason dialog is displayed.
3. Enter the new reason and click OK.
The reason is added to the list of reasons for the Signature Point.
How do I edit a reason for a signature point?
1. From the Administration menu in the Explorer, select Signature Points.
The Signature Points dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Reason to edit from the list in the Text field.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Reason dialog is displayed.
4. Edit the Reason and click OK.
The Edit Reason dialog closes and the updated reason appears in the Text field. The
changes are recorded in the Audit trail.
How do I delete a reason for a Signature Point?
2. Select the Reason to delete from the list in the Text field.
3. Click Delete.
A message is displayed asking to confirm the deletion.
4. Click OK to confirm.
The Reason is deleted from the Text field. The changes are recorded in the Audit trail.
How do I reorder the reasons listed for a Signature Point?
2. Select the Reason that you wish to move the position of.
3. Use the arrow keys on the right-hand side of the list to move the Reason up or down
as required.
M atrix of Groups and P erm issions

Administrators have permission to administer the software, configure users and groups, and
functions of User setup. This is configurable whether the administrator is restricted to
administration tasks and excluded from analyst-based operations.
The Administrator has permission to turn on and off permissions for all other groups. Default
permissions are as follows:
For Non-ES Only permissions:

• In ES mode, these permissions shall appear unavailable (grayed out).
• In ES Mode, display text shall be as follows:
“N/A: Allow analysis without saving methods.”
“N/A: Allow analysis without saving data.”
Note: Restricted access to functions outside of admin granted permissions are displayed to the user
as either grayed-out or an error message shall pop-up.
M essages
Use this dialog to print a message regarding the analysis in your results. You can also save this
message to the results library.
 On the Results tab in the Results group click Options and select User Message.
Using this dialog:
1. Type the message in the dialog.
2. Check that you have the desired option(s) checked:
• If you select Print Message, the message will appear in the Results window and
be printed in the log.
• If you select Save Message, the message will be saved in the active results
library.
Status P anel Display and Diagnostics

Status Panel
The Status Panel monitors the system to check status of the
following: Plasma Torch, Spectrometer, Autosampler, Auto
Shutdown/Startup, mobile application, and Remote Access.
The Status Panel provides an instant visual so you can see
what is happening at that point in time with your system. You
can move the Status Panel to any ___location within the software
workspace; however, by default it appears in the upper right-
hand portion of the workspace. It is also dockable to either
the left, right, top, or bottom of the workspace by clicking and
holding the mouse and then dragging the Status Display until
the mouse pointer is over the docking arrow for you desired
position. It can also be minimized and/or pinned to the right.
For a listing of status types refer to About the Status Display.
Double-clicking the Status Panel title bar docks the Status
Panel to the right side.
Note: Note: When moving the Status Panel, the screen displays
non-functional "docking control" arrow buttons.
The Status Panel consists the following elements:
System Status: This text field displays a high level status
of the current operation being performed. The upper portion
of the Status Panel consists of a System Status (text field), a
Progress Bar that corresponds with the System Status, and an
additional Detailed Status (text field). This section lists the
various statuses that will be displayed.
Analysis indicator light: This circle changes colors to
indicate whether the system is analyzing, idle, or paused.
Double-clicking on the Analysis Indicator displays the
Analysis window.
Green – A green circle indicates the system is successfully
analyzing.
Gray – A gray circle indicates that the system is idle, but ready.
Yellow – A yellow circle indicates that the system is paused.
Progress bar: The progress bar pertains to the System Status currently displayed. The progress
bar is only shown when a System Status is being displayed that requires a progress bar.
Note: Double-clicking on an icon displays the appropriate screen. For example, double-clicking on the
Hardware icon takes you to Diagnostics, while double-clicking on the Plasma icon takes you to
Plasma Control.
User Name: Displays the User Name. Double-clicking on the user icon (to the left of User
Name) displays the User Details panel which displays the User ID, User name, Group
membership, and Permissions.
Detailed Status: This text field is only displayed when an operation displayed in the System
Status requires an additional detailed status.
Active data files: Lists the current Method, Sample Information File, and Data Set.
Diagnostic Status: The most recent diagnostic status from each piece of hardware
configured for the system next to the corresponding appropriate icon. Diagnostic Status will
also include an icon and status for scheduler.
Remote Client Status: Displays if the remote client is connected or not connected. Double-
click on the icon to display the Remote Access diagnostics page.
Note: You can drag the panel around the workspace and it will behave like a floating pane. To dock
the panel double-click anywhere in the pane and the pane is docked in the right-hand area of
the Syngistix workspace.
Note: If Data Storage is off, the Data Set name field will state: “Not saving data.” and will appear in
italics.
User Details Panel

 Display this panel by double-clicking the icon left of User Name in the
Status Panel.
This panel displays information about the User; User ID, User Name, Group membership, and
Permissions.
Status I cons
By double-clicking on the status icon for the Plasma, Spectrometer, or Autosampler, you can
get further information about the system component in the Instrument Diagnostics window.
By double-clicking on the status icon for Auto Shutdown/Startup, you open the Automatic
Shutdown/Startup dialog.
Plasma Status Icons

The following icons are used for instrument models with a horizontally mounted torch.
R adial
Not Connected Radial Horizontal Radial Horizontal Radial Plasma Error

Connected Plasma Off Connecting Connected Horizontal On Horizontal Radial
Axial
Not Connected Connected Axial Plasma On Radial Plasma On Radial Plasma Error
Plasma Off Plasma Off Vertical and
Horizontal Axial
For instrument models with a vertically mounted torch, the icons have a different orientation
but the meaning is the same.
Spectrom eter Status Icons
Not Connected Connecting Connected Spectrometer

Error
Autosam pler Status Icons
Not Connected Connecting Connected
Scheduler Status Icon
Shows only if something is happening.
Particle Counter Status Icon
Shows only if the particle counter is connected.
Rem ote Access Status Icons
Remote client connected
System M essages
The System Monitor windows display the most recent messages pertaining to the system
component. To view a complete log of messages, refer to the Instrument Diagnostics Window.
Instrum ent Diagnostics W indow

You use this window to review the value of parameters for the overall system and the
spectrometer, plasma, and autosampler. This window is also used to reset communication
between the system components.
To display this window:
1. In the Instrument tab in the Utilities group, click on Diagnostics.
The Instrument Diagnostics window contains tabs that provide access to information on
each system component, including the status of the component and a log of messages.
2. Click on the appropriate tab on the top of the window to select these pages:
• Spectrometer Page
• Plasma Page
• Autosampler Page
• FIAS Page
• Particle Counter Page
• Firmware Page
• Remote Access
Spectrom eter Page

This is the first page that displays in the Diagnostics window. The Spectrometer page displays
status information and the Instrument Message History for the spectrometer.
Status Description and Value: This includes information on the Spectrometer model,
Current time, Operating mode, Connection mode, Control module version, Firmware and Kernal
version, Serial numbers, Gasses, Temperature, Water and Voltages the current status of the
instrument. To view all of the information, use the scroll bar.
Instrument Message History: This includes a log of all of the messages that have been
displayed in the System Monitor for the spectrometer. The most recent message is listed first.
All messages listed here pertain to the spectrometer hardware. Messages marked with a
question mark (?) indicate a "marginal" problem such as a temperature or voltage is too low or
too high. Messages marked with an asterisk (*) indicate a "fatal" problem that would cause the
spectrometer to shut down. Refer to Operating Status Problems for common status problems.
For information on the different spectrometer error messages, refer to the Hardware Guide for
your spectrometer. To print this information, click on the Print button.
Configure IP: Click on this button to launch the Spectrometer IP Configure dialog. (This
is not available when the Simulation mode is configured.)
Note: This button only appears for spectrometers connected via Ethernet.
Advanced: Click this button to display a dialog describing the argon quick change feature.
Initialize: This button appears only for Simultaneous ICP spectrometers and is used to start
up the spectrometer when it is in standby mode.
Reconnect: Click on this button to reset communication between the system components if a
problem has occurred. For more information, see System Communication.
Print: Click on this button to print the instrument status information and the message history.
This information is useful for PerkinElmer service engineers in troubleshooting a problem.
IP Configure Dialog
This dialog enables you to set the IP address configuration for your spectrometer.
MAC Address: Enter the Media Access Control (MAC) Address that is specific to your
spectrometer and is a unique identifier. It is located on the spectrometer board, and on a
sticker that is located on the back of your instrument.
Get IP Configuration: Click the Get IP Configuration button to retrieve the IP configuration
from the spectrometer. The Status area displays the status of selected action.
Configuration Section: Network node configuration of the spectrometer.
IP Address: An identifier for a device on a TCP/IP network. Enter the IP Address when Static
IP configuration is selected.
Network Mask: Groups IP addresses together to form a sub net. Enter the Network Mask
when Static IP configuration is selected.
Gateway: IP address of your network Gateway. Enter the network address of your network
gateway when Static IP configuration is selected.
Device Name: The name used to identify your spectrometer rather than IP address, when
DHCP is selected. Enter the Device Name to identify your spectrometer when DHCP is selected.
Static IP: Click to select a fixed Internet Protocol address.
DHCP: Click to select Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), a protocol for assigning a
dynamic IP address on a network.
Set IP Configuration: Click this button to set the entered IP configuration into Syngistix and
optionally the spectrometer when the Spectrometer checkbox is checked.
Restore Defaults: Restores default values into all entry fields.
Note: This button does not configure the spectrometer. Only the dialog fields are affected.
Close: Exits the dialog. No other action is taken.

Spectrometer: Check to configure your spectrometer in addition to Syngistix.
Syngistix: This is always checked to select Syngistix configuration.
Configuring IP
When you open this dialog, a default MAC address is entered into the MAC Address entry field.
The first four fields are populated with the best known starting address for spectrometers. The
last two are populated with zeroes. The MAC address will be persisted by Syngistix, and will only
require re-entry upon: Re-installation of Syngistix, or when connecting the PC to another
spectrometer. Default values for all other dialog fields are entered into the dialog. Those fields
are: IP Address, Network Mask, Gateway, Device Name, Static IP, and DHCP. Values for all
these fields are persisted by Syngistix.
The Syngistix checkbox is always checked and always disabled. Its purpose is to indicate that
Syngistix is always configured whenever the Set IP Configuration button is selected. The
Spectrometer checkbox is unchecked when the dialog is opened.
1. Before proceeding, enter the MAC Address for the spectrometer the first time
Syngistix is installed.
The MAC address is unique to the spectrometer and is located on the spectrometer
board, and on a sticker that is located on the back of your instrument.
2. Click Get IP Configuration once a valid MAC Address has been entered to retrieve
the configuration currently set into the spectrometer.
The configuration is displayed in controls within the Configuration group box. The
status display informs you of the operation sequence and the outcome.
Messages are displayed describing operations performed.
Note: The Status display is cleared upon entry of any value into any field.
3. Change or set a Static or Dynamic IP address.

• To change or set a static IP address: Click the Static IP radio button. Enter the IP
Address, network mask, and gateway IP address into their respective entry fields,
and click Set IP configuration. Monitor the Status display area for the "IP
configuration set Now retrieving IP configuration" message. Then monitor the Status
display area for the "IP configuration retrieved" message. This completes the
operation. Perform other actions or exit the dialog by selecting the Exit button.
• To set a dynamic IP address: Click on the DHCP radio button. Enter a Device
Name (See description below). The IP address, network mask, and gateway IP
address will be assigned by a server configured on the network. Monitor the
Status display area for the "IP configuration set Now retrieving IP configuration"
message. Then monitor the Status display area for the "IP configuration retrieved"
message. This completes the operation. Perform other actions or exit the dialog
by selecting the Exit button.
Note: Check the Spectrometer checkbox to configure your spectrometer in addition to Syngistix. Only
the Device Name is required to configure Syngistix.
Device Name Allowable Settings

The Device Name will be used by ICP Syngistix for connection to your spectrometer when using
DHCP. The DHCP server on your network assigns an IP address and will map the Device Name
to that IP address when your application software (ICP Syngistix) connects to the
spectrometer. The name is determined by you. Syntax rules for the name are: The name must
be unique within your network. One (1) to twenty-five (25) characters can be used. The
characters can be either letters or numbers, and the first character must be a letter. Upper and
lower case letters may be used, although no distinction is made between upper and lower case
by a DHCP server when mapping a Device Name.
4. Recommended Setup for simultaneous spectrometers: Although the TCP/IP

connection described in this document is flexible enough to support most LAN
topologies, it is recommended that a direct, dedicated, static, single cable connection is
used to connect the PC to the spectrometer. The main driver for this decision is that
performance can be affected by a DHCP server, and other LAN traffic.
The PC can be connected to a LAN and/or Internet via a second network adapter. The
IP configuration of this adapter, being separate from the spectrometer network, can be
configured to the requirements of the customer's LAN and/or internet provider. A USB
adapter is available for this purpose from PerkinElmer (part number 09404826).
The spectrometer network has a class B Network mask "255.255.0.0" with the network
portion of the IP set to "64.1".
Spectrom eter Setup

Spectrometers that use Ethernet will have the same IP configuration:
Static IP address "64.1.3.1", Network mask "255.255.0.0". Gateway is not used and can be set
to "0.0.0.0". Device name is not used and can be set to blank.
PC Setup
All PCs used with Ethernet spectrometers will have the same IP configuration for the network
card used for connection to the spectrometer:
Static IP address "64.1.3.2", Network mask "255.255.0.0", Gateway is not used and can be set
to "0.0.0.0", Device name is not used and can be set to blank.
Argon Quick Change

This feature allows the user to shut down the necessary components of the spectrometer to
allow for the argon gas tank to be changed without powering off the instrument.
• If the tank is changed in less than 30 minutes, the system will be ready in 15 minutes.
• If changing the tank takes more than 30 minutes, then the system will be ready in 75
minutes
This feature is accessed from the Spectrometer tab in the Diagnostics window.
1. Click the Advanced button to display the Argon Quick Change window.
2. Click the Argon Quick Change button.
This displays the Are you sure dialog.
3. Click the Change the argon tank button to put the instrument in standby so you can
change the tank.
This displays the Proceed now with changing the tank dialog.
4. When done click the Tank change complete. Continue button.

The instrument now goes out of standby and begins to reinitialize. Monitor the progress
in the Instrument Message History portion of the Spectrometer Diagnostics tab.
Plasm a Page
This page displays the status information and the Instrument Message History for the plasma
generator.
Status Description and Value: This includes information on the generator model, base
module software and firmware versions, and the current status of the plasma generator. To
view all of the information, use the scroll bar.
displayed in the System Monitor for the plasma. The most recent message is listed first. All
messages listed here pertain to the plasma generator. Messages marked with a question mark
(?) indicate a "marginal" problem such as a temperature or voltage is too low or too high.
Messages marked with an asterisk (*) indicate a "fatal" problem causing the plasma generator
to shut down. Refer to Operating Status Problems for common status problems. For
information on the different plasma generator error messages, refer to the Hardware Guide for
your spectrometer. To print the information, click on the Print button.
Save Log: Click on this button to select Black Box log or Incident log in the popup dialog.
Note: When a Black Box log file or Incident log file is uploaded and saved on disk two copies of the
file are saved: (1) a text file in the current format, and (2) a comma-delimited CSV file.
Advanced: Click this button to display the Advanced Plasma Functions dialog. Here you
can do the following:
• Reset Emergency Plasma OFF setting
• Calibrate auxiliary and plasma torch gases.
• Change torch and injector adapter O-Rings. Reset the timer after replacing the O-rings.
• View instructions on fixing and/or preventing an axial optic overheating error.
Reconnect: Click on this button to reset communication between the system components if a
problem has occurred. For more information, see System Communication.
Print: Click on this button to print the status information and the message history. This
information is useful for PerkinElmer service engineers in troubleshooting a problem.
O-ring M aintenance
The torch o-rings have a recommended maximum lifespan of 300 insertions or 1 year of use,
whichever comes first. Worn o-rings may lead to difficulty when lighting the plasma and poor
performance and must be replaced.
1. Please replace the two torch o-rings with PerkinElmer part number N0791334 and
injector o-ring with PerkinElmer part number N0791333.
2. Once the o-rings have been replaced, click on RESET to remove this dialog from the
screen and reset the software.
Avio Ax ial Optic Temperature Sensor

In the Avio, the axial optic flat is bonded to a heat sink above the plasma. The function of the
sensor is to read the temperature of the heat sink, which reflects the temperature of the axial
optic. If an overheating error occurs, you should:
1. Clear all air inlets.
2. Make sure the ventilation ducting is attached to the exhaust and secured in place with
a hose clamp.
3. Increase the ventilation rate (the ventilation rate must be at least 120 cfm).
The result of not correcting an overheating error will be the degradation of the axial optic flat,
shortening its lifetime, and requiring it to be replaced prematurely.
Autosam pler Page

This page displays status information and the Instrument Message History for the autosampler.
Status Description and Value: This includes information on the Autosampler model,
Instrument serial number, Control module version, Firmware version, and Tray file name. To
view all of the information, use the scroll bar.
displayed in the System Monitor for the plasma. The most recent message is listed first. All
messages listed here pertain to the autosampler. Refer to Operating Status Problems for
common status problems. To print the information, click on the Print button
Firmware: Click on this button to install the firmware used when the current version of
Syngistix was developed.
Note: The Firmware button only appears if you have an autosampler that uses downloadable
firmware. Also, you must have administrator privileges for the local Windows Workstation. You
can check for such privileges under Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > User Manager.
Reconnect: If the autosampler has been disconnected, then reconnected; the autosampler
power was off, then turned back on when the software was started; or if you have selected a
different type of autosampler, use the Reconnect button on the Autosampler page of the
Diagnostics window. For more information, see System Communication.
Print: Click on this button to print the status information and the message history. This
information is useful for PerkinElmer service engineers in troubleshooting a problem.
FI AS Page
This page shows important information about the flow-injection system that is useful for
troubleshooting and service purposes.
Status Description and Value: This information identifies your flow-injection system. You
should have this information available when you discuss problems with your PerkinElmer
service engineer.
Instrument Message History: This is a list of all the messages sent to and received from
the computer. This is very useful diagnostic information for the service engineer.
Reconnect: Use this button to reset the communication between the flow-injection system
and the computer.
Print: Use this to print the information shown in this window. This page displays status
information and the Instrument Message History for the FIAS.
Particle Counter Page

This page displays status information and the Instrument Message History for the particle counter.
Status Description and Value: This includes information on the DLL version, Firmware
version, Counter serial number, Sensor serial number, Data delay(s), Time per replicate(s),
Flow rate, and Counter calibration file. To view all of the information, use the scroll bar.
displayed in the System Monitor for the Particle Counter. The most recent message is listed
first. All messages listed here pertain to the autosampler. Refer to Operating Status Problems
for common status problems. To print the information, click on the Print button.
Reconnect: Click on this button to reset communication between the computer and the particle
counter. You should do this only if the program was not able to communicate when it first loaded
or has lost communication. This could happen, for example, if power to the particle counter was
not turned on or the cable was not connected. For more information, see System Communication.
Print: Click on this button to select a printer and print the status information and the message
history. This information is useful for PerkinElmer service engineers in troubleshooting a problem.
Rem ote Access Page

This page displays status information and a list of all commands sent by the remote client.
Status Description and Value: This includes information on the Server IP address, Server
port, and Client name, IP address. To view all of the information, use the scroll bar.
Remote Access History: This includes a log of all of the commands sent by the remote
client with the most recent listed first.
Print: Click on this button to select a printer and print the remote access command history.
This information is useful for PerkinElmer service engineers in troubleshooting a problem.
Firm w are Page

The Firmware page shows the firmware currently installed in each instrument and the expected
firmware version. It then provides the ability to download newer firmware versions for a
selected device.
Device: Displays the devices installed.

Installed Version: Displays the currently installed version of the firmware.
Expected Version: Displays the latest version of firmware.
Action: Displays OK if the versions are OK or Download if you need to update.
Download: Displays whether it is N/A (not applicable) or a check box if you want to update.
Print: Click to print.
Download: Click the button to download the new firmware for the selected device(s).
P erform ing Analyses
P erform ing Analyses Overview
Observe Safety Precautions
Before setting up and operating the instrument, carefully read the

safety precautions described in the Hardware Guide and observe
these precautions at all times.
To perform analyses:
 Use the tabs shown above to select the group of steps required for your analyses.
For information on the system installation, maintenance, and troubleshooting, refer to the
Hardware Guide for that instrument.
Performing Analyses Tab Results
1 Set Up - Setting up the Instrument • system checked

• major components turned on
• plasma ignited successfully
2 Optimize - Optimizing and Verifying • hardware optimized and ready to go

Performance
3 Files - Selecting a Workspace, Method, • workspace created with required windows

and Sample Information File • method or methods designated for your analyses
• file created for samples in your analyses
4 Options - Setting Options • results data set named

in Control Window • such as turning options on or off, automatically
selected
5 Arrange - Arranging Samples • solutions prepared

• samples placed in the autosampler
6 Analyze - Analyzing Samples • concentrations of all unknown samples determined
7 Reports - Generating Reports • data from analyses collected and then printed
using Syngistix Data Manager
8 Off - Shutting Down the Instrument • plasma extinguished

• instrument shut down or put in an automatic
shutdown/startup mode
Performing Analyses . 45
1 Set Up
Sum m ary of Steps

Setting up the instrument requires these basic steps.
 Click below on the desired setup step or use the buttons above to move through the steps.
Setup Step What's Required

Checking the System Check these items regularly to make sure that the system is
set up properly.
Starting the Instrument and Switch on power to the various components of the system.
Accessories
Starting the Computer and Start the software and verify instrument configuration.
Software
Setting Up and Starting the Install the pump tubing so the pump is ready to start
Peristaltic Pump or FIAS automatically once the plasma is ignited
Preparing to Ignite the Plasma Make important checks and changes to avoid ignition
problems.
Igniting the Plasma Proper gas flows to the torch.
Examining the Plasma Observe the plasma to determine its stability.
Correcting Unsuccessful Ignition Troubleshoot problems if the plasma does not light.
ESI w ith prepFAST Softw are Requirem ents and Device

Configuration
Softw are Requirem ents
Verify that the ESI SC software (version 2.6.2.24 or later) has been configured and installed as
specified in software installation instructions before configuration of the prepFAST hardware.
Verify that Syngistix for ICP has been installed and configured to use an ESI with prepFAST.
S400V Hardw are Configuration in ESI SC

Initial Device Setup (necessary only when connecting the S400V hardware the first time):
1. Verify that the S400V device is configured by going to the Configure Syringe window (ESI
SC>Configure>Syringe) to select the S400V(prepFAST) system.
2. Check Enable Syringe COM and select the COM port that has been automatically identified
as “Syringe (detected)”.
3. Close the Configure Syringe window and click on Initialize Autosampler.
prepFAST Device Configuration in Syngistix for ICP

1. From the Syngistix for ICP software, verify that the Autosampler Model is identified as ESI
with prepFAST by selecting from the Instruments tab in the Devices group, the Devices
button, then click the Autosampler tab.
2. If the ESI with prepFAST is not shown on the Autosampler Configuration screen, use the
Syngistix for ICP Reconfigure utility to select the correct autosampler.
3. Use the Flush at start of analysis check box to enable/disable the prepFAST Flush routine
that occurs at the start of an analysis or when resuming an analysis.
prepFAST Softw are Configuration

Selecting the prepFAST m ethod
The main window of the ESI SC software will allow the user to select the desired prepFAST method.
Three selection choices are presented as shown in the screen below:
prepFAST Method File: Selecting from standard prepFAST methods can be accomplished by first
selecting the desired Flow Rate then selecting the sample Loop Size and the maximum dilution
factor range. The specific name will change to match the prepFAST Settings that are selected.
Advanced: Use this selection when you desire to use a method other than the default methods
provided. The manual selection of a specific method will then be available in the FAST Method Control
window.
2 Optim izing and Verifying Perform ance
Before proceeding, be sure you have completed instrument setup as outlined in Set Up: Summary of
Steps.
Perform ance Checks

Performance checks should be done regularly to help assure acceptable performance. The frequency of
using these checks depends on how critical analytical precision is in your application. To help assure
acceptable performance and to monitor instrument condition, it is suggested that a log be maintained.
These tests include:
• Sodium bullet test, where the aspiration of a solution of 1000 mg/L or more of sodium should
produce a defined "bullet" in the center of the plasma discharge. This test allows you to visualize
the sample flow in the plasma, so that you can check that the sample introduction system is
working correctly.
• Background Equivalent Concentration (BEC) test, which is a useful indicator of the relative
sensitivity of the instrument for a particular emission line. The BEC value is the concentration of an
element which would produce the same emission intensity as the plasma background measured at
the analyte wavelength. The BEC checks torch alignment, plasma viewing height (only meaningful
in radial view), nebulizer gas flow rate, and incident RF power.
• Precision Test, which expresses the short-term precision for several measurements for a strong
emission line. This test indicates the Relative Standard Deviation (RSD) of the instrument's analyte
emission intensity or concentration measurements. The RSD may also be referred to as the CV
(Coefficient of Variation). A high RSD or CV is usually indicative of a problem with the sample
introduction system such as improper drainage, leaks, improper tension on the pump tubing, worn
pump tubing, or nebulizer problems.
• Detection Limit Test, which measures the noise of the baseline signal in concentration units to
give an indication of the lowest concentration of an element which can be measured. The
detection limit is calculated as three times the standard deviation of the blank.
To make performance checks use the following procedures in sequence or use the Browse buttons to
move through each procedure:
1. Sodium Bullet Test
2. Creating a Method for the Performance Checks
3. Setting Up for the Performance Checks
4. Performing the Background Equivalent Concentration (BEC) Test
5. Performing the Precision Test
6. Performing the Detection Limit Test
Troubleshooting
 If acceptable performance is not found with these tests, see the Hardware Guide for
troubleshooting performance problems. The performance tests can often pinpoint the cause of
the problem.
3 Selecting a W orkspace, M ethod, and Sam ple

Inform ation File
Before you can analyze samples, you need: windows suitable for your analysis; one or more
methods; and a sample information file.
Note: The Workspace displayed when you close Syngistix is saved and redisplays when you reopen Syngistix.
To select these items for automated analyses:

1. Select Workspace from the Application button then click on Open to display the Open
Workspace File dialog.
2. The group of windows (a workspace) that appears enables you to carry out your analysis.
The Automated Analysis Control window must appear in this workspace. For example, you
can set up a workspace using the following windows; Spectra Display, Results Display,
Calibration Display, and Plasma Control or any other windows of your choice.
If you do not select a workspace, you can select these windows individually from the
Windows and Tools menus. The selected windows can be saved as a workspace by selecting
Save As from the Workspace menu.
3. In the Analysis window, select a method on the Automated tab by double-clicking on the first
empty cell in the Method column. In the Open Method dialog, select the method that you
wish to use. For more information, see Opening and Saving Methods and Results.
If an appropriate method is not there, see Creating a Method.
4. To select more than one method, you must first select Specify methods for your
analysis.
This option is located above the Methods and Sample Locations table. Repeat Step 2 to select
additional methods.
5. Select a sample information file if desired. By using a sample information file, information you
supply about the samples (for example, sample weights or dilutions) is used in the analysis.
In the Automated Analysis Control window, click on Open... and select a sample information
file in the Open Sample Information dialog.
If an appropriate file is not present, see Creating a Sample Information File for details.
If you want to run samples from a sample information file, first select the check box for Use
Sample Information. In the table, under the Sample Info File column, three options
appear in a drop-down list. If you want to analyze all of the samples in the sample
information file, select All Defined from the drop-down list. If you want to select only
certain autosampler locations, select Locations. If you want to select samples by the sample
numbers listed in the sample information file, select Sample Nos. If you select Locations or
Sample Nos., be sure to enter the autosampler locations or sample numbers in the
appropriate columns. Example: 10-15, 18, 20, 22, 25-30
- or -
If you are not using a sample information file, deselect the check box for Use Sample
Information. Then enter the autosampler locations in the Locations column.
6. Type individual locations or a range of locations. Use commas to separate the locations and
ranges. It is not necessary to enter the locations of blanks, QC's, check or calibration
solutions. Enter locations for these if you want them to be treated as a sample within the
analysis. Example: 10-15, 18, 20, 22 , 25-30.
7. The settings you have made can be saved in a workspace by selecting Save As from the
Workspace menu.
To select these items for manual analyses:
1. Select Workspace from the Application button then click on Open to display the Open
Workspace File dialog.
The group of windows (a workspace) that appears enables you to carry out your analysis.
The Manual Analysis Control window must appear in this workspace. Optional windows
include: Spectra Display, Results Display, Calibration Display, and Plasma Control.
If you do not select a workspace, you can select these windows individually from the
Windows and Tools menus. The selected windows can be saved as a workspace by selecting
Save As from the Workspace menu.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Method group, click on Open to display the Open method
dialog to select a method.
3. If an appropriate method is not there, see Creating a Method.
4. A sample information file is optional. You may want a sample information file if you want to
enter all the sample information before an analysis begins. See Creating a Sample
Information File for details.
If you do not select a sample information file, the software uses the default file called
"Untitled." Be sure to open the Sample Information Editor and check that entries in the
"Untitled" file are appropriate for your analysis. If some entries are completed, but others are
not, the sample concentration may not be reported in sample units. See Sample Preparation
Parameters for details.
Workspace menu.
4 Setting Options in Control W indow
Before you can analyze samples, you need to set certain options in the control window that you are
using. These options are not specified in the method and include: specifying the results data set
where you will save data; specifying whether you want the results printed during the analysis;
specifying special automatic startup and shutdown options; and specifying automatic export of data.
For all analyses, to select options for the analyses:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Analyze group, click on Analysis.
2. In the Automated Analysis window or the Manual Analysis window, click the check box
next to Save data to Results Data Set, click on the folder icon in the field box and in the
Select Results Data Set dialog that appears, type a new data set name, or select an
existing ones. If this data set already exists, new data will be added to it. When you select a
results data set name, the Save Data box is selected automatically (a check mark appears),
confirming that data will be saved.
Note: Archive result data sets periodically to avoid filling up space on the hard disk. For more information,
please refer to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of the Data Manager Help. To calculate
the amount of hard disk storage space that is required for storing result data sets, see Equation for
Calculating Disk Storage for Results.
3. To print a log of intensity counts, analytical results, and other information about the analysis,
select the Print Log During Analyses box.
For automated analyses only, to select other options:
1. If you want certain components to be automatically switched off when the analysis is
finished, first select the Automatic Shutdown box, then click on Set... to open the
Scheduler dialog. Complete this dialog, and click on OK.
2. If you want to enable Automatic Startup, use the above dialog to schedule an automatic
startup. You can also specify whether the plasma is to be ignited and if the pump is to begin
operating upon startup.
3. During the analyses, you can automatically export data contained in the results data set and
write it into a file that can be read by many other programs, including spreadsheet and
database management programs. To do this, select Auto Export, then click on Set... and
select the Export Designs. You must first create the Export Design(s) in the Syngistix Data
Manager. An export design defines a subset of data items that you want to export from a
data set. For more information, refer to Syngistix Data Manager Help.
4. On simultaneous ICP instruments only, you can select automatic wavelength realignment to
occur at regular intervals. Select the Auto Wavelength Realign box on the Automated
Analysis window and, then click on Settings to display the dialog to set a time interval.
Workspace menu.
5 Arranging Sam ples
Before arranging samples in the autosampler using the autosampler loading list, you must have
entered all information for your samples and solutions in your method or methods and in the sample
information file if you have one.
For details on where to enter this information, see: Manual Analysis Control, Method Editor, and
Sample Information Editor.
To get samples and solutions ready for analyses:
 Prepare the required samples and solutions according to your standard laboratory
procedures.
To load samples and solutions in the autosampler using the Automated Analysis Control window:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Analyze group, click on Autosampler Loading List to see a
list of the locations of your samples and solutions.
2. Load samples and solutions in an empty tray.
3. In the Instrument tab, in the Devices group, click on Load Tray.
4. Place the loaded tray in the autosampler.
5. On the Instrument tab, in the Devices group, click on Go to Wash.
To load samples and solutions in the autosampler when the Manual Analysis window is open:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Analyze group, click on Autosampler Loading List to see a
list of the locations of your samples and solutions.
2. Load samples and solutions in an empty tray.
3. On the Instrument tab, in the Devices group, click on Load Tray or press Shift-F11.
4. Place the loaded tray in the autosampler.
5. Click on the Go to Wash Loc. button in the Manual Analysis Control window.
6 Analyze
Before analyzing samples, be sure you have performed all preliminary steps as summarized in
Performing Analyses: Overview.
There are three types of analyses:
 Select how you will analyze samples from the options below.
• Automated Analyses, using an autosampler to analyze all samples and solutions.
• Manual Analyses, manually presenting samples and solutions to the instrument.
• Manual Analyses Using the Autosampler, requiring both manual operations and an
autosampler to analyze samples and solutions. In this case, often used for method
development, you want direct control of the autosampler, so the autosampler is just
holding samples for you.
Autom ated Analyses

Be sure you have performed all preliminary steps as shown in Performing Analyses: Overview.
Automated analyses are performed using the Automated Analysis Control window. Other
windows such as the Results window are optional.
To perform automated analyses:
 Click on the desired step or use the buttons above.
Step What it does
Examining the Run List Before analyzing samples, you should check the run list. If any changes are
required, you must change either the method or the sample information
file, then rebuild the run list.
Calibrating and Analyzing Solutions and samples are analyzed. A calibration is performed according to
Samples your specifications, and you can recalibrate if desired.
Stopping and Restarting During the analysis, you may need to stop operations and restart the
analysis, according to these procedures.
Analyzing Additional Samples While an automated analysis is in progress, you can add samples to the
sample sequence, enter information on a new sample, or analyze additional
samples at the end of an analysis.
Note: During an analysis, the shutter automatically opens and closes for each sample. If you have an
extensive number of samples to analyze, however, you may wish to set the shutter to the open
position manually to increase analytical throughput. You do this in the Spectrometer Control Window.
Be sure to close the shutter when the analysis is complete.
Leaving the shutter in the open position with the plasma on could
lead to deterioration of the optics and eventual degradation of UV
performance. It is recommended that the shutter be closed when
analyses are not being performed.
M anual Analyses
Be sure you have performed all preliminary steps as shown in Performing Analyses: Overview.
Manual analyses are performed using the Manual Analysis Control window. Other windows such as
the Results window are optional.
To perform manual analyses:
 Click on the desired step or use the buttons above.
Step What it does
A calibration is performed according to your specifications, and you can

Calibrating
recalibrate if desired.
Analyzing Samples Solutions and samples are analyzed.
During the analysis, you may need to stop operations and restart the analysis,
Stopping and Restarting
according to these procedures.
M anual Analyses Using an Autosam pler

Tip: Use Go to W ash Loc. before analyzing samples to avoid carryover from your calibration standards.
To analyze samples with a sample information file:

The name of the sample information file you have selected is displayed in the Manual Analysis Control
window next to Info. File.
1. In the Manual Analysis Control window, select the autosampler ___location from the values next
to Go to A/S Loc.
Note: In a manual analysis, the autosampler ___location in a sample information file is not used by the
software; therefore, you must use Go to A/ S Loc. to select the ___location each time you analyze a
sample.
2. Click on Go to A/S Loc. button

3. Select the number (No.) of the sample you want to analyze.
4. Click on Analyze Sample.
To analyze samples without a sample information file:
1. In the Manual Analysis Control window, select the autosampler ___location from the values next
to Go to A/S Loc.
2. Click on Go to A/S Loc. button.
3. If desired, type a sample ID (ID).
4. If desired, enter other information (such as sample weight and dilution values) about the
sample. To do this, click on Details...
Note: If you want different categories of information to appear in the Sample Details dialog, you need to
add the categories to the sample information file. For more information, see Customizing the Sample
Information Editor.
5. Click on Analyze Sample.

7 Generating Reports
If you saved data in a results data set (as requested in an analysis control window), you can use the
Syngistix Data Manager to generate reports in a wide variety of formats.
To start the Syngistix Data Manager:
 On the Utilities tab, in the Application group, click on Data Manager.
or
 On the task bar at the bottom of your screen, click on the Start button, select All Programs
PerkinElmer Syngistix for ICP Data Manager.
8 Shutting Dow n the Instrument
There are two ways to extinguish the plasma. You can extinguish the plasma manually or you can
extinguish it automatically using Automatic Shutdown. Automatic Shutdown can be selected in the
Scheduler dialog, which is accessed from the Automated Analysis Control page or using the Scheduler
command in the Utilities group in the Instrument tab.
Another mode is Automatic Startup, which can also be selected in the Scheduler dialog, as described
above. If you selected Automatic Startup to restart your system, this affects the procedures that you
follow when you shut down.
Note: If you have scheduled an Automatic Shutdown or Startup, you must leave the Syngistix software on.
Do not exit the software.
To automatically extinguish the plasma and put the spectrometer on standby:

If you have selected Automatic Shutdown and indicated how you want the system to shut down, the
system will automatically shut down and flush the sample introduction system according to your
choices. The system next extinguishes the plasma and puts the spectrometer into standby if that
option was selected. The software remains on.
To manually extinguish the plasma:
1. Flush the sample introduction system for five minutes with the plasma on. During this five
minutes, if you analyzed aqueous solutions, either flush with deionized water only or flush
with a dilute acid solution, followed by deionized water. After analyzing organic solutions,
flush the system with an appropriate clean solvent.
2. Extinguish the plasma by clicking on the Plasma Off switch in the Plasma Control window.
Note: Pressing the red Em ergency P lasm a Off button on the instrument allows you to shut off the
plasma directly and bypasses the software. This button can be used if the software hangs up or if
communication between the instrument and the computer is interrupted. Using this button does not
harm the instrument. If you use this button, you must reset the system before you can reignite the
plasma. To reset the system, be sure that the red button is in the out position, and select the R eset
Em ergency Off command in the System menu.
3. When the plasma is extinguished, the plasma off/on switch in the Plasma Control window
changes from blue to white and the peristaltic pump stops pumping solution to the plasma.
4. Proceed with this step depending upon the conditions of Automatic Startup.
If Automatic Startup is not being used.
-or-
If Automatic Startup has been selected and does not include turning on the plasma and the
pump.
 Take the sample capillary out of the flush solution, and then run the pump for a few
minutes to clear solvent from the sample capillary and pump the spray chamber.
 Release the clamp lever and remove the tubing. (This will increase the lifetime of the
pump tubing.)
Always remove the sample capillary or the autosampler

probe from the solution when you are finished using the
pump. Otherwise, the solution can siphon into the spray chamber
and flood it.
If Automatic Startup has been selected and includes turning on the plasma and the pump.
• Leave the sample capillary in the wash solution.
• If the level of the wash solution reservoir in the autosampler is above the spray chamber,
leave the peristaltic pump tubing clamped. This prevents the wash solution from being
siphoned into the spray chamber.
-or-
• If the level of the wash solution reservoir in the autosampler is below the spray chamber,
release the clamp lever on the pump tubing. This prevents the solution from being pumped
when the system automatically starts up.
• If desired, you can manually put the spectrometer on standby as described below.
To manually put the spectrometer on standby:
1. On the Instrument tab, in the Utilities group, click on Scheduler.
2. In the dialog, select Shutdown... and Immediately on OK. Be sure Put Spectrometer into
Standby is selected.
3. If the plasma has already been extinguished, be sure that the Wash before shutdown
option is not selected and that Turn off Plasma and Pump is not selected.
4. Be sure that you have enabled Startup and set the date and time.
How to Run a P article Counting Analysis

A predefined method file is provided with the Syngistix software installation that is specifically for
Particle Counting ICP‐OES analysis.
Caution: If specific particle counting method parameters are changed from the predefined method, the
sample amount and timings might have to change.
1. Opening a Predefined Particle Counter M ethod

To retrieve one of three different predefined Syngistix for ICP methods follow these steps:
1. On the Analysis tab in the Method group click New.
The Create New Method dialog appears.
2. Click on the Copy of predefined method radio button to use as a starting point.
Predefined methods as developed by the PerkinElmer Applications Group are installed in
Syngistix. By selecting “Copy of predefined method”, a copy of the method is opened in the
Method Editor.
3. Clicking the file open button opens the Open Method dialog which lists the available
predefined methods from the appropriate database.
4. Select one of the following predefined methods:

• InServOils PC Only - to be used for Particle Counting Only Analysis
• InServOils ICP Only - to be used for ICP Only Analysis
• InServOils PC ICP - to be used for ICP and Particle Counting Analysis
Once selecting a predefined method, it opens as the active method with the name “Untitled”.
To see a description of the method, click the Options tab then expand the Remarks section.
2. Editing the M ethod Particle Size and Data Form ats

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Method group, click Method.
2. Click on the Sampler tab at the top of the Method Editor window.
3. Click on the Particle Counter tab on the right-side of the method.
4. Check the Analyze samples for particle counting/sizing box to use the particle counter
to acquire and analyze particle data with the given method.
This gives the users selections of which particle size and data formats are desired for the
analysis and they also can select the calibration file.
5. Select the file used to calibrate the sensor for particle counting/sizing. In the Calibration
file field, click the file open button , navigate to and select the desired Calibration file
(*.sns). The files are typically found in the following directory:
C:\Users\Public\PerkinElmer Syngistix\ICP\SystemFiles\AccessoryCalibration
6. Click the Open button.
7. Select a desirable Particle data format. This takes the counts and gives classification of
cleanliness. You can also add Additional sizes for your analysis.
8. Select if you want to Show counts for each replicate in results window.
9. Enter a Dilution factor.
Typically use a factor of 10.00.
10. Save your method.
3. Run the Analysis

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Analyze group, click Analysis.
2. Click on the Automated tab.
The window appears displaying the Automated tab parameters on the left side and the
associated automated Run list on the right side.
3. Select or verify the Method source.

• Use the active method for your analysis
or
• Specify methods for your analysis
4. Select or verify the Use Sample Info file.
5. Select or verify Save data to Results Data Set.
6. Click the Auto export: Settings… button.
7. In the Automatic Export dialog select Export Design 2, click the Open file browse
button , select the *.pxpx file and click the Open button. Click OK to accept the file
selection and close the dialog.
8. Make sure the Run list is populated with the correct samples.
9. When everything looks good, click the Analyze All button.
How to Run a HTS Analysis

The following procedure is an overview on how to run a HTS analysis.
1. Getting Started
Ensure that your HTS system hardware is setup and configured.
1. On the Instrument tab click Devices.
2. Click the Pump tab.
3. Select the Tubing from the drop-down menu. The default tubing is black/black.
4. Select the Flush rate (mL/min). The default is 2.50 mL/min.
5. Select if you want to Enable tubing saver.
The tubing saver feature extends the life of the peristaltic pump tubing by operating the pump at
a low speed in alternating clockwise and counterclockwise rotations when the plasma is not on.
6. Click the HTS tab.

7. Click the Enable HTS check box to activate the HTS.
8. You can control the Valve or Vacuum, if needed.
Select Inject or Load in the Valve column.
Select On or Off in the Vacuum column.
9. Click the Apply settings button to implement the pump settings.
Note: You can also turn the Vacuum On or Off and the Valve to Inject or Load on the Instrument tab in the
Devices group on the ribbon.
2. I CP M ethod Settings
The Create New M ethod dialog appears.
2. Select the Starting conditions and click OK.

The Method Editor opens with the Spectrometer tab.
3. Click on the Copy of predefined method radio button to use a predefined method as a
starting point. Predefined methods developed by the PerkinElmer Applications Group are
installed as part of Syngistix.
4. Clicking the file open icon opens the Open Method dialog which lists the available
5. Once the Starting conditions have been set, click OK.
The Method Editor opens with the Spectrometer tab.
6. Click the Setting tab on the right.
Set the Delay time (sec) as needed (default is 0 seconds).
7. Click the Sampler tab and click the HTS tab on the right.
The HTS parameter settings appear. The features of the Pump and Autosampler are
combined on this page. This consists of the HTS analysis settings and the Wash settings.
8. Set the parameters for your analysis.

HTS analysis
Sample flow rate (mL/min): Select the rate in mL/min that the sample solution will be
pumped into the plasma during an analysis. As you change this value, the pump speed
that appears will be changed appropriately. The value range and ratio of pump rate to
pump speed depend on both the pump tubing and the pump model selected.
Loop fill (sec): Select or enter a time in seconds to fill the loop based on the loop size.
Recommended loop parameters: Click this button to display a table of the Recommended
HTS Loop Parameters.
Recommended HTS Loop Parameters
Estimated Analysis Time (s) Loop Size (mL) Loop Fill Time (s) Loop Wash Time (s)
5 -20 0.5 3 1
20 - 50 1 4 3
50 - 80 1.5 5 4
80 - 120 2 6 4
120 - 160 3 6 4
160 - 210 4 7 5
Wash settings
Never: No wash steps during the analysis. When this option is selected, the entry fields
for the options listed below are inactive.
Between Samples: The system washes the sample tube and probe after every solution
that it analyzes. Use the values in the Recommended Loop Parameters table for loop wash.
Only after samples whose concentrations exceed limits: The system washes the
sample tube and probe after it has analyzed a solution where the measured concentration
exceeds the value you select for Limit.
After every sample + extra time if sample concentrations exceed limits: The
system washes the sample tube and probe, after it has analyzed each solution, for the
time you select for Normal Time or the number of Normal Cycles. If the measured
concentration of a solution exceeds the value you select for Limit, the system will wash the
sample tube and probe after analyzing this solution for an additional period of time that
you select for Extra Time or Extra Cycles.
Loop Wash: This parameter uses the vacuum of the HTS to rinse the probe and sample
loop.
Wash Location: The sample tray ___location of the wash solution.
Extra Time: Enter a value here if you want to set extra wash time after solutions where
the measured concentration exceeds the value you select for Limit.
3. Run the Analysis

1. On the Analysis tab, in the Analyze group, click Analysis.
The Automated Analysis Control window appears displaying the Automated tab
parameters on the left side and the associated automated Run List on the right side.
3. Select or verify the Method source.

4. Select or verify the Use Sample Info file.
5. Select or verify Save data to Results Data Set.
6. Click the Auto export Settings button, in the Automatic Export dialog select Export
Design 1, click the Open file icon , select the *.xptx file and click the Open button.
Click OK to accept the file selection and close the dialog.
7. Make sure the Run list is populated with the correct samples.
8. When everything looks good click the Analyze All button.
M ethod Editor
M ethod Editor
You use the Method Editor to create a new method or to modify the parameters in an existing
method. You must have one or more methods to perform analyses.
W hat is a m ethod?
All analytical information needed to perform an analysis and report the results of an analysis is
contained in a method (and a sample information file, if it is used). You can use an existing
method as it is, modify an existing method to suit the purposes of your application, or create a
new method.
Modified or new methods must be saved in a methods library if you wish to use them at a later
date. You can delete, copy, or rename methods using the Data Manager application.
M ethods in the Results Library

When you perform analyses, a copy of the method is saved automatically in a results library as
part of the results data set. This allows you to recall such methods from a results library if, for
example, you wanted information about the method used for a certain sample.
The Active M ethod

The "active" method, which is displayed in the toolbar, is the method that is open. When you
start an analysis, the active method defines the parameters of the analysis.
The Pages of the M ethod Editor

The Method Editor window contains tabs, and each tab provides access to a set of pages. The
contents of the pages are described here:
Tab/Pages Contents
Spectrometer Parameters for Spectrometer settings.
Sampler Parameters for the Plasma, Peristaltic Pump. Autosampler wash, and
Particle Counter.
Process Directions to convert spectral data into intensity data, correct for
interferences and assign internal standards.
Calibration Calibration information, autosampler locations, and details on how sample

results will appear.
Checks Recovery tab - Spike concentrations for matrix check samples.

Sample Limits tab – Specifications for performing sample limit checks.
QC Locations of quality control solutions and instructions for scheduling and

performing quality control procedures.
Options Remarks about the method and options for the results display, printed log,
and results data set.
Method Editor . 69
Using the M ethod Editor

 On the Analysis tab, in the Method group, click Method.
 If you do not have an open method, on the Analysis tab, in the Method group, click Open.
Using M ethods
There are several ways to get methods for your analyses. You can open an existing method
and use it as it is, modify it to suit your application, or create a new method.
Sum m ary Procedure

1. Open an existing method or create a new one.
2. If you are creating a new method or modifying an existing method, open the Method
Editor. On the pages of the Method Editor window, modify the parameter settings to
suit the analysis.
3. If you want to use the method later, save the method under a suitable name. The
method will be stored in the methods database located in your user directory.
To Delete, Copy, or Renam e M ethods

 On the Utilities tab, in the Applications group, click Data Manager and use that
application to perform these tasks. For additional information, please refer to the Data
Manager Help.
Useful Conv entions

Within the tables located in the Method Editor, entries that are in a normal font can be
modified in that table. Entries that are in a bold font are for view only and cannot be modified
from within that table.
Creating a New M ethod

To create a new method
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Method group, click on New.
The Create New Method dialog appears where you select the plasma conditions. If
you wish, you can use a copy of any existing method.
2. Decide what elements you want in your method and what wavelengths you wish to
use. This information will be recorded in the table in the Method Editor Spectrometer:
Define Elements Page.
• To place this information directly into the Method Editor, enter the elements and
wavelengths desired on the Method Editor Spectrometer: Define Elements Page.
Proceed to step 3.
-or-
• Use the Periodic Table to select the elements and their associated wavelengths.
Your entries will automatically appear in the table on the Method Editor
Spectrometer: Define Elements Page.
3. In the Method Editor, complete the entries on the Spectrometer pages, clicking on the
side tabs to view each page.
4. Display each of the remaining pages of the Method Editor by clicking on the tabs at the
top and side of the window and by completing the entries.
5. To save the method, click on Save in the Method group.
Periodic Table
You can use this table to select the elements and their associated wavelengths for your
method. The elements and wavelengths that you select will automatically be entered on the
Method Editor Spectrometer: Define Elements Page. You can also enter elements and
wavelengths directly into the Method Editor.
To display this table:

• On the Utilities tab, in the Resources group, click Periodic Table.
Method Editor . 71
-or-
• On the Method Editor Spectrometer: Define Elements Page, click on the
Periodic Table button.
To select elements and wavelengths for your method from the periodic table:
On scanning CCD ICP spectrometers, you can select any element at any wavelength. On
simultaneous ICP spectrometers, elements and wavelengths that are not available on the
detector are indicated by grey typeface.
1. Double-click on an element symbol. This enters the element and its default wavelength
directly into the active row in the table on the Method Editor Spectrometer: Define
Elements Page. The Active Row in Method Editor automatically increments to the
next row. Continue making your selections.
-or-
Click on an element symbol using the right mouse button. From the list of
recommended wavelengths, double-click on the desired value. (If you want to select
several wavelengths for one element, click on the wavelengths and then click on Enter
in Method.) This enters the element and the recommended wavelength directly into
the method. The Active Row in Method Editor automatically increments to the next
row. Continue making your selections.
2. When you have completed making your choices, click on the windows close box.
To select elements and wavelengths for your method from the alphabetical element list:
1. Select each element and its associated wavelength from the drop down lists. This
enters the element and its recommended wavelength directly into the active row in the
table on the Method Editor Spectrometer: Define Elements Page. The Active Row in
Method Editor automatically increments to the next row. Continue making your
selections.
2. When you have completed making your choices, click on the windows close box.
To change the values in any row:
• Change Active Row in Method Editor to the desired row, select the new element
and wavelength, and click on Enter in Method.
To search for elements at a particular wavelength or to choose wavelengths not on the
wavelengths list:
• Click on Wavelength Table and complete the entries as desired.
W avelength Table
You use this table to search for elements at a particular wavelength or to choose wavelengths
not on the recommended wavelengths list that is found on the Method Periodic Table.
Additional information such as intensities and BEC's are given for certain elements.
The elements and wavelengths that you have selected appear on the Method Editor
Spectrometer: Define Elements Page.
On scanning CCD ICP spectrometers, you can select any element at any wavelength. On
simultaneous ICP spectrometers, elements and wavelengths that are not available on the
detector are indicated by gray rows.
Tip: Double-click on a column header to sort the table by that parameter. For example you can sort
by element, state, wavelength, BEC, signal-to-noise, intensity, or any other parameter in the
column headers. Also see the table of references later in this topic. These publications were
used as sources for the Wavelength Table.
To display this table:

 On the Utilities tab, in the Resources group, click Wavelength Table.
 In the Periodic Table click on Wavelength Table.
 In the Examine Spectra/MSF window, click on ID.
 In the IEC Model Builder Calculate Factors page, click on Display Wavelength Table.
References used in the W avelength Table

Parameter Reference
DL mg/L (W, P & F): Radial Winge, Peterson, and Fassel, Applied Spectroscopy 33, p. 206,
Detection Limits (mg/L) 1979
Rel Sens (B): Boumans, Line Coincidence Tables for ICP -AES, Pergamon
Relative Sensitivity Press, 1980
Sig/Noise (S &T): Schierle and Thorne, Spectrochimica Acta 50B, pp. 27-50, 1995
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Intensity (W): Wohlers, ICP Information Newsletter 10, No.8, pp. 593-688,
Intensity Jan 1985
To view the wavelengths for one element:
1. Select an element.
2. Click on All Wavelengths or Recommended Wavelengths to specify what values
you want to see. If you have a simultaneous ICP spectrometer, you have an On
Arrays option as well. The On Arrays option will narrow down the search to just those
wavelengths that appear on the subarray.
Method Editor . 73
3. If the Center Wavelength entry field is not clear, double-click on this box and press
Delete to clear it.
4. Click on Search.
The specified wavelengths for that element appear in the table.
To display data for all elements:
1. Select All Elements in the Element to Include entry field, or click on the All button.
(All Elements means all elements in the wavelength table.)
2. Click on All Wavelengths or Recommended Wavelengths to specify what values
you want to see. If you have a simultaneous ICP spectrometer, you have an On
Arrays option as well. The On Arrays option will narrow down the search to just
those wavelengths that appear on the subarray.
3. Type a number in the Center Wavelength entry field or double-click on a wavelength
in the table.
4. Indicate the range in the Wavelength Range entry field. The default range is 0.5nm.
5. Click on Search.
All wavelengths that fall in the wavelength range appear in the table.
To copy an element and a wavelength into the method from the Wavelength Table:
If you opened the Wavelength Table from the Method Editor, you can copy entries directly into
the method.
1. Select the element and wavelength you want to add by clicking in that row.
Active Row in Method Editor defaults to the first blank row in the Method Editor
Spectrometer: Define Elements page. This is where the new information will be added.
2. If you wish to overwrite an existing Method Editor row, change Active Row in
Method Editor as desired.
3. Click on Enter Selected Wavelength in Method. The information is added to the
Method Editor.
To copy several elements and wavelengths into the method from the Wavelength Table:
If you opened the Wavelength Table from the Method Editor, you can copy entries directly into
the method.
1. Select the elements and wavelengths:
• To enter a range, click on a row and then hold down the Shift key and click on
another row. All of the rows in between will be selected.
• To enter information from noncontiguous rows, click on a row, then hold down
the Control key and click on additional rows to select them.
Active Row in Method Editor defaults to the first blank row in the Method Editor
Spectrometer: Define Elements page. This is where the new information will be added.
• If you wish to overwrite information in existing Method Editor rows, change Active
Row in Method Editor as desired. The row that you select will be where the first
element and wavelength in the group you selected in the Wavelength Table will
appear in the Method Editor.
2. Click on Enter Selected Wavelength in Method. The information is added to the
Method Editor.
Create N ew M ethod Dialog

This dialog gives you the option of selecting a set of recommended plasma conditions in a new
method for different types of analyses, for example, organic or aqueous. It also gives you the
option of selecting either the active method or another stored method as a starting point for
creating a new method.
 On the Analysis tab in the Method group click New.
To select plasma conditions in a new (default) method:

1. Click on the Default option to start with a new "Untitled" method.
2. Select one of the following plasma conditions from the drop-down list:
• Aqueous (see conditions given below)
• Organic (see conditions given below)
• Add Conditions
3. Click the Modify button.
When you select Add Conditions or Modify you can set up conditions for a
customized type of analysis. The Plasma Default Conditions Dialog appears. Enter a
Plasma Conditions Name and select the appropriate settings for your analysis.
4. Click OK.
The software opens the Method Editor with the settings you selected.
Method Editor . 75
Plasma Conditions for aqueous and organic analyses
Parameter Aqueous Organic

Helical Flat Plate Helical Flat Plate
Plasma Flow: 15 L/min 8 L/min 15 L/min 15 L/min
Auxiliary Flow: 0.2 L/min 0.2 L/min 0.5 L/min 0.5 L/min
Nebulizer Flow: 0.80 L/min 0.70 L/min 0.50 L/min 0.50 L/min
(for Low-Flow GemCone or the
Concentric Glass nebulizer)
RF power: 1300 watts 1500 watts 1300 watts 1500 watts
Sample Flow Rate 1.50 mL/min 1/0 mL/min 0.80 mL/min 1.0 mL/min
To select a Copy of active method or Copy of another method to use as a starting point:
 When creating a new method, it may be useful to start with a copy of the active method or
another stored method as a basis for creating the new method. By selecting Copy of
active method or Copy of another method, a copy of the method is opened in the
Method Editor called "Untitled." Modify the settings as needed, then save it under a
different name using Save As from the Save drop-down in the Method group.
To select a Copy of predefined method (Avio only) to use as a starting point:
Predefined methods as developed by the PerkinElmer Applications Group (for sequential
instruments only) are installed in Syngistix. By selecting Copy of predefined method, a copy of
the method is opened in the Method Editor.
2. Clicking the file open icon opens the Open Method dialog which lists the
available predefined methods from the appropriate database.
3. Select a method then click OK. The method name appears in the Create New Method
dialog selection box.
4. Click OK in the Create New Method dialog. This method opens in the Method Editor
as the active method with the name “Untitled”.
About predefined methods for Particle Counting analysis

From the Open Method dialog, select one of the following predefined methods:

Once selecting a predefined method, it opens as the active method with the name “Untitled”.
To see a description of the method, in the Method Editor, click the Options tab then expand
the Remarks section.
Method Editor . 77
Opening an Ex isting M ethod

A method is required for an analysis. It is used to set up the conditions under which the
analysis will be run. Methods that you have saved are stored in a methods library (a large-
capacity structured database) so that you can use them at a later date. You can also get a
copy of a method used in a particular analysis; this method is always stored in a results library
as part of the results data set.
To open an existing method from a methods library (ES):
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Method group, click on Open.
2. In the Open Method dialog, select the method you want from the list in the table,
then click on OK.
The methods Library database is stored where it was set up in User Setup. Select the
method you want then click the OK button.
An icon to the left of the method name indicates the current review status of the
method.
Original (saved – no additional actions done)

Reviewed (user has added a “review”, but no final Approved/Rejected done)
Approved
Rejected
If the Method Editor is open, the method name appears in the title bar. The method
name also appears in the Toolbar of the Syngistix main window, next to the Method
button. This is the active method, which controls your analysis. (You do not need to
open the Method Editor window to open an existing method.)
3. Use this method for your analysis with no modifications if desired. To change
parameters in this method, see Modifying a Method.
To open an existing method from a methods library (Non-ES)
2. In the Open Method dialog, select the method you want from the list in the table,
then click on OK.
3. If the method you want is stored in a different methods library Database, click on
Browse and select the correct library ___location. Return to the Open Method dialog, and
select the desired method.
4. If the Method Editor is open, the method name appears in the title bar. The method
button. This is the active method, which controls your analysis. (You do not need to
open the Method Editor window to open an existing method.)
5. Use this method for your analysis with no modifications if desired. To change
parameters in this method, see Modifying a Method.
To get a copy of a method associated with a stored results data set:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Method group, click on Import Method.
2. In the Select Results Data Set dialog, select the results data set from the list in the
table, then click on OK.
If the Results data set you want is stored in a different Database library, click on
Browse and select the correct library ___location. Return to this dialog, and select the
desired Results data set from the list in the table.
3. When the Import from Results Library dialog appears, select the method you want
to import and then, at the bottom of the dialog, select the Method check box and
click on OK.
If the Method Editor is open, the method name appears in the title bar. The method
button. This is the active method, which controls your analysis.
• Use this method for your analysis with no modifications if desired. To change
parameters in this method, see Modifying a Method. To save this method to a
method library, use Save or Save As... from the Save drop-down in the Method
group.
Method Editor . 79
M odifying a M ethod
You may want to make modifications to an existing method.
Note: If this file has been modified but not saved, the file name in the dialog header will have an
asterisk ( * ) displayed to the right of the name. Once the file is saved, the asterisk will be
removed.
To modify a method:
1. Open a method.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Method group, click Method. Modify the entries as
desired on the Spectrometer pages, using the side tabs to view each page.
3. Display the remaining pages of the Method Editor by clicking on the tabs at the top of
the window and modifying the entries.
4. To save the changes, in the Method group click on Save to save the method with its
current name or from the Save drop-down list click Save As to display the Save
Method As dialog to save the method with a new name. The method is saved in the
Method database.
Selecting Options and Entering Values

• Some parameters have fixed options denoted by an option button. You may select only
one of these options for any one parameter.
• Some options are associated with a check box. You may select as many of these as
you wish. When a check box is selected, it contains a check mark.
• Options for some parameters are contained in drop-down lists. Click on the arrow at
the right-hand side of the drop-down list to see the choices available.
• Spin boxes are often used for numerical parameter settings. To increase or decrease
the value, click on the appropriate arrowhead. You can also click on and type an
acceptable value.
• To enter information in a text box, click on the text box, then type the necessary value
or characters.
• To open another page of the Method Editor, click on the tab containing the name of
the page at the top or side of the window.
Tabs across the bottom of the Method Editor group parameters into several main
areas.
Side tabs further group parameters into individual pages.

Method Editor . 81
Saving a M ethod
You must save a method if you want to use it later. When you save a method, a copy of the
method is placed in the Methods database. Furthermore, a copy of the active method that was
used to obtain the results of your analyses is stored with the results data set.
Note: When you save a method, the software reviews all of the entries automatically. If it finds any
problems or inconsistencies, the Check Method message dialog is displayed to inform you of
the error.
To save a method with its current name:

 To save the changes, in the Method group click on Save to save the method with its
current name. The method is saved in the Method database.
To save a method with a new name:
1. To save the method with a new name, in the Method group click on the Save drop-
down list and click Save As to display the Save Method As dialog.
2. Type a file name up to 25 characters in length and click on OK. The method is saved
in the Method database.
Note: To save a method as a text file for making notations or printing, see P rinting a M ethod.
To save a method summary in a text file:

1. Click on the Method Editor window to make it active.
2. Right-click in the method then click Save Method as text... from the list in the pop-
up menu.
3. Type a name for the file and click on OK.
You can now open the file in a text editor such as Notepad and make notations or print
selected sections.
Opening and Saving M ethods and Selecting R esults

This topic covers the Open Method, Save Method As and Select a Results Data Set dialogs.
Check the Database library ___location (Non-ES)
The database library is where the methods or results are stored. The current library ___location is
shown. If the stored methods or results data set does not appear, you may look for it in a
different database library ___location:
The Open method dialog appears.
2. To change the Database library ___location, click the browse icon.
3. In the Open dialog that appears, select the directory path and file name for the library.
Check the Database library ___location (ES)
The database library is where the methods or results are stored. The current library ___location is
shown. If the stored methods or results data set does not appear, you may look for it in a
different database library ___location:
The Open method dialog appears.
2. In the Open Method dialog, select the method you want from the list in the table.
The methods Library database is stored where it was set up in User Setup.
3. Click the OK button.
Methods
To open a stored method (Open Method dialog)
• Click on the name in the table, then click on OK.
-or-
• Double-click on the name in the table.
To save a method (Save Method As dialog)
• Type a name of up to 20 characters in the Name entry field, then click on OK.
To open a predefined method (Open Method dialog)
Predefined methods as developed by the PerkinElmer Applications Group are installed
in Syngistix. By selecting Copy of predefined method, a copy of the method is opened
in the Method Editor.
Method Editor . 83
3. Clicking the file open icon opens the Open Method dialog which lists the available
4. Select a predefined method.

When running a Particle Counting Analysis, select one of the following predefined
methods:
Once selecting a predefined method, it opens as the active method with the name
“Untitled”.
To see a description of the method, in the Method Editor, click the Options tab then
expand the Remarks section.
5. Select a method then click OK.
The method name appears in the Create New Method dialog selection box.
6. Click OK in the Create New Method dialog. This method opens in the Method Editor
as the active method with the name “Untitled”.
Results Data Sets
To select a stored results data set (Select Results Data Set dialog)
• Click on the name in the table, then click on OK.
-or-
• Double-click on the name in the table.
To create a new results data set
• Type a name of up to 25 characters in the Name entry field, then click on OK.
To sort the method or data set list
• Click on the appropriate option button to sort by Name or Date/Time.
P rinting a M ethod
You can print a method summary, which contains all of the parameters in the method. You can
also save a method summary in a text file, then open it in a text editor such as Notepad and
make notations or print selected sections.
To print a method summary:
1. Click on the Method Editor window to make it active. Note that the title bar of an
active window is a different color from other windows.
2. Right-click in the method then click Print from the list in the pop-up menu.
3. In the Print dialog that appears, check that the correct printer is shown. If you need
to select another printer or change other setup options such as the paper size, click on
Setup.
4. Click on OK to start printing.
Method Editor . 85
Spectrom eter P ages

You use these pages to define the parameters that control how the hardware is set up and
how the system collects data.
To display the Spectrometer pages:
 Click on the Spectrometer tab at the top of the Method Editor window.
To set the following parameters:
 Click on the appropriate tab on the right-hand side of the window.
• Define Elements Page
• Settings Page
• Spectral Windows Page
Define Elem ents Page

You use this page to define the symbol, wavelength, name, and function of an element. In the
Method Editor, an "element" represents a combination of parameters associated with a
measurement at a particular wavelength. If you are measuring an element at more than one
wavelength, you must repeat the element on this page for each separate wavelength.
Detail of the Define Elements page showing entries included in an example method prepared
for a soils analysis.
Note: In the Transient technique, there is a six-analyte limit for entries in the table.
Method Description: This short description of your method will appear next to your method
name in the Open Method dialog. It will also appear in the Method Description field of the
Analysis Header displayed in the Results Display and Printed Log.
• Type up to 80 characters.
Symbol: This is the symbol of the element to be measured.
• To change or add an element, type the letters for the symbol in the entry field, or click
on Periodic Table. When the Periodic Table appears, select the desired elements.
Wavelength: This is the wavelength in nm that the Spectrometer will use to measure the
associated element.
To add or change a wavelength:
• Type an element symbol in the Symbol field to get the default wavelength for an
element.
-or-
• Type the value for the wavelength in the entry field.
-or-
• Click on Periodic Table. When the Periodic Table appears, select the desired
wavelength.
Note: In the Transient technique, the Active R ow In M ethod Editor counter does not go above
six enforcing the six analyte limit for entries in the table.
Name: This is the name that describes the element. The default entry is the element symbol
followed by the wavelength. No two elements in a method can have the same name.
• If you want to change the default name, type up to 20 characters, including spaces
and punctuation. For example, if you are determining analytes using different plasma
viewing modes or different plasma conditions, you may want to add information to the
default name such as "Al 396.152--Axial" or "Ca 317.933--0.8 neb".
Function: This is the role of the element in the analysis.
Analyte: The element's concentration will be determined based on a valid calibration.
Internal standard (Int. Std.): The element will act as an internal standard.
• Click on the text and select Analyte or Int. Std. from the drop-down list.
Note: For the Transient technique, the drop-down under the Function column have only the
Analyte choice.
Periodic Table
• Click on this button to display the Periodic Table, from which you can select elements
and their associated wavelengths for your method.
W avelength Table
• Click on this button to display the Wavelength Table, where you can search for
elements at a particular wavelength or choose wavelengths not in the recommended
wavelength list.
Settings Page - Continuous Technique

You use this page to set spectrometer parameters that control how the elements will be
measured on a sequential or simultaneous spectrometer.
Sequential Spectrometer Settings Simultaneous Spectrometer Settings

Method Editor . 87
Spectral Settings
Purge Gas Flow
This is the spectrometer purge gas flow rate. The time taken to purge air from the spectrometer
depends on various factors, including how long the instrument has been in a low purge state.
Normal: A normal purge is used during routine operation.
High: The high purge is normally used during the analysis for wavelengths below 190 nm. A
high purge performed before an analysis clears the system of air, which contains moisture and
oxygen, before analyzing elements below 190 nm. See the Spectrometer Control window.
Spectral Profiling: This option is only available on simultaneous ICP spectrometers.

If Spectral Profiling is selected, the slit image is scanned, which yields greater data density and
shows smoother peak profiles. Using spectral profiling takes four times as long per
measurement as when profiling is not being used. Spectral profiling is most useful for
identifying spectral interferences and collecting data when the wavelength requires
adjustment. In some circumstances, it is useful for analyses using Multicomponent Spectral
Fitting.
Resolution: This option is only available on simultaneous ICP spectrometers.

Fixed: The same resolution is used for all elements. There are three settings: High, Normal, and
Low. The selection you make sets the slit width and determines how the detector will be read.
• Select Low for slightly better detection limits and analyte precision. This setting gives
the poorest resolution. The slit width is at its widest and each pixel in the detector
subarray is read as a whole. This gives the highest sensitivity per element, but poor
freedom from spectral interferences.
• Select Normal to provide performance that has the optimal combination of sensitivity
and freedom from spectral interferences for most applications. The slit width provides
the spectral bandpass equal to one pixel width and each pixel in the detector sub-array
is read as a whole.
• Select High to provide the greatest freedom from spectral interferences, but lower
sensitivity than Normal or Low. This setting gives the greatest resolution, but the
lowest intensities. The slit width is at its narrowest and each pixel in the detector sub-
array is read as two separate half-pixels.
Variable: Different resolutions are used for each analyte.
• Click on Set... and in the Set Element Resolution dialog that appears, select the
resolution for each element.
Read Param eters

Time: This is the time in seconds that the signal is measured.
• For automatic integration, click on Auto. The software automatically sets the
integration time individually for each analyte based on intensity. Select the minimum
and maximum times that you want to use for all analytes.
• If you are using a sequential spectrometer (for example, the Avio 200, Avio 220 Max,
Optima 7000/8000) click on Set... next to Auto. This displays a dialog to Set Auto
Integration By Analyte.
The default times are a minimum time of 0.5s and a maximum time of 2s. These values
are stored on a per-analyte basis in the method. In effect Auto integration means that
per-analyte min/max times are used (which may or may not be all the same).
When auto integration is used during an analysis, the actual integration time selected
for an analyte will be between the minimum and maximum times entered for that
analyte (it is possible in some cases for the actual integration time to be slightly longer
than the entered maximum time). This integration time is selected by the spectrometer
firmware based on analyte intensity. When the auto-integration summary table is
displayed at the end of a sample, and different limits have been entered for each
analyte (as this feature allows), the integration time shown for each analyte will be
within the entered limits specific for that analyte. This is how you can see that
integration times have been selected within limits on a per-analyte basis, based on the
entered min/max times.
To set the minimum or maximum time, use the Column Fill dialog.
• For manual control, click on Set... next to Manual. In the Set Manual Integration
dialog that appears, select the integration and read times for each analyte.
(Integration time is the time period in seconds in which the detector collects photons
before transferring the charge and reading out the signal. The read time is the total
measurement time in seconds per replicate.)
Delay Time: This is the number of seconds that elapse before the instrument begins to
measure the signal. Valid entry range: 0 - 999.
Replicates: This is the number of read cycles to be performed on each sample and
calibration solution. Valid entry range: 1 - 999.
Measure by: Only available for sequential spectrometers (for example, the Avio 200, Avio 220 Max,
Optima 7000/8000).
• Element - Selecting Measure by Element tells the spectrometer to stay at the
wavelength of the element for the number of Replicates selected. For example, if you
selected six (6) replicates for Cu and Pb it will measure Cu six times before it changes
wavelength to measure Pb six times.
• Replicate - Selecting Measure by Replicate tells the spectrometer to measure each
element once then repeat for the number of replicates. For example, if you selected six
(6) replicates for Cu and Pb, it will measure Cu once then change the wavelength and
measure Pb once for replicate one, then change the wavelength and measure Cu once
then change the wavelength to measure Pb once for replicate two until it completes
the cycle six times.
Method Editor . 89
Settings Page - Transient Technique

You use this page to set spectrometer parameters that control how the elements will be measured.
Spectral Settings
Purge Gas Flow: This is the spectrometer purge gas flow rate. The time taken to purge air
from the spectrometer depends on various factors, including how long the instrument has been
in a low purge state.
Normal: A normal purge is used during routine operation when all wavelengths are greater
than 190 nm.
High: The high purge is normally used during the analysis for wavelengths below 190 nm. A
high purge performed before an analysis clears the system of air, which contains moisture and
oxygen, before analyzing elements below 190 nm. See the Spectrometer Control window.
Read Param eters

Replicates: The number of measurements that should be made of each analytical line.
Integration Time (sec): This is the integration time used by the spectrometer to collect
each spectrum of data. Enter an integration time between 0.001 and 50 seconds.
BOC Time (sec): The amount of time to measure the baseline just before the beginning of
the read step. Enter a time between 0 and 5 seconds
Analyte: The name of the analyte entered on the Spectrometer page.
Transient Read Delay: For each analyte this is the amount of time to wait after the read
step begins before processing the signal. Double clicking this column heading displays a
column fill dialog.
Transient Read Time: For each analyte this is the amount of time to be spent processing
the signal.
Spectral W indow s Page

You can use this page to set the survey window and auto integration window. The survey window
is the wavelength range in which the plasma emission data is collected. The auto integration
window is the wavelength range in which the integration time is calculated, based on the signal of
highest intensity.
By default, the survey window and auto integration window are set to the same wavelength
range. On simultaneous ICP spectrometers, this range is determined by the wavelength range of
the subarray on which the wavelength of interest falls. On scanning CCD ICP spectrometers, the
wavelengths are all directed to a single detector array, and the software sets the wavelength
range to default values.
On either type of spectrometer, you can adjust the wavelength range for the survey window or the
auto integration window. In some cases, it may be advantageous to set the auto integration window
to be smaller than the survey window. For example, if your interferent signal is higher than the
analyte signal, the auto integration time may be shorter than appropriate for your analysis. This is
because the software calculates the auto integration based on the highest signal, which, in this
example, would be the interferent. Therefore, you may want to limit the auto integration window to
exclude the interferent, so the software will calculate a longer integration time.
Note: In the Transient technique, the Auto Low er and Auto Upper columns in the table are not
used, since auto-integration is not used; however, these entries will remain enabled and
function as before.
Element and Wavelength: These view-only columns show the elements and wavelengths
selected for the current analysis. To change the element, click on the Periodic Table button
on the Spectrometer: Define Elements page. In the Periodic Table that appears, select the
elements and wavelengths desired.
Survey Lower and Survey Upper: This sets the wavelength range in which plasma
emission data is collected from the lowest to highest wavelength. The survey window must be
set equal to or greater than the auto integration window.
Auto Lower and Auto Upper: This sets the wavelength range in which the integration time
for the analyte is calculated.
When automatic integration is used, the software automatically sets the read time individually
for each analyte based on the signals of highest intensity. However, for some analyses, you
may want to select a smaller measurement range to exclude a strong interfering peak when
the integration time is being determined. This will give you improved signal-to-noise
characteristics for the analyte of interest.
Method Editor . 91
Sam pler Pages

You use these pages to define the parameters that control the plasma, peristaltic pump, and
autosampler wash.
To display the Sampler pages:
1. Click on the Sampler tab at the top of the Method Editor window.
2. To set the following parameters, click on the appropriate tab on the right-hand side of
the window.
• Plasma Page
• Peristaltic Pump Page
• HTS Page
• Autosampler Wash Page - Continuous Technique
• Autosampler Wash Page - Transient Technique
• Particle Counter Page
Plasm a Page
You use this page to set the plasma gas flows, RF power, viewing distance, and source
equilibration delay. These can be the same for all elements or different for one or all
elements. You can also specify criteria for monitoring the nebulizer back pressure.
Source Equilibration Delay: This is a delay in seconds, which can be used to allow the
plasma to stabilize after changes have been made to the plasma (source) conditions.
Plasma Conditions: You can assign the same gas flows, RF power, and viewing distance
values to all elements in the method or you can vary these values for each element
individually. If you have a dual-view instrument, you can also assign plasma view (axial or
radial) in this way.
Same for All Elements: Select this option to use the same gas flows, RF power levels,
viewing distances and plasma view for all elements.
Vary by Element: Select this option to vary the parameters for each element. Enter the
values you want in the table.
Note: In the Transient technique, the Vary by Elem ent radio button does not exist. This means
that the plasma conditions are the Same For All Elements. This forces Sam e For All
Elements (the default selection) to be always used.
Monitor Nebulizer Back Pressure: Click the checkbox to monitor the Nebulizer Back
Pressure from where you can specify that the system trigger an alarm when the nebulizer back
pressure is out of range.
Note: You can set up an audible alarm for when the nebulizer back pressure is out of range from the
Sound dialog.
To specify criteria for monitoring the back pressure:

1. Click the Monitor Nebulizer Back Pressure check box.
2. Enter a value between 0 and 100 in the Check Upper % box.
When the nebulizer back pressure has increased by the percentage you specified an
alarm can be triggered.
3. Select the action to occur when the nebulizer back pressure is out of range from the
Action taken after nebulizer back pressure alarm is triggered: drop down.
You can select from the following available actions:
• Stop: The system prints a message informing you that the nebulizer back pressure
is out of range and stops the analysis. If an automatic shutdown is scheduled, Stop
prevents system shutdown.
• Alarm and Pause: The system prints a message informing you that the nebulizer
back pressure is out of range. An alarm is activated and the analysis pauses. At
this point, you have th option to stop or continue the analysis. If an automatic
shutdown is scheduled, Alarm and Pause prevents system shutdown.
• Alarm and Continue: The system prints a message informing you that the
nebulizer back pressure is out of range. An alarm is activated and the analysis
continues
F'n (Function): This view-only column shows the kind of action the instrument will take for
this element. To change the parameter, use the Function entry field on the Spectrometer:
Define Elements page.
A = Analyte
IS = Internal Standard
Element: This view-only column shows all the elements selected for the current analysis. To
change the element, click on the Periodic Table button on the Spectrometer: Define
Elements page. In the Periodic Table that appears, select the elements and wavelengths
desired.
Note: The following parameters have Colum n Fill dialogs that can be accessed by double-clicking on
the parameter's column header.
Plasma: This is the argon flow rate for the ICP torch plasma gas (also known as coolant or
outer flow). Valid entry range: 0 - 20 L/min. However, most torch designs will require a
minimum flow rate of about 10 L/min to achieve a stable plasma.
Aux: This is the argon flow rate for the ICP torch auxiliary gas. Valid entry range: 0 - 2.0
L/min.
Neb: This is the argon flow rate for the nebulizer or sample carrier gas. Valid entry range: 0 -
2.0 L/min. However, many nebulizer designs will allow a maximum gas flow rate of less than
2.0 L/min. See the information provided with your nebulizer to determine its maximum gas
flow rate.
Power: This is the amount of RF power delivered to the plasma discharge. Valid entry range:
750 - 1500 watts.
Method Editor . 93
View Dist: This is the nominal position within the plasma for the light that is measured by the
spectrometer. For radially viewed plasma, it is the distance from the load coil. For axially
viewed plasma, the 15-mm position represents the center of the plasma discharge.
Plasma View: If you have a dual-view instrument, this column is present. Plasma view refers
to the viewing position of the plasma torch, which can be set to radial or axial independently
for each analyte.
Radial: Light emitted from the side of the plasma passes through the torch slit and is directed
to the spectrometer optics.
Axial: Light emitted along the axis of the plasma is directed to the spectrometer optics. The
observation zone of the plasma is circular and the spectrometer views a column of light from
the central channel of the plasma.
Attenuated Radial or Attenuated Axial: These settings are available only for scanning
CCD ICP spectrometers. Use these settings when lower intensities are desired, for example, for
samples of high concentration that would normally saturate the detector and for sensitive
wavelengths, typically in axial mode.
HTS (High Throughput System ) Page

Note: This page only displays when Syngistix is configured for a High Throughput System (HTS).
Use this page to select the rate of sample flow, loop fill time and set the wash settings.
HTS analysis
Sample flow rate (mL/min): Select the rate in mL/min that the sample solution will be
pumped into the plasma during an analysis. As you change this value, the pump speed that
appears will be changed appropriately. The value range and ratio of pump rate to pump speed
depend on both the pump tubing and the pump model selected.
Loop fill (sec): Select or enter a time in seconds to fill the loop based on the loop
size. Allowed values depend on the tubing installed on the peristaltic pump.
Recommended loop parameters: Click this button to display a table of the recommended
loop parameters.
W ash settings
Never: No wash steps during the analysis. When this option is selected, the entry fields for the
options below are inactive.
Between Samples: The system washes the sample tube and probe after every solution that
it analyzes. Select a suitable option for Normal Cycles to tell the system how long to wash the
sampling system.
Only after samples whose concentrations exceed limits: The system washes the sample
tube and probe after it has analyzed a solution where the measured concentration exceeds the
value you select for Limit.
After every sample + extra time if sample concentrations exceed limits: The system
washes the sample tube and probe, after it has analyzed each solution, for the time you select
for Normal Time or the number of Normal Cycles. If the measured concentration of a solution
exceeds the value you select for Limit, the system will wash the sample tube and probe after
analyzing this solution for an additional period of time that you select for Extra Time or Extra
Cycles.
Loop Wash: This parameter pumps wash solution through the system. Allowed time depends
on the sample flow rate and length of the loop tubing.
Extra Time: Enter a value here if you want to set extra wash time after solutions where the
measured concentration exceeds the value you select for Limit. The system pumps wash
solution through the system using the FIAS program steps that you select below, for the
number of times you select here in addition to the number of times you select for Normal
Cycles. Use this option together with the option above: After all solutions + extra time if
solution exceeds limit.
Recom m ended HTS Loop Param eters

Select a loop size based on the estimated analysis time. Once you have chosen the loop size,
then use the recommended loop fill time and loop wash time as a good starting place for your
method development. Please be advised that timing may be different based on your
application.
Also, you can use a loop that is larger than your needed analysis time. For example, a 30
second analysis can be run with a 2 mL loop.
The recommended HTS loop parameters are based on a sample flow rate of 1.00 mL/min with
black-black peristaltic pump tubing and normal plasma operating conditions for aqueous solutions.
Note: Analysis Time is defined as the time the instrument spends acquiring data.
Recommended HTS Loop Parameters

Estimated Analysis Loop Size (mL) Loop Fill Time (s)
Time(s)
5 – 20 0.5 3
20 – 50 1 4
50 – 80 1.5 5
80 – 120 2 6
120 – 160 3 6
160 – 210 4 7
Method Editor . 95
Peristaltic Pum p
You use this page to select the rate of sample flow. You also select whether or not a sample
flush time should be added to the analysis delay time.
Detail of the Peristaltic Pump page.

Sample Flow Rate: Select the rate in mL/min that the sample solution will be pumped into
the plasma during an analysis. As you change this value, the pump speed that appears will be
changed appropriately. The value range and ratio of pump rate to pump speed depend on both
the pump tubing and the pump model selected.
Flush Time: This is the time (if any) between the wash time and the read delay, when the
pump will aspirate sample solution at the Sample Flush Rate. Valid entry range: 0 - 999. This is
normally set to equal the time it takes for the sample to travel from the sample vessel to the
nebulizer (while usually being pumped at a higher rate).
Autosam pler Page - Continuous Technique

You use this page to schedule when and for how long the sample delivery tubing will be
washed, and to set the wash pump rate.
Note: You specify the type of autosampler that you are using when you install the software. If
needed, you can change this setting using the Reconfigure utility: on the task bar at the
bottom of your screen, click Start, Programs, PerkinElmer Syngistix, Reconfigure and use the
wizard to change the autosampler. To set the tray type, use the Options menu, Autosampler
command to display the Autosampler Configuration dialog.
Note: When an ESI with prepFAST is configured SmartRinse is not available.

Autosam pler Wash

A wash step is often used during an automated analysis to clean off the autosampler probe and
rinse out the sample delivery tubing. To set up a wash step select from the following options to
define when and how washing between blanks, standards, and samples should occur:
Sm art Rinse
Note: SmartRinse only applies to ICP-Continuous technique.
Select this option to enable SmartRinse. SmartRinse provides an automatic procedure to rinse
between samples in the minimal amount of time without contamination.
To wash with SmartRinse:

1. In the Autosampler page, select SmartRinse.
2. Click on the SmartRinse Set… button to display the SmartRinse Concentration
Limits dialog. From this dialog you specify target concentrations to reach before
ending the wash.
3. For each element shown on the SmartRinse Concentration Limits dialog enter the
target Concentration to reach before ending the wash.
Note: Double click on the Concentration column to display the SmartRinse Concentrations Column Fill dialog.
4. Select whether you want concentrations expressed in Calibration units or Sample

units.
5. Click OK to close the SmartRinse Concentrations Limits dialog.
You are returned to the Autosampler page of the Method Editor.
6. In the Rate spin box specify the flow rate in mL/min to be used during the wash.
7. In the Wash Location spin box specify the ___location of the wash solution in the
autosampler tray, usually zero (0).
8. In the Maximum Wash Time for Samples spin box specify the maximum time for
the system to rinse samples. When the maximum rinse time is reached the system will
go to the next sample.
9. In the Wash Time – Calibration Solutions (sec) spin box specify the wash time for
the system to rinse calibration solutions.
Never
Select this option to be sure that no washes will be performed. When this option is selected
use the Wash Location spin box to specify the ___location of the wash solution in the
B etw een Sam ples

Select this option to perform a wash between each sample.
To wash between each sample:
1. In the Autosampler page, select Between Samples.
2. In the Rate spin box specify the flow rate in mL/min to be used during the Wash
Time.
3. In the Normal Time spin box specify the time in seconds that the autosampler is
immersed in the wash solution.
Method Editor . 97
4. In the Wash Location spin box specify the ___location of the wash solution in the
Only after sam ples w hose concentrations exceed lim its

Select this option to specify a wash for any analyte when its concentration exceeds a
specified limit.
To wash only if limits are exceeded:
1. In the Autosampler page, select Only after samples whose concentrations
exceed limits and then click on the Set... button.
The Extra Wash Concentrations Limits dialog appears.
2. Type the concentration limits you want for each analyte. The units shown are
Calibration Units.
These are selected from the Method Editor Calibration tab in the Calib Units and
Concentrations sub tab.
Note: The concentration parameter has a column fill dialog that can be accessed by double-clicking
on the column's header.
3. Click OK to close the Extra Wash Concentrations Limits dialog.

4. In the Rate spin box specify the flow rate in mL/min to be used during the Wash
time.
5. In the Normal time spin box specify the time in seconds that the autosampler is
6. In the Wash ___location spin box specify the ___location of the wash solution in the
After every sam ple + ex tra tim e if sam ple concentrations ex ceed lim its
Select this option to increase the length of awash for any analyte when its concentration
exceeds a specified limit. The system washes the sample tube and probe, after it has analyzed
each solution, for the time you select for Normal Time or the number of Normal Cycles. If the
measured concentration or absorbance of a solution exceeds the value you select for Limit, the
system will wash the sample tube and probe after analyzing this solution for an additional
period of time that you select for Extra Time or Extra Cycles.
To wash after ever sample and add extra wash time if sample concentrations exceed limits:
1. In the Autosampler page, select After every sample + extra time if sample
concentrations exceed limits and then click on the Set... button.
The Extra Wash Concentrations Limits dialog appears.
2. Type the concentration limits you want for each analyte. The units shown are calibration
units. These are selected on the Calibration Units and Standard Concentrations page.
The total wash time will be the Normal time + Extra time selected on the
Autosampler Wash page.
When the concentration of any analyte exceeds the entered value, the wash time will
be increased by the amount of time you selected.
Note: The concentration parameter has a column fill dialog that can be accessed by double-clicking
on the column's header.
3. Click OK to close the Extra Wash Concentrations Limits dialog.

4. In the Rate spin box specify the flow rate in mL/min to be used during the Wash Time.
5. In the Normal time spin box specify the time in seconds that the autosampler is
6. In the Wash ___location spin box specify the ___location of the wash solution in the
7. In the Extra time spin box specify the amount of extra wash time in seconds that will
be added to a wash. You can enter the amount of time directly or if you wish, you can
increase the wash time based on the concentration of a sample.
Autosam pler Page - Transient Technique

You use this page to tell the system when to wash the autosampler sample tube and sample
probe, and for how long. You can make the wash procedure dependent on the concentration of
the analyte in the solution.
You also select the autosampler ___location of the emission setup solution when you are using the
flame emission technique.
You select the autosampler tray on the Instruments tab in the Devices group, click the
Devices button, then select the Autosampler tab.
Method Editor . 99
Frequency
Never: No wash steps during the analysis. When this option is selected, the entry fields for the
options below are inactive.
Between Samples: The system washes the sample tube and probe after every solution that
it analyzes. Select a suitable option for Normal Cycles to tell the system how long to wash the
sampling system.
Only after samples whose concentrations exceed limits: The system washes the sample
tube and probe after it has analyzed a solution where the measured concentration exceeds the
value you select for Limit.
After every sample + extra time if sample concentrations exceed limits: The system
washes the sample tube and probe, after it has analyzed each solution, for the time you select for
Normal Time or the number of Normal Cycles. If the measured concentration of a solution exceeds
the value you select for Limit, the system will wash the sample tube and probe after analyzing this
solution for an additional period of time that you select for Extra Time or Extra Cycles.
Normal Cycles: This parameter appears only with flow-injection techniques.
The system pumps wash solution through the system using the FIAS program steps that you
select below, for the number of times you select here.
Extra Cycles: Enter a value here if you want to set extra wash time after solutions where the
measured concentration exceeds the value you select for Limit. The system pumps wash
solution through the system using the FIAS program steps that you select below, for the
number of times you select here in addition to the number of times you select for Normal
Cycles. Use this option together with the option above: After all solutions + extra time if
solution exceeds limit.
Use FIAS steps: Select the first and last steps in the FIAS program that you want the system
to use for the wash cycle. You can set step 0, the Prefill step, as the first step in the wash cycle.
FI AS Page (Transient Technique only)

Use the FIAS page to enter the event versus time program that controls the flow injection system.
Operation
Sample Volume: Enter the volume, in microliters, of the sample loop you intend to use. The
settings in the Recommended Conditions window are usually based on a volume of 500 µL.
Flow Injection Program

Step: This column shows the steps in the FIAS program. Every program contains a Prefill step
and between one and eight additional steps.
Use the Prefill step to ensure that the sample tube that leads to the FIAS-valve is filled with
sample solution. This step is used only for the first replicate. The other program steps are
performed for each replicate.
Time (sec): This is the duration of the program step in seconds. The duration of the steps
before the read step must be at least as long as the BOC time that you select on the
Spectrometer page.
Pump 1 and Pump 2 Speed (rpm): This is the speed of the pump during the program step.
To switch off the pump during a program step, enter 0.
Valve Fill/Inject:
Fill - The sample loop is filled with sample.
Inject - The sample in the sample loop is injected into the carrier stream.
Remotes: Remotes 2 through 10 are relays that can be used to control accessories that are
connected to the Instrument Interface on the rear of the instrument. Remote 1 is reserved for
triggering the signal measurement on the spectrometer. Select the box in the Remote column
for the step in which the accessory should be triggered. The system activates the relay for the
duration of the step.
Default: Use this button to enter the recommended FIAS program, for the element that you
have selected, into the Method Editor.
Read Step: Select the FIAS program step where you want to start the signal measurement.
Usually, this will be the inject step. The signal measurement starts at the beginning of the step
and continues for the Read Time selected on the Spectrometer page.
Method Editor . 101
Steps to Repeat: Select a range of FIAS program steps that you want to be repeated, for
example, with the amalgam technique to make multiple injections. If you do not want to
repeat any steps, enter 0 for Number of Repeats.
Number of Repeats: This is the number of times the system will repeat the steps selected
for Steps to Repeat. If you do not want to repeat any steps, enter 0.
Particle Counter Page

Note: This page only displays when Syngistix is configured for a Particle Counter.
You use this page to set the particle size and data formats and a calibration file for the analysis.
A predefined method file is provided with the Syngistix software installation that is specifically
for Particle Counting ICP‐OES analysis.
Caution: If specific particle counting method parameters are changed from the predefined method,
the sample amount and timings might have to change.
Analyze samples for particle counting/sizing: Check this box to use the particle counter
to acquire and analyze particle data with the given method. This gives the users selections of
which particle size and data formats are desired for the analysis and also, they can select the
calibration file.
Calibration file: Select the file used to calibrate the sensor for particle counting/sizing. Click the file open
button , navigate to and select the desired file (*.sns) then click the Open button.
Particle data formats: Calculates results for the selected data format(s). This takes counts and
provides classification of cleanliness.
ISO 4406: When this box is checked, the processes used to determine oil cleanliness and
cleanliness classes are defined in the ISO 4406 table. ISO 4406 classification is based on
particle sizes >4µm(c), >6µm(c), and >14µm(c).
NAS 1638: When this box is checked, the processes used to determine oil cleanliness and
cleanliness classes are defined in the NAS 1638 table. NAS 1638 classification is based on
particle sizes 5-15μm(c), 15-25μm(c), 25-50μm(c), 50-100μm(c), and >100μm(c). The NAS
1638 particle numbers are differential, which means that the counts for the stated particle
figure range is reported.
SAE AS4059 Cumulative: When this box is checked, the processes used to determine oil
cleanliness and cleanliness classes are defined in the SAE AS4059 Cumulative table. SAE
AS4059 classification can be based on the >4µm(c), >6µm(c), >14µm(c), >21µm(c),
>38µm(c), and >70µm(c) particle sizes.
SAE AS4059 Differential: When this box is checked, the processes used to determine oil
cleanliness and cleanliness classes are defined in the SAE AS4059 Differential table. SAE
AS4059 classification can be based on the 6-14µm(c), 14-21µm(c), 21-38µm(c), 38-70µm(c),
and >70µm(c) particle sizes.
Particle sizes (mm): The Fixed and Additional particle sizes that will be analyzed based
on selections in the method.
Fixed: The particle sizes to be analyzed based on the selected data format(s).
Additional: Enter particle sizes to be analyzed in addition to the Fixed sizes.
Show counts for each replicate in results window: When this box is checked, it
shows replicate data for each sample in the Results log.
Note: The categories displayed depend on what is defined in the selection to the right. An example of
some of the categories are: >4 μm(c), >6 μm(c), >14 μm(c), >21μm(c), >38 μm(c), and
>70μm(c). Raw counts will not be shown in differential format.
Dilution factor (by volume): Enter the dilution factor (typically 10) used by the Particle Counter.
Method Editor . 103
P rocess Page
You use the entries on the Process pages to control the data processing part of the analysis.
Data processing involves converting spectral data into intensity data for each element and
correcting for spectral overlaps.
To display the Process pages:
1. Click on the Process tab on the top of the Method Editor window.
2. Click on the appropriate tab on the right-hand side of the window to select the pages.
• Spectral Peak Processing Page
• Spectral Corrections Page
• Assign Internal Standards Page
• Perform Internal Standards Checks
Spectral Peak Processing

You use this page to select how the intensity peaks for your analytes will be measured. If you
wish, you can set a different peak algorithm for each analyte.
F'n (Function): This view-only column shows the action that the instrument will take for this
element. To change the parameter, use the entry field on the Spectrometer: Define Elements
page.
A = Analyte
IS = Internal Standard,
Analyte: This view-only column shows all the elements selected for the current analysis. To
change the parameter, use the entry field on the Spectrometer: Define Elements page.
Peak Algorithm: Select the mathematical algorithm that will be used to process the
analytical data on this item.
Note: In the Transient technique, the P eak Algorithm column drop-down choices contain only two
choices, P eak Ht and P eak Area.
Peak Area: The system uses the sum of the intensities recorded by the pixels on the detector
used for the read. The number of data points used is defined by the Points Per Peak entries on
this page. Since the total number of data points for each spectrum increases by a factor of four
when spectral profiling is turned on, you have to use four times as many points/peak to
measure the same area under the peak if spectral profiling is on than you would if spectral
profiling were off. You also must also quadruple the amount of time allowed for this to occur.
Peak Height: If you are not using spectral profiling, the number that you enter in Points Per
Peak defines the region that the software will search in order to locate the peak maximum. For
example, if you entered 5 in Points Per Peak, the software will search 5 points around the
calibrated center. When the software finds the point that produces the highest intensity, that
point will be defined as the Peak Height.
If you are using spectral profiling, the peak height is determined in different ways depending
on the number of points chosen:
1 point: uses theoretical wavelength or wavelength calibration point
2 points: uses highest of the 2
3 or 4 points: 3 point parabolic fit
5 or more points: 5 point cubic fit
The total number of data points for each spectrum increases by a factor of four when you use
spectral profiling. Therefore, if spectral profiling is on, you have to use four times as many
points per peak to define the same search region if spectral profiling is on than you would if
spectral profiling were off. You also must also quadruple the amount of time allowed for this to
occur.
M SF (M ulticom ponent Spectral Fitting)

The system uses a multiple linear regression to fit the spectra from the analysis to
predetermined models. If there is no MSF model stored for the element being read, a warning
message appears during the analysis. Because Points per Peak is not relevant when MSF
processing is used, the Points Per Peak column is dimmed.
Spectral profiling is not necessary for MSF. However, there may be certain instances where
spectral profiling may be useful as a means of improving results for elements that have
spectral interferences.
Note: This parameter has a Column Fill dialog that can be accessed by double-clicking on the
parameter's column header. In the Transient technique, the MSF choice is not displayed.
Points Per Peak

This is the amount of data to be captured depending on the type of algorithm that you
selected:
If you selected Peak Area, the value in the Points Per Peak entry is the number of data points
to be summed. On simultaneous ICP spectrometers, this equals the number of subarray pixels
that will be summed when spectral profiling is off. If spectral profiling is on, you need to use
about four times as many points to cover the same spectral area.
If you selected Peak Height, this entry is the width of the search window used for the peak
height determination. On simultaneous ICP spectrometers, you need to use about four times as
many points to cover the same spectral area when spectral profiling is on.
If you selected MSF, this entry is dimmed.
parameter's column header.
Method Editor . 105
Spectral Corrections
You use this page to select the corrections to be made for spectral overlaps and shifting
background emission. Two kinds of overlap correction are possible, Interelement Correction
and Multicomponent Spectral Fitting.
Note: In the Transient technique, the section at the bottom of the Spectral Corrections page
containing IEC M odel and M SF M odel is hidden. Also, the Overlap Correction drop-down
contains only one choice, None (the IEC choice is eliminated). Since there is only one choice
for Overlap Correction, the corresponding column fill dialog is not used (double-clicking on
the column header has no effect).
element.
A = Analyte
To change the parameter, use the entry field on the Spectrometer: Define Elements page.
Overlap Correction: Select a mathematical method that will be used to process the
analytical data on this item for spectral overlaps. It is possible to use one, two, or all three
settings in a method, although each individual element can only use one setting. The selections
that appear for Overlap Correction depend upon the peak algorithm that you selected on the
Method Editor Process: Spectral Peak Processing page, as shown below.
If the Peak Algorithm is: Then, Background Correction is:
Peak area None or IEC

Peak height None
MSF MSF
None: No overlap correction will be made for this item.

IEC (Interelement Correction): Interelement correction is a technique of correcting for

spectral interferences that uses mathematical correction factors to reallocate element
concentrations. See Interelement Correction Model Builder for more information. This
option is only available if Peak Area is selected as Peak Algorithm on the Process: Peak
Algorithm, Points/Peak page. If IEC is selected for any element, an IEC Table name must also
be selected on this page.
MSF (Multicomponent Spectral Fitting): A multiple linear regression is done to fit the
spectra from the analysis to predetermined models. It can be used for spectral interference
correction or for improving detection limits. See the Examine Spectra/MSF window for more
information. This option is automatically selected if MSF was selected as Peak Algorithm on the
Process: Peak Algorithm, Points/Peak page. If MSF is selected for any element, an MSF Table
name must also be selected on this page.
Background Correction: Select a method that will be used to correct for background
changes for this element.
Auto: (Default) Dynamically creates a background correction spectrum for each ICP replicate
and/or average spectrum with no user interaction required using a propriety PerkinElmer algorithm.
None: No background correction will be made for this element.
1-point: One-point background correction will be made for this element (using BGC1).
2-point: Two-point background correction will be made for this element (using BGC1 and
BGC2).
MSF (Multicomponent Spectral Fitting): A multiple linear regression is done to fit the
spectra from the analysis to predetermined models. See Examine Spectra/MSF window for
more information. This option is automatically selected if MSF was selected as Peak Algorithm
on the Process: Peak Algorithm, Points/Peak page.
BGC1 (Background Correction Point 1): This entry is dimmed unless 1-point or 2-point
background correction is selected. It sets the offset from the wavelength selected on the
Spectrometer: Define Elements page to be used for the first background point.
• Type a number for the offset. BGC1 can be on either the left or right side of the peak
wavelength. If you wish to enter a negative offset to specify a point on the left side of
the peak wavelength, type a minus sign (-) and then a number.
- or -
• You can select background points in the Examine Spectra/MSF window. For more
information, see Using the Background Correction Point Option.
BGC2 (Background Correction Point 2): This entry is dimmed unless 2-point background
correction is selected. It sets the offset from the wavelength selected on the Spectrometer:
Define Elements page to be used for the second background point.
• Type a number for the offset. BGC2 can be on either the left or right side of the peak
wavelength. If you wish to enter a negative offset to specify a point on the left side of
the peak wavelength, type a minus sign (-) and then a number.
Method Editor . 107
Assign I nternal Standards

This page is used to assign internal standards to the elements they will be correcting. To
assign internal standards, you must define at least one element to be an Internal Standard on
the first page of the Method Editor.
Note: In the Transient technique, the Internal Standards and Internal Stds Checks tabs are
hidden, since internal standards are not supported.
Assign Internal Standards

Assign an internal standard for each analyte that you want to be corrected using internal
standardization during the analysis. If an analyte does not have an internal standard assigned
to it, internal standardization will not be performed for that analyte.
You can select multiple elements/analytes by holding the CTRL key and clicking on the number
of each corresponding Analyte that you want to assign. Under Multi selection assignment
select an internal standard from the drop-down menu.
Note: This parameter has a Colum n Fill dialog that can be accessed by double-clicking on the
W ash solution contains the internal standard(s) – for use w ith SmartRinse
When Internal Standardization is used and Smart Rinse is enabled you use the Wash solution
contains the internal standard(s) check box to define whether or not internal standards
are present in the wash solution.
Check Wash solution contains the internal standard(s) when internal standardization is
used and the internal standard is present in the wash solution.
When this option is checked internal standards will not be listed as elements that can be
monitored on the Smart Rinse Concentration Limits dialog. During a wash internal standard
correction will continue with the internal standard ratio being updated during the wash.
Uncheck Wash solution contains the internal standard(s) when internal standardization is
used and the internal standard is NOT present in the wash solution. When this option is
unchecked, internal standards will show up in the list of elements that can be monitored for
Smart Rinse. Internal standard correction will continue during the wash; however, the internal
standard ratio is not updated, but rather the last ratio determined will be used throughout the
wash.
Internal Standard Options

Do Calib Blanks contain internal standards?
Set this to "yes" if the calibration blanks in the method contain internal standards, otherwise
set this to "no."
If you select "yes," then the first calibration blank analyzed will be used to initialize the internal
standardization correction routine. If you select "no," the software uses the internal standard
intensity in the first calibration standard to initialize the internal standard routine.
With either choice, you have the option of entering an ID and autosampler ___location for an
Internal Standard blank on the Calibration: Define Standards page. Scroll down to the Int Std
Blank entry line. The software subtracts this blank intensity from the internal standard
intensities measured in all solutions, i.e. the calibration standards and samples.
Report apparent concentrations for internal standards:
Note: When SmartRinse is enabled on the Sam pler > Autosam pler page of the Method Editor,
internal standard limits are always reported as a percent, regardless of what is selected on the
P rocess > Internal Standards page.
No: Internal standards are reported using intensities only.

As a Percent: During an analysis, the internal standards will be reported as a percentage of
an initial concentration of 100 and units will be "%." This lets you compare the intensity of the
internal standard to the initial value to see if drift has occurred.
As Concentrations: Define the initial (or actual) concentrations of the internal standards by
clicking on Set... and entering the information in the Internal Standards Concentrations dialog.
Then internal standard results will be reported in concentration during analysis.
Perform I nternal Standards Check s

On this page the system checks the intensity of the internal standard elements when read and
compares this reading with the initial reading and calculates the percent change in the
intensity. Next, the percent drift is compared with a customer specified allowable drift. If the
drift exceeds a customer specified limit a selected action will occur.
Note: The Dilute and Reanalyze action is only available when an ESI with prepFAST is installed and
configured.
Method Editor . 109
Perform Internal Standard Check s (check box )

This check box turns the feature on or off. The default is off. When the check box is on, all
other controls on the page are enabled, when the check box is off, all other controls on the
page are disabled (grayed out).
Internal Standards Lim its (spreadsheet)

The check boxes in the Apply Internal Standard Check column turn checking on/off for
each individual internal standard. The default for all of these is on.
The analytes listed in the Int. Std Name column are those already specified as internal
standards on the Spectrometer > Define Elements page. All analytes specified as internal
standards will appear in this spreadsheet, regardless of whether they have been assigned or
not. The numbering of the entries corresponds to their analyte number in the method. The
analytes listed cannot be changed by the user on this page.
The edit fields for Check Lower and Check Upper define the lower and upper limits (as a
percent) for each internal standard. These limits can be changed on an analyte by analyte
basis; there is no column fill to change one set of values and have it apply to all analytes. The
following properties apply to this edit field:
• Default values are 80 for Check Lower, and 120 for Check Upper.
• The values are always integers.
• For either lower or upper, the allowed range is 0 to 200; no other values can be typed
into the entry field.
• When one of these fields loses focus, the currently entered values are checked that the
lower limit is less than or equal to the upper limit. If it is not, the field that lost focus
will be reset to its previous value.
Actions Tak en after Internal Standard Check Failure
Note: You can select to have a sound played when an Internal Standard Check fails from the Sound
dialog.
Note: If you have an ESI with prepFAST installed and configured you can also use this page to apply
a dilution if an upper or lower internal standard check fails.
Select a failure action to be performed when the measured concentration exceeds the lower
limits:
Dilute and Reanlayze: This option is only available if an ESI with prepFAST is installed
and configured. When Dilute and Reanalyze is selected you must also specify a dilution
factor. When this action is selected the sample will be reanalyzed by the factor you
specified.
Continue: When this action is selected the system prints a failure message, then
continues with the analysis.
Next Method: When this action is selected the system prints a failure message; the
current method is stopped; and the system proceeds to the next method, if any. If there is
no next method, the system stops the analysis.
Stop: When this action is selected the system prints a failure message and stops the
analysis.
Alarm and Pause: When this action is selected the system prints a failure message; an
alarm is activated; and the analysis pauses. At this point, you will get an option to stop or
continue the analysis.
To apply a dilution if an Upper or Lower Internal Standard Check fails (only for ESI
with prepFAST systems)
Note: If Internal Standard Checks and Sample Limit Checks are defined in your method and both
checks fail, then Sample Limit Checks will always take priority.
1. Use the Internal Standard Limits table to define Internal Standard Checks.
2. For the Lower Limit failure action use the reanalyze spin box to define the number of
times to reanalyze a solution after a lower limit is exceeded. You can specify a value
from 0 to 3. The default is 1.
3. Select Dilute and Reanalyze: When Dilute and Reanalyze is selected you must also
specify a dilution factor.
4. For the Upper Limit failure action use the reanalyze spin box to define the number of
times to reanalyze a solution after an upper limit is exceeded. You can specify a value
from 0 to 3. The default is 1.
5. Select Dilute and Reanalyze: When Dilute and Reanalyze is selected you must also
specify a dilution factor.
Note: If both the upper and lower limits are exceeded, the action defined for the lower limit will take
place.
Note: If a failure of a limit persists, the dilution action will only occur 3 times before continuing on to
the next sample.
In the example below, the internal standard Y, has limits of 90% and 101%. If the measured
concentration exceeds the lower or upper limits, the sample will be reanalyzed by a factor of
2X or 7X respectively.
Tim e Processing
Use this dialog to select, for each analyte, how time-based peaks are processed. You can
select, via the drop-downs, Peak Ht. or Peak Area processing (under the Peak Algorithm
column), and the number of points for Savitsky-Golay smoothing for peak height (choices of
None, 5, 9, 19, or 37 under the Smoothing Points column).
element.
Method Editor . 111
A = Analyte
IS = Internal Standard,
Peak Algorithm: Select the mathematical algorithm that will be used to process the
analytical data on this item.
Peak Area: The system uses the sum of the intensities recorded by the pixels on the detector
used for the read. The number of data points used is defined by the Points Per Peak entries on
this page.
Peak Height: The number that you enter in Points Per Peak defines the region that the
software will search in order to locate the peak maximum. For example, if you entered 5 in
Points Per Peak, the software will search 5 points around the calibrated center. When the
software finds the point that produces the highest intensity, that point will be defined as the
Peak Height.
Smoothing Points: Points used to smooth peak using Savitsky-Golay algorithm prior to
calculation of peak height. When measuring Peak Height signals, you may want to smooth the
signal to average out noise before measuring the height. This setting has no effect when
measuring peak area. It also has no effect of the graphical display of transient peak signals.
Calibration P ages
You use the Calibration pages to define calibration standards and concentrations and to select
parameters such as the type of calibration equation and the autosampler locations for blanks
and standards. You also select how blanks will be used, and whether or not to use a stored
calibration.
To display the Calibration pages:
 Click on the Calibration tab on the top of the Method Editor window.
Calibration Pages
 Click on the appropriate tab on the right-hand side of the window to select these pages:
• Define Standards Page
• Calibration Units and Standard Concentrations Page
• Calibration and Reagent Blank Usage Page
• Calibration Equation and Sample Units Page
• Initial Calibration Options Page
• Multiline Calibration Page
• Recalibration Page
Define Standards
You use this page to select the IDs and autosampler locations that you want to use for the
blanks, standards, and other calibration solutions.
Note: The screen shot below shows the Define Standards page when an ESI autosampler with
prepFAST is installed and configured.
Click here for an example of generating a calibration curve using a single stock solution (only
for ESI with prepFAST systems).
Method Editor . 113
Method of Additions: Check this option to analyze samples using method of additions.
When Method of Additions is checked a drop-down list of method of additions equations
becomes enabled. From the drop down select the appropriate method of additions equation to
use in your method. You can select from the following equations: Method of Additions, Sample
Intercept, Method of Additions, Calculated Intercept, Method of Additions Calibrate. Please
note that the equation you select here will be applied to all analytes specified in your method.
Click here for more information on Method of Additions.
Note: Method of Additions is disabled when the prepFAST system is installed and configured.
ID: This is the name that you give to each calibration solution. It will be printed on the log
and saved in the results data set. If you do not type a name, the system uses pre-set IDs such
as Calib. Blank, Calib Std 1, etc.
A/S Location: This is the autosampler ___location you wish to use for each calibration solution.
For autosampler trays that have multiple size tube capacities, the larger containers located in
positions 1 through 8 typically are used for blanks, calibration standards, and QC samples, if
any. The next available autosampler ___location is automatically assigned by the software when a
new calibration blank, calibration standard, or reagent blank ID is entered. The user may
modify the settings.
If you have installed and configured the ESI with prepFAST system use this column to
specify the ___location of your stock standards for each calibration point.
Note: If Method of Additions is checked, the Autosampler Locations are automatically filled in.
Dilution Factor: Use this column to specify the Dilution Factor to be applied by the prepFAST
for each calibration point.
Note: This column is only displayed when an ESI w ith prepFAST system is installed and configured.
Calibration Blank 1-5: You can use up to 5 calibration blanks. The calibration blanks are
analyzed before the standards in an automated analysis. How the calibrations blanks are used
in the analysis is defined on the Blank Usage page. (It is useful to have 5 calibration blanks
available, for example, if you need to create a blank to match each matrix in each standard.)
 Type the ID for each calibration blank.
Internal Standard Blank: If you have entered an internal standard, this option appears on
the bottom of the scrolling list of Calib Blanks. (You may need to scroll to reach it.) If you
select an internal standard blank for the method, you decide which internal standards it is used
for on the Blank Usage page.
 Type the ID for the internal standard blank.
Note: In the Transient technique, there is no Int Std Blank.
Calibration Standard 1 - 30: You can use up to 30 calibration standards. These standards
will be analyzed in sequence (following the calibration blanks) in an automated analysis,
beginning with Calibration Standard 1.
1. Type the ID for each calibration standard.
If the ESI with prepFAST system is installed and configured you need to specify the
Dilution Factor to be applied to each calibration standard. The autosampler position
for each calibration standard defines the ___location of the stock standard from which the
dilutions will be made.
2. Assign the separate standards on the Calibration > Define Standards tab page of
the Method Editor.
3. Type 1 as the Dilution Factor for the standards you just entered in step 1.
4. Click on the Define Stock Std. Concentrations button.
5. On the Define Stock Standard Concentrations dialog enter the concentrations of each
standard.
6. Click OK to close the Define Stock Std. Concentrations dialog.
Note: Calibration Standards do not appear if Method of Additions is checked. If Method of Additions is
checked, then Additions 1-30 appear in place of Calibration Standards 1-30.
Addition 1-30: You can use up to 30 additions.

 Type the ID for each addition.
Note: When you select Method of Additions, the software assumes that the aliquots of sample
containing the additions (addition 1, addition 2, etc) immediately follow the original sample in
the autosampler tray. If there are two or more samples to analyze, each sample has its own
additions. The samples should be placed in the autosampler in the following order: blank,
sample, A1 (sample + addition 1), A2 (sample + addition 2), etc. You run a blank for the first
sample only. This blank will be used for all other samples.
Reslope Standard: You use the reslope standard to make small corrections to the slope of
the calibration curve using a single calibration standard following small changes in instrumental
conditions.
Note: This option is disabled if you checked Method of Additions.
 Type the ID for the reslope standard.
Note: You must also schedule when the Reslope Standard should be analyzed. You schedule the
Reslope Standard using the Recalibrate Before parameter in the Sample Information Editor.
 If the ESI with prepFAST system is installed and configured you need to specify the
Dilution Factor to be applied to the reslope standard.
Reagent Blank 1-5: You can use a reagent blank to compensate for differences in
composition between the reagents used to prepare the samples and those used to prepare the
calibration standards. Reagent blanks are analyzed immediately after the calibration standards
Method Editor . 115
in an automated analysis. The reagent blank concentrations measured are subtracted from all
subsequently analyzed samples. If multiple reagent blanks are analyzed, their concentrations
are averaged and the average concentration is subtracted from each sample.
Note: This option is disabled if you checked Method of Additions.
 Type the ID for each reagent blank.

Deleting Blanks and Standards: It is important to clear the information for blanks and
standards that are not to be included in an automated analysis. All blanks and standards that
are present in the method will be analyzed in an automated analysis.
 To clear the information for unwanted blanks and standards, click on the left-most
column to highlight the rows for blanks and standards you want to remove and press
the Delete key.
The rows for the blanks and standards will remain in the tables, but the information in them
will be cleared along with any information relating to them (including concentrations) in the
remainder of the pages in the Calib section of the Method Editor.
Ex am ple: Standards Dilution – Generating a Calibration Curve Using a

Single Stock Solution (only for ESI w ith prepFAST systems)
The steps outlined below can be used to configure a method to use the Single Standard
Calibration feature.
1. In the Define Standard page of the Method Editor specify an ID for each
calibration standard.
2. In the A/S Location column specify the ___location of your stock standard(s) for each
calibration point.
3. Use the Dilution Factor column to specify the desired Dilution Factors to be applied
for each calibration point.
4. Click on the Define Stock Std. Concentrations… button. The Define Stock Std.
Concentrations dialog displays.
5. Specify the concentration of the analytes in the Stock Standard solution as shown in
the screen shot below:
6. Click OK. The Define Stock Standard Concentrations dialog closes.

7. Click on the Calibration Units and Concentrations tab page of the Method Editor
and verify that the concentrations calculated by the system are as expected. If the
concentrations do not appear to be correctly calculated, verify that the selected
Calibration Units and significant digits of the Stock Standard(s) are correctly defined.
Note: The significant digits used to specify the Stock Std. Concentrations may affect the precision of
the system calculated values. F1.
Calibration Units and Standard Concentrations

You use this page to select the units and concentrations for your calibration standards or
additions if Method of Additions is checked on the Define Standards page of the Method Editor.
Note: If you have an ESI with prepFAST installed and configured this page is read-only.
Detail of the Calibration Units and Standard Concentrations page showing entries included in
an example method prepared for a soils analysis.
Analyte: This view-only column shows all the elements designated as analytes for the current
analysis. To change the parameter, use the entry field on the Spectrometer: Define Elements
page.
Calib Units: This column shows the units in which the concentrations of your calibration
solutions/addition solutions are expressed.
Note: If you have an ESI with prepFAST installed and configured this column is read-only.
 To change the units for an analyte, select an option from the drop-down list.
Method Editor . 117
To select your own units:

The units available in the drop-down lists are stored in a file called units.inix located in
C:\Users\Public\PerkinElmer Syngistix\ICP\SystemFiles\Configuration. You can use any text
editor to add units to the file. You can also rearrange the units in the file so that those
used frequently are on the top of the list. The units.inix file contains information on the
format and content of the file. If the units.inix file contains improper information, the
software may fail.
Standard Concentrations: These columns show the standard concentrations for each
analyte in each standard. If the concentration entry for an analyte in a standard is left blank,
then that analyte will not be measured when that standard is analyzed. Do not enter zero for a
calibration standard.
Note: If you have an ESI with prepFAST installed and configured this column is read-only.
 To enter or change the standard concentration for an analyte, type the new
concentration in the entry field.
 To clear the standard concentration for an analyte, click on the entry field and press
Delete.
Diluted Standard Concentrations

If you have an ESI with prepFAST installed and configured the software displays read-only
columns for the desired diluted standards.
After you have entered concentrations for the stock standards (on the Define Stock Std.
Concentrations dialog), Syngistix calculates the diluted concentrations and displays them on the
Calibration Units and Standard Concentrations page as shown in the screen shot below:
Calibration and Reagent Blank Usage

You use this page to select which calibration blanks should be used in calibrating the elements
in your analysis. You can also decide whether the blanks should be subtracted from the analyte
intensities, used for calibration, or both.
element.
A = Analyte
Use Calibration Blank: This column shows which calibration blank should be used as part of
the calibration for this element. Having multiple calibration blanks allows you to select different
calibration blanks for different elements to correct for differences in baseline of each blank
solution. The calibration blank is usually analyzed before the standards.
The way in which the calibration blank is treated in the calibration is based on the calibration
equation. For more information, see Calibration and Calculations.
• To change the calibration blank for one element, select an option from the drop-down
list.
Subtract Reagent Blank: This column allows you to use reagent blanks to correct for
variations in analytes. The normal way of using a reagent blank is to subtract the results for all
elements. By turning off reagent blank subtraction for certain elements that you know are not
present in the reagent blank, you can reduce the noise or bias that subtracting a near-zero
reagent blank concentration would otherwise add to a measurement. The column is active only
if one or more reagent blanks have been defined on the Define Standards page.
Note: This parameter is disabled if you checked M ethod of Additions on the Define Standards page.
Method Editor . 119
Calibration Equations and Sam ple Units

You use this page to select the type of calibration equation you will use and the units and
concentration reporting format for your samples.
Note: If you checked M ethod of Additions on the Defined Standards page, then the Calibration
Equation cells are read-only. The Calibration Equation that is displayed for each element, when
Method of Additions is enabled, is the equation that is selected on the Define Standards page.
F'n (Function): This view-only column shows the kind of action that the instrument will take
for this element.
A = Analyte
Calibration Equation: This column shows the calibration equation used to process the
analytical data on this item, defining the relationship between intensity and concentration for
your samples. See Calibration and Calculations for further details.
Note: If you checked M ethod of Additions on the Define Standards page, then the Calibration
Equation cells are read-only. The Calibration Equation that is displayed for each element, when
Method of Additions is enabled, is the equation that is selected on the Define Standards page.
 Select the calibration equation for an analyte.

Linear (Lin, Calc Int): This equation creates a calibration curve that relates concentration to
intensity linearly.
Linear equations are used when you expect a linear relationship between concentration and
intensity. Generally, this is 4 to 6 orders of magnitude greater than the detection limits and will
depend on wavelength region and your sample matrix. In this equation, the calibration blank is
subtracted from all solutions and included in the calculation of the calibration curve. The
intercept with the intensity axis is calculated rather than fixed at zero intensity and zero
concentration.
Linear-thru-zero: This creates a linear calibration curve, but forces the curve through the
origin of the graph.
Linear equations are used when you expect a linear relationship between concentration and
intensity. Generally, this is 4 to 6 orders of magnitude greater than the detection limits and will
depend on wavelength region and your sample matrix. In this equation, the blank is subtracted
from all solutions and included in the calculation of the calibration curve. The calibration curve
is forced to go through zero intensity and zero concentration.
Linear (Bracketing): This is a linear calibration technique designed for use over a restricted
concentration range. The calibration is performed with at least two standards that bracket the
calibration range of interest. The use of a blank is optional. If you use a blank, it is subtracted
from all solutions, but is not included in the calculation of the calibration curve.
Non-linear (Non Lin, Calc Int): Non-linear equations are used when you expect your
sample concentrations to be outside of the linear range of the technique. This option covers
the widest concentration range and requires that you use a blank and at least three standards.
In this equation, the blank is subtracted from all solutions and included in the calculation of the
calibration curve. The intercept with the intensity axis is calculated rather than fixed at zero
intensity and zero concentration.
Non-linear (Bracketing): Non-linear equations are used when you expect your sample
concentrations to be outside of the linear range of the technique. Bracketing is a calibration
technique designed for use over a restricted concentration range. The calibration is performed
with at least three standards that bracket the calibration range of interest. The use of a blank
is optional. If you use a blank, it is subtracted from all solutions, but is not included in the
calculation of the calibration curve.
Weighted Linear (Wt. Lin): When working at low level concentrations it provides an
alternative calibration scheme that weighs the low standards to a greater degree.
Sample Units: This column shows the units in which the sample results are expressed.
Conversion from sample results determined in Calib Units to results expressed in Sample Units
involves corrections made for weight, volume, and dilution information supplied for samples in
a Sample Information File (or the Sample Details dialog in a manual analysis), e.g. converting
from mg/L to mg/kg. Corrections are also automatically made for converting units with order-
of-magnitude differences, e.g. converting mg/L to µg/L.
 To change the units for an analyte, select an option from the drop-down list.
You can select either Weight/Volume units or Weight/Weight units. There are, however, some
restrictions on using combinations of certain Calib Units with certain Sample Units with respect
to information that needs to be supplied in the Sample Information File (SIF) for each sample.
Failure to include the proper information with samples will cause sample results to be reported
in Calib Units only. See Sample Preparation Parameters for more details about the sample
quantity information required in the Sample Information Editor.
 To select your own sample units, the units available in the drop-down lists are stored in a file
called units.inix located in C:\Users\Public\PerkinElmer
Syngistix\ICP\SystemFiles\Configuration. You can use any text editor to add units to the file.
You can also rearrange the units in the file so that those used frequently are on the top of the
list. The units.inix file contains information on the format and contents of the file. If the
units.inix file contains improper information, the software may fail.
Method Editor . 121
Max. Decimal Places: This column shows the maximum number of figures to the right of
the decimal point that are displayed for the concentrations reported in sample units or
calibration units.
It is possible that the final result will not include the number of decimal places specified here,
depending on the value that is specified for Max. Significant Figures. In general, when the
result is small, the Max. Decimal Places value is used. However, when the result is large, the
Max. Significant Figures is used.
Example 1
Max. Decimal Places = 3, Max. Significant Figures = 2
Calculated Concentration: 11.001
Reported Concentration: 11
The calculated concentration has three decimal places, but it exceeds the maximum
number of significant figures. Therefore, the result is reported as 11 with two significant
figures.
Example 2
Max. Decimal Places = 3, Max. Significant Figures = 4,
Calculated Concentration: 0.03587
Reported Concentration: 0.036
The calculated concentration has four significant figures, but it exceeds the maximum number
of decimal places. Therefore, the result is reported as 0.036 with three decimal places.
Max. Significant Figures: This column shows the maximum number of significant figures
that are displayed for the concentrations reported.
It is possible that the final result will not include the number of figures specified here,
depending on the value that is specified for Max. Decimal Places. See the examples under Max.
Decimal Places for more information.
M ultiline Calibration Page

Note: Multiline Calibration is disabled when M ethod of Additions is checked on the Define
Standards page.
You use this page to select various reporting options when using two or more wavelengths for
the same element. You can choose to:
• select the appropriate wavelength based on the concentration of the sample. You must
have a different concentration range for each wavelength. See the Select Line action
described below.
• report the average concentration of two or more wavelengths. You must have the
same concentration range for each wavelength. See the Average Lines or Report and
Average actions described below.
The list of analytes on this page is taken from the Method Editor Spectrometer: Define
Elements page, but only the analytes to which multiline calibration applies appear here. The
results will appear in the Results Display window.
Multiline Calibration: Select this check box to use multiline calibration.
Note: If the spreadsheet table is dimmed, you must select this check box to activate it.
Sequence: This column shows the order in which each analyte will be considered within each
element group. This is meaningful for only the Select Line action and can be changed using the
Move Up and Move Down buttons.
Element: This view-only column shows the elements in the current method that meet the
criteria for multiline calibration, that is, two or more wavelengths have been assigned to this
element. The elements are sorted first alphabetically and then by concentration range.
Action: This is how you want to have the concentration reported for each analyte.
 Select an action for each analyte.

Always Report: Use this action to report the concentration of an element at each
wavelength assigned, without the use of the multiline calibration feature. In the
example page shown above, the individual concentration will be reported for copper at
each wavelength. In the Results Display window, this action shows the concentrations
at each wavelength, as in normal reporting.
Select Line: Use this action to determine an element at two or more wavelengths,
but report the concentration at only one wavelength, based on the element
concentration found in the sample.
The Select Line action can be assigned to an element at three wavelengths. Suppose
that, when the analysis is performed, the concentration of iron is found to be 150
mg/L. This concentration will be reported at the 234.349 wavelength.
The software compares the 150 mg/L result with the concentration range of the first
wavelength in the sequence, 238.204. Because the concentration does not fall within
the 0 to 100 mg/L range, the next wavelength in the sequence, 234.349, is considered.
The 150 mg/L concentration does fall within the 100 to 500 mg/L range, which was
Method Editor . 123
used for this wavelength. Therefore, the Results Display window will show only the
result at Fe 234.349, 150 mg/L.
You can change the sequence using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. The
software will consider each wavelength in the sequence you specify.
Average Lines: Use this action to report an average concentration for an element at
two or more wavelengths. The concentration of an element is determined for each
wavelength. The three concentration values are averaged and the result is reported.
To use this action, you must have the same concentration range and units assigned to
each analyte. However, you can assign different calibration equations. One average
concentration per element can be calculated.
In the Results Display window, only the calculated average concentration is shown.
The average concentration is displayed with a new analyte name using the element
symbol and the word "Average." For example, "Ti Average."
Note: A saturated wavelength will not be included in the calculation.
Report & Average: Use this action to report individual concentrations for an element at
two or more wavelengths as well as the average concentration. In the example page shown
above, the concentration of zinc is determined for each wavelength, an average calculated
and all information reported. To use this action, you must have the same concentration
range and units assigned to each analyte. However, you can assign different calibration
equations. The Results Display window shows the concentration of the element at all
wavelengths and the calculated average of these concentrations.
Analytes: This view-only column shows all of the analytes in the current analysis that meet
criteria for multiline calibration. This information was entered on the Method Editor
Spectrometer: Define Elements page.
Low: This view-only column shows the lower limit of the calibration range. A zero appears
here for any calibration equation except linear or nonlinear bracketing. For either bracketing
equation, the lower limit that you entered in the Method Editor Calibration: Calibration Units
and Standard Concentration page will appear here.
High: This view-only column shows the upper limit of the calibration range. You entered this
information on the Method Editor Calibration: Calibration Units and Standard Concentration
page.
Units: This view-only column shows the units in which the concentration will be expressed.
Move Up (Button): When you choose Select Line, you use this button to move an analyte up
one place within the sequence of an element group. The software will consider each
wavelength in the sequence you specify.
Move Down (Button): When you choose Select Line, you use this button to move an analyte
down one place within the sequence of an element group. The software will consider each
wavelength in the sequence you specify.
I nitial Calibration Options

You use this page to decide whether to create a new calibration using standard and blank
solutions, or to use a calibration that has been stored.
W hen opening this m ethod m anually:

Load the calibration curve selected below
All calibration curves will be cleared when the method is opened, and the calibration curves
you select will be recalled from a stored results data set. If you are performing a manual
analysis, the calibration curves that you have selected here will be used for the analyses. If you
are performing an automated analysis, you can use the calibration curves that you have
selected here instead of generating a new calibration. When you click on Analyze Samples in
the Automated Analysis Control window, the calibration curves selected here will be used.
When using this method in a multi-method sequence
When two or more methods are entered in the Automated Analysis Control window, the
options are:
• Start by constructing new calibration curves.
New calibration curves will be created for each method by analyzing the blanks and
standards specified in the method.
• Start using the existing calibration curve set.
The calibration curves currently appearing in the Calibration Display window from the
previous methods used will be carried over.
• Start using the stored calibration curve set selected below.
The calibration curves you select will be recalled from a stored results data set. If
several calibrations are contained in the results data set, the last set of calibration
curves generated will be recalled.
Method Editor . 125
Recalibration Page
You use this page to set up Recalibrations periodically during the analysis. You define the
calibration standards and blank solutions on the Define Standards Concentrations page.
Recalibration is allowed under the following conditions:

• During an automated analysis.
• Periodically.
• Before specified locations.
Periodic Recalibrations
Select this check box to activate the recalibration options. The Periodic Recalibration
section is ignored if both of the following conditions are true:
• The Recalibrate Before parameter is active in the Sample Information File.
• Use sample info is checked in the Analysis window.
For both cases described above, the Sample Information setting overrides the Method Editor
setting.
Recalibration Type
Method checks are done in following cases:
• Reslope selected as the recalibration type, with no reslope defined in the method.
• Blank only selected as the recalibration type, with no calibration blank defined in the
method.
Complete Recalibration: The system analyzes the calibration blank(s) and all the calibration
standards, then creates a completely new calibration curve.
Reslope: The system analyzes the reslope standard, then calculates a correction factor and
uses it to change the slope of the active calibration curve .
Blank Only: The system analyzes the calibration blank and the reagent blank (if used) and
uses the new values for all subsequent sample analyses. The system does not change the
calibration curve. This compensates for changes in the zero absorption value since the
calibration curve was created.
Frequency
Every [n] samples: Select a value for [n]. The system performs a recalibration at regular
intervals, after analyzing [n] samples.
Note: QC's counted as samples will be part of the end sample count.
Before samples in autosampler locations: The system performs a recalibration before it

analyzes the samples in the sample tray locations that you select. Enter individual locations or
a range of locations. Use commas to separate the locations and ranges. Enter the locations in
any sequence; the software will sort them into ascending order. Example: 10-15, 18, 20, 22,
25-30
Analyze Standards at End

Select this option if you want the system to analyze the calibration standards, as though they
were samples, at the end of the analysis, after all other checks and QC tests have been
performed.
Method Editor . 127
Checks P ages
Calculate Lim its Dialog
Use this dialog to calculate the upper and lower limits.
 Click on the Calculate Limits... button on the QC Sample Concentrations and
Limits page of the Method Editor.
OR
 Click on the Calculate Limits... button on the Sample Limits Checks page of the
Method Editor.
Using this dialog:
1. Specify the upper and lower limits in percent to be used to calculate the limits.
2. Click on OK.
Automatic limit calculation can only be done on a percentage basis of the entered
sample concentration. If you are accessing this dialog from the QC Sample
Concentrations and Limits page, please note that limits based on detection limits have
to be entered manually since the QC sample concentration is usually zero.
Recovery Checks
You use this page to enter the concentrations of analytes added to matrix recovery check (i.e.
"spike") samples analyzed using this method. Scheduling of matrix recovery check samples for
an analysis is performed using the Sample Information Editor.
To display the Checks page:

1. Click on the Checks tab at the top of the Method Editor window.
2. Click on the Recovery tab.
Concentration Units
Calibration: Select this option to perform recovery calculations using the matrix check sample
concentrations expressed in Calib Units.
Sample: Select this option to perform recovery calculations using the matrix check
sample concentrations expressed in Sample UnitsAnalyte: This view-only column
shows all the analytes selected for the current analysis. To change the parameter, use the
entry field on the Spectrometer: Define Elements page.
Table
Conc Units: This view-only column shows Calibration Units or Sample Units, depending on the
selection made at the bottom of this page.
Recovery Set 1 to Set 6: These are the concentrations of analytes added to samples to
create matrix recovery check (i.e. "spike") samples to be analyzed using this method. You may
enter up to six different sets of concentrations for each method. In an analysis, a recovery set
can be used more than once. For example, you may analyze three recovery check samples that
are spiked with high analyte concentrations as defined in Set 1 and three other recovery check
samples that are spiked with low analyte concentrations as defined in Set 2.
To perform spike recovery measurements, you must enter information about the matrix check
samples in the Sample Information Editor using the Matrix Check Sample Entry dialog . The
equation used to calculate recovery checks is shown in the help topic for the Matrix Check
Sample Entry Dialog.
Sam ple Lim its Checks

The Sample Limits page allows you to quickly and easily set up sample limit checks. When a
sample result falls above or below a specified range, a message is displayed in the Results
window to indicate the failure.
Note: The “If upper limit is exceeded, then dilute by [N] and reanalyze “check box only appears
when an ESI with prepFAST is installed and configured.
Using the Sam ple Lim its Page

On this page you specify limits for analytes that are defined in your method. These limits will
be used to determine whether or not a flag is displayed when a sample result falls above or
below a specified limit. You have the option to enter a Concentration value for a particular
analyte/s and then use the Calculate Limits button to automatically calculate upper and lower
Method Editor . 129
limits for the analytes where a concentration is specified. Or, you can simply enter a value in
the Upper and/or Lower Limit cells for a particular analyte.
If you have an ESI with prepFAST installed and configured you can also use this page to apply
a dilution if an upper sample limit check is exceeded.
To display the Sample Limits page:
1. Open the Method Editor.
2. Click on the Checks tab on the top of the Method Editor window.
3. Click on the Sample Limits tab page.
To automatically calculate limits:
1. Enter the sample Concentrations.
2. Click on the Calculate Limits... button.
The Calculate Limits dialog appears.
3. On the Calculate Limits dialog specify the upper and lower limits in percent to be
used to calculate the limits.
4. Click OK.
You are returned to the Sample Limits page and limits are only calculated for analytes
that have a Concentration specified.
5. Select whether you want concentrations expressed in Calibration units or Sample units.
6. Check the Show range along with limit remark option to have the range displayed
on the results screen along with the upper/lower limit fail message, if a sample falls
above/below the specified limit.
Note: Whenever you change the parameters on the Calculate Limits dialog and click OK, the Upper
and Lower Limits, displayed on the Sample Limits page, are automatically updated for all
analytes that have a concentration specified.
To specify an upper and/or lower limit:

1. Type in the sample Upper and/or Lower limit values.
2. Select whether you want concentrations expressed in Calibration units or Sample
units.
3. Check the Show range along with limit remark option to have the range displayed
on the results screen along with the upper/lower limit fail message, if a sample falls
above/below the specified limit/s.
To apply a dilution if an upper sample limit check is exceeded (only for ESI with
prepFAST systems):
You can use the Sample Limits Checks page to perform a diluter action when an upper sample
limit check is exceeded. In order for this check box to be enabled the Concentration Units
must be set to Calibration.
1. After you have specified sample limits, check the If upper limit is exceeded, then
dilute by check box.
2. When this option is checked the system performs a diluter action only when an upper
sample limit is exceeded.
Note: To use this feature Concentration Units must be set to Calibration. Sample units cannot
be selected when "To apply a dilution if an upper sample limit check is exceeded" is checked.
3. Use the spin box to specify a dilution factor.
Note: If a failure of a limit persists, the dilution action will only occur 3 times before continuing on to
the next sample.
4. In the example below, the upper limit for Zn is 0.5 mg/L. If this upper limit is
exceeded for any sample, then the sample will be re-run with a dilution factor of 10. If
the sample was originally run diluted, as specified in the Sample Information File, the
dilution value specified in this window will be applied as a multiplier.
Method Editor . 131
QC P ages
You use the QC pages to enter parameters that describe quality control samples. QC samples
are used to perform runtime checks of instrument performance. You schedule when and under
what conditions the QC samples are to be analyzed. QCs can be scheduled after the initial
calibration, after any recalibration, periodically throughout the analysis and at the end of the
analysis.
The periodic QCs also can be scheduled in the Sample Information Editor. If periodic QCs are
scheduled in both the Method Editor and the Sample Information Editor, then the Sample
Information Editor takes precedence.
To display the QC pages:
 Click on the QC tab on the top of the Method Editor window.
To perform QC analyses:
To enter the required QC information, you must perform these steps:
1. Enter descriptive information about each QC sample including the QC sample ID and
autosampler ___location on the first QC page.
2. Enter the concentration and the upper and lower limits for each QC sample on the
second QC page. The software can calculate the upper and lower concentration limits,
or those limits can be entered manually.
3. Select when each QC sample is to be analyzed on the third QC page. The frequency
can be the same for all QC samples or different for each one.
Note: QC Samples can also be scheduled using the Sample Information Editor.
4. Select the action to be performed when the measured concentration is outside of the
acceptable limit for each QC sample on the fourth and fifth QC pages.
5. Select the maximum number of times a group of standards or standards and samples
may be reanalyzed to prevent the system from going into an infinite loop on the
Actions: End and Retry page.
QC Pages
 Click on the appropriate tab on the right side of the Method Editor to select the pages.
QC Sample Definition Page
• QC Sample: Concentrations and Limits Page
• Schedule for QC Analyses Page
• Failure Actions for After-Calibration and Periodic QC's Page
• Failure Actions for At-End QC's
QC Sam ple Definition

You use this page to enter the names and autosampler locations for the QC samples. You also
indicate whether to count a QC as a sample and whether to subtract reagent blanks from the
QC samples. This page contains a table with columns for up to 20 QC samples and includes
rows for the following parameters.
QC Sample ID: This is the quality control sample ID that will be displayed in the Results
Display window and in the results data set and printed or sent to a log file. You must first enter
an ID in order to enter any other information for a QC. The maximum number of characters is
20.
Autosampler Location: The software will automatically assign the next available
autosampler ___location when a QC Sample ID is entered. Enter the autosampler ___location for each
quality control sample if the ___location selected by the system is not appropriate.
 Click on an entry field and type a value between 0 and the maximum ___location number
on your autosampler tray.
Count as Sample: If you want the QC to be considered part of the sample count, select this
box. For example, for a frequency of every 10 samples, there are nine unknown samples and
one QC sample.
Subtract Reagent Blank: Selecting this box for this parameter will cause the reagent blank
concentrations to be subtracted from the measured QC Sample concentrations.
If the QC Sample is to be analyzed as an unknown sample, then you would normally
subtract the reagent blank. If the QC Sample is a calibration standard that is similar in
matrix to the unknown sample and was reanalyzed to check the calibration, then you
would not subtract the reagent blank. This is because the reagent was not subtracted
from the calibration standard when the reagent was originally analyzed.
Concentrations and Lim its

This page is used to enter QC sample concentrations and the upper and lower limits which
trigger failure actions by the software.
QC Sample ID: This specifies the QC sample whose parameters are displayed.
Analyte: This view-only column shows all the analytes selected for the current analysis. To
Units: This view-only column shows Calibration Units or Sample Units, depending on the
selection made at the bottom of this page.
Method Editor . 133
Concentration/Upper Limit/Lower Limit: This specifies the action limits for each QC
sample. If the measured concentration is between the specified upper and lower limits, no
action will be taken. If the measured concentration is above the upper limit or below the lower
limit, the appropriate failure action, which is defined on the appropriate Actions page, will be
performed.
To automatically calculate the upper and lower limits:
1. Enter the QC sample concentrations.
Since the significant figures and decimal places in the calculated limits are based on
those in concentration entries, you must enter the concentrations using enough
significant figures and decimal places so that the limits to be calculated have enough
significant figures and decimal places for proper limit checking. For example, if you
only use one figure for the concentration entry, then the limits will also have only one
figure.
2. Click on the Calculate Limits... button.
3. When the Calculate Limits dialog appears, specify the upper and lower limits in percent
to be used to calculate the limits.
4. Click on OK.
Automatic limit calculation can only be done on a percentage basis of the entered QC
sample concentration. Limits based on detection limits have to be entered manually
since the QC sample concentration is usually zero.
parameter's column header. You also enter the QC concentration for the analytes of interest.
Calculate Limits... This button displays the Calculate Limits dialog, which you use to
calculate the upper and lower limits for QC samples.
Schedule QCs
This page is used to enter the schedule for the QC analyses.
Note: QC samples can also be scheduled using the Sample Information Editor. If scheduling is done
using the Sample Information Editor, this takes precedence over any scheduling in the Method
Editor.
Schedule for QC Analyses

QC Sample ID: This view-only row specifies the QC sample whose parameters are displayed.
After Initial Calib: The QC will be analyzed after the initial calibration has been performed.
Note: If you schedule one or more After Initial Calib QC samples and then perform an Automated
Analysis using the Analyze Sam ples button, the instrument will analyze the QC as part of the
sample list. This is useful if you wish to use an existing calibration curve, analyze the After
Initial Calib QC sample as a check (without reanalyzing your calibration standards), then take
action based on the pass or fail status of the QC.
After Recalibration: The QC will be analyzed after any recalibrations that are part of the
analysis.
Periodically: The QC will be analyzed at specified intervals during the current analysis, based
on the frequency you select.
Frequency: This is the frequency at which the periodic QC samples are analyzed. For
example, if you select a frequency value of 20, then every 20 samples the QC sample will be
analyzed.
If you use the same frequency for all periodic QC samples, the values in the Frequency row in
the table will have a grey background and cannot be changed.
If you select Variable for the frequency, the values displayed in the table will have a white
background. You may then enter different frequency values for each QC sample.
At End: The QCs will be analyzed at the end of the current analysis.
Periodic Tim ing of Analyses

Frequency: This is the frequency at which QC samples are analyzed. You can use the same
frequency for all periodic QC samples, or vary the frequency for each QC sample.
Maximum time between QCs: This is only available when Same for All QC's option has
been selected for the frequency.
 To specify a maximum amount of time between periodic QC samples, click on the
check box, then select the time.
Failure Actions for After-Calibration and Periodic QC's

You use this page to define the actions to be taken if any of the QC samples that are analyzed
after a calibration or are analyzed periodically fail. You may select from one of several actions.
Failure Actions for After-Calibration QCs Param eters

QC Sample ID: This view-only row shows the name that you assigned to each individual QC
sample.
Times to retry QC: Select an option from the drop-down list. If it fails initially, the QC sample
is reanalyzed up to the specified number of times. If it passes at any one time, the analysis
Method Editor . 135
continues. If all tries fail, the failure action will be performed. If you select None from the drop-
down list, the QC will not be reanalyzed. Instead, the system will go directly to performing the
failure action.
When All Tries Fail: Select a failure action from the drop-down list:
Note: If there are any after-calibration QCs, they will be analyzed after the recalibration action. If the
QCs pass, then the rest of the action is performed (continue or rerun samples).
Continue: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed and
Recal & Cont: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed.
The system performs a complete recalibration as defined on the Calibration page including the
reagent blank if selected, then continues with the analysis.
Rslp & Cont: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed.
The system analyzes the calibration blank and reslope standard as defined on the Calibration
page including the reagent blank if selected, then continues with the analysis.
AZ & Cont: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed.
The system performs an autozero using the calibration blank and the reagent blank (if you are
using one), then continues with the analysis. An autozero sets the reading of the calibration
blank or reagent blank to zero automatically.
Alarm and Pause: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you
typed. An alarm is activated and the analysis pauses. At this point, you will get an option to
stop or continue the analysis. If an automatic shutdown is scheduled, Alarm and Pause will
prevent system shutdown.
Next Method: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed.
The current method is stopped and the system proceeds to the next method, if any. If there is
no next method, the system stops the analysis. If an automatic shutdown is scheduled, Next
Method will prevent system shutdown.
Stop: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed. The
system stops the analysis. If an automatic shutdown is scheduled, Stop will prevent system
shutdown.
Additional Message: The system will automatically print standard messages indicating what
is happening if the measured QC concentration does not fall within the range specified by the
limits.
You can type an optional message up to 60 characters in length in this entry field that will be
printed when a failure action is performed in addition to the standard message.
Failure Actions for Periodic QCs Param eters

sample.
failure action.
When All Tries Fail: Select a failure action from the drop-down list:
Recal & Cont: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed.
The system performs a complete recalibration as defined on the Calibration page including the
reagent blank if selected, then continues with the analysis.
Rslp & Cont: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed.
page including the reagent blank if selected, then continues with the analysis.
AZ & Cont: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed.
The system performs an autozero using the calibration blank and the reagent blank if selected,
then continues with the analysis. An autozero sets the reading of the calibration blank or
reagent blank to zero automatically.
Recal & Rerun: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you
typed. The system performs a complete recalibration as defined on the Calibration page
including the reagent blank if selected. Then, the samples are rerun, starting after the last QC
that passed.
Reslp & Rerun: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you
typed. The system analyzes the calibration blank and reslope standard as defined on the
Calibration page including the reagent blank if selected. Then, the samples are rerun, starting
after the last QC that passed.
AZ and Rerun: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you
typed. An autozero is performed using the calibration blank and the reagent blank if selected.
Then, the samples are rerun, starting after the last QC that passed. An autozero sets the
reading of the calibration blank or reagent blank to zero automatically.
not a next method, the system stops the analysis. If an automatic shutdown is scheduled, Next
shutdown.
limits.
You can type an optional message in this entry field that will be printed when a failure action is
performed in addition to the standard message.
Failure Actions for At-End QC's

You use this page to define actions to be taken for QC's run at the end of an analysis. You
select the number of times to retry the QC sample before a failure action is performed. When
the At-End QC samples pass, the analysis ends. If all tries fail, or if no retries are scheduled,
then the failure action that you select is performed immediately.
Method Editor . 137
Failure Actions for At-End QCs

sample.
failure action.
When All Tries Fail: Select an failure action from the drop-down list:
Recal & Rerun: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you
typed. The system performs a complete recalibration as defined on the Calibration page
including the reagent blank if selected. Then, the samples are rerun, starting after the last QC
that passed.
Rslp & Rerun: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed.
page including the reagent blank if selected. Then, the samples are rerun, starting after the
last QC that passed.
AZ & Rerun: The system prints a failure message and any optional message that you typed.
An autozero is performed using the calibration blank and the reagent blank if selected. Then,
the samples are rerun, starting after the last QC that passed. An autozero sets the reading of
the calibration blank or reagent blank to zero automatically.
no next method, the system stops the analysis.
shutdown.
limits.
You can type an optional message up to 60 characters in length in this entry field that will be
printed when a failure action is performed in addition to the standard message.
M ax im um Retries After QC Failure

You use this parameter to select the maximum number of reanalyses of samples before an
action is taken. You select the action to be taken when the number of times you run the
sample is equal to the maximum number of retries. See Flow Chart 4: An Example of a Failure
Action in QC Flow Charts.
1. Type a value for the maximum number of retries that you want the system to perform.
2. Select an option from the drop-down list:
no next method, the system stops the analysis. If an automatic shutdown is scheduled, Next
Continue: The system continues with the next unknown sample as if no failure occurred.
shutdown.
Method Editor . 139
Options Page
You use the entries on the Options page to set up your Results Display and Printed Log. You
also set some options for information to be stored with a Results Data Set for an analysis.
Headers to include in Results Displays and Printed Log

Select the type of information you wish to include in the Results Display and the Printed Log
for your analysis. For detailed descriptions of the following headers, see Results Display
Window.
Analytical Header: Select this to include a header when a new analysis is begun. This header
includes the analysis start time, technique, the sample information file name, the results data
set name, the results library name, and other general information. Each time the current
method is modified and another sample is analyzed, a new analytical header is displayed.
Method Header: Select this to include a header that contains the name of the method, the
method description, the date the method was last saved, and names of IEC and MSF files. The
expanded header includes information from the method on the calibration equation, peak
processing, plasma viewing, and spectral corrections. You can select from a Short or
Expanded method header.
Sample Header: Select this to include a header with sample information, including sample
ID, sample weight, dilution, and sample prep volume.
You have the option to Start each sample on a new page.
Sam ple Data I tem s

Select the type of information you wish to include in the Results Display and the Printed Log
for your analysis.
Replicate Data: Select this option to include data for each replicate.
Means and Statistics: Select this option to include the mean values of each set of replicates,
the standard deviation, and the relative standard deviation.
Auto Integration Report: Select this option to include an Auto-Integration Report for each
measurement when auto integration is being used. Information includes the integration time,
number of integrations and read time.
Note: In the Transient technique, Auto Integration R eport is not displayed.

Display over calibration message: Select this option to display an over calibration message
when the sample concentration is greater than the entered percentage of the highest standard.
When this option is checked the % spin box is enabled. In the % spin box enter a value
between 100 and 999 %.
Sum m ary I tem s

Analysis List: Select this option to include a summary of the operations that were performed
on all of the samples.
Matrix Test Reports: Select this option to include information about matrix check samples
(duplicates, recovery samples and spikes) analyzed.
Calibration Summary (Auto Analysis only): Select this option to include a calibration
summary in the Results Display window. If this is selected, the calibration summary is
automatically included for automated analyses after the last standard is analyzed.
Note: For manual analyses, you must select the Calibration Summary command in the Analysis menu.
Detailed Cal. Summary: Select this option to display a detailed summary of each calibration
curve, including the calculated concentration of each standard. This summary will be displayed
after the final standard has been run.
Save w ith Results

Spectral Data: Select this to include the spectral data in the results data set. The spectral
data must be stored in a results data set if it is to be displayed in the Examine Spectra window
or used for setting up MSF models or Data Reprocessing.
Universal Data Acquisition: Select this option to run in Universal Data Acquisition (UDA)
mode. When this option is checked, the spectrometer records all of the emission spectra for
every sample, regardless of the elements being determined. This UDA capability allows you to
retroactively use data that was not in the original method to determine additional elements or
measure at alternative wavelengths. Click here for more information on Universal Data
Acquisition.
Note: If you have a dual view method, then the Radial and Axial radio buttons will become enabled
when Universal Data Acquisition is checked. You can then select the Radial radio button to
collect Universal Data in radial viewing mode, or you can select the Axial radio button to collect
Universal Data in axial viewing mode.
Remarks: Use this entry field to type your comments regarding the method.
Method Editor . 141
About Universal Data Acquisition (UDA)

Universal Data Acquisition (UDA) is an option available on the Options tab page of the Method
Editor. When this option is checked, the system records all of the emission spectra for every
sample, regardless of the elements being determined. This UDA capability allows you to
retroactively use data that was not in the original method to determine additional elements or
measure at alternative wavelengths.
Enabling Universal Data Acquisition M ode

To record all of the spectral data for each sample:
Note: When Universal Data Acquisition mode is enabled all of the spectral data is recorded behind
the scenes and only the data for elements defined in your method are reported. If, at a later
time, you wish to determine additional elements or measure at alternative wavelengths, you
can select the UDA data from a results data set and reprocess the data with a method that
contains the elements you want to measure. For more information on reprocessing UDA data
see Reprocessing Universal Data.
To set up a method with Universal Data Acquisition enabled:

1. Open the Method Editor and set up a method to suit your analysis. When setting up
your method, make sure that steps 2-5 are followed, so that the emission spectra for
every sample are recorded.
2. From the Method Editor Options tab page check Spectral Data.
3. Check Universal Data Acquisition.
Note: If you have a dual view method, then the Radial and Axial radio buttons will become enabled
when Universal Data Acquisition is checked. You can then select the Radial radio button to
collect Universal Data in radial viewing mode, or you can select the Axial radio button to collect
Universal Data in axial viewing mode.
4. Click on the Spectrometer tab > Settings tab.

The Spectrometer Settings are displayed.
5. On the Settings tab, make sure that Resolution is set to Fixed and Time(sec) is set to Auto.
6. Set up the rest of your method as required for your analysis and then save your method.
7. Analyze your samples.
All of the spectral data is captured in the data set you specified and is available for
reporting via the Reprocess command. For more information on reprocessing UDA
data, see Reprocessing UDA Data.
Note: You cannot perform an analysis with a method that has all three of the following parameters
enabled: Spectral Profiling, High Resolution, and Universal Data Acquisition. At least one of
these parameters must be unchecked in order for your method to be valid. For example, you
can perform an analysis using a method that has Spectral Profiling and Universal Data
Acquisition enabled.
Reprocessing UDA Data

If you collected data with Universal Data Acquisition enabled, you have the ability to
retroactively use data that was not in your original method to determine additional elements or
measure at alternate wavelengths. The steps outlined below show you how to reprocess UDA
data.
To reprocess UDA data:
1. On the Results tab in the Results group, click Reprocess.
The Data Reprocessing Window is displayed.
2. Next to Data Set to Reprocess, click on Browse... and select a results data set that
contains the data you want to reprocess.
Results data sets that contain Universal Data are marked with a > in the row number.
In the Data Reprocessing window, the results from the reprocessed data will be saved
to the data set shown in the Reprocessed Data Set field. This field defaults to the data
set from the most recent analysis. A check mark appears in the Save Reprocessed Data
box, confirming that reprocessed data will be saved. If you do not want to store
reprocessed data, uncheck Save Reprocessed Data.
3. To change to a different data set, click on Browse... (next to Reprocessed Data Set).
The Select Results Data Set dialog appears.
4. Type in a new data set name or select an existing one and then click OK.
5. Open the method that you want to use for reprocessing.
6. Confirm that the method in use contains the correct settings for the results data set
that is to be reprocessed.
7. In the Data Reprocessing table, review the information. The IDs in the selected
results data set are listed along with the sample information that was used when the
data was originally collected.
8. To edit this information, type the new information into the fields as desired. To access
a pop-up menu containing commands for editing the table, right click anywhere in the
table.
Note: There is a column fill dialog available for each of the parameters in the table, except Sample
Type and Original Method. To access a column fill dialog, double-click on the parameter's
column header.
9. To hide columns that do not contain data, check Hide Empty Columns.
Method Editor . 143
10. To only display samples with UDA data check Only show samples with Universal Data.
11. To select items of interest for reprocessing, select the associated row numbers in the
table.
12. To select a series of rows, click on the first row number of interest, hold down the Shift
key, and click on the last row number of interest. You can also drag over the row
numbers column using the mouse cursor.
13. To select non-consecutive rows, hold down the Ctrl key and click on each row
number.
Tip: The order in which samples are selected is the order in which reprocessing occurs. As you
select each row, the reprocessing sequence appears in the Sequence column.
14. Click on Reprocess.

Sam ple I nform ation Editor
Sam ple Inform ation Editor

The Sample Information Editor allows you to enter all the information from the sample. This
information is recorded in the database after sample data has been collected.
We recommend that you use a sample information file to store information about
the samples. The system uses this file to label the data from your samples both on the
printed log of the results and in the results data set. Information in this file is also often
needed by the system to calculate final concentrations.
Enter ID's only for samples and matrix check samples in the sample information file. Enter
ID's for the blanks, standards, and QC samples in the Method Editor. If you enter ID's for
blanks, standards, or QC samples in the Sample Information Editor, these solutions are
analyzed as samples.
 On the Analysis tab, in the Sample Information group, click the Sample Info
button.
File Form at
The sample information is written as a text file, a format that you can also create using other
software such as a BASIC program, a spreadsheet program, or a database program. You can
also create this file on a laboratory information management system and load it into your
instrument control computer to perform analyses.
Sample Information Editor . 147
Using the Sam ple Inform ation Editor

Custom izing the Sam ple I nform ation Editor
You can select the exact parameters that you need to describe your samples and add them
to the Sample Information Editor. You select the sample description, preparation, and
scheduling parameters from a list of available parameters.
For the sample description and sample preparation parameters, you decide whether the
information will be the same for all samples or will vary for particular samples:
• If the Information you enter will be the same for all samples, you assign the
parameter to the Parameters common to all samples table.
• If the information you enter will vary for individual samples, you assign the
parameter to the Parameters that vary by sample table.
• In addition, you can define your own parameters by selecting Parameter List in the
Sample Information group of the Analysis tab.
This displays the Sample Information Parameters dialog.
Once you have included all the parameters that you need, you can save this configuration as
a sample information design by clicking Save in the Sample Information group. Sample
Info Design to save as a .sidx file. By saving the design, you can reuse it later for similar
sample information files.
Editing inform ation in the Sam ple I nform ation Editor

To edit information about the samples or to remove the assigned parameters from either
table, right-click with the mouse button in the table and a pop-up menu appears.
Appending Sam ples to an Autom ated Analysis

You can modify and append samples to an automated analysis.
1. While the instrument is performing an automated analysis, in the Sample Information
Editor modify the information in samples as desired, then click on the Append to
Analysis List button.
2. When the Append to Run List dialog appears, type the range of samples that you
want to append and click on OK to add the samples to the end of the run list in the
Automated Analysis Control window.
Note: You can drag the mouse cursor through a range of samples in the Sample Information Editor
and, when you click on the Append to Analysis List button and the Append to Run List
dialog appears, the range of the selected samples already appears in the dialog.
To delete, copy, or rename sample information files or sample information

designs:
• Use the Windows Explorer. These files are stored in C:\Users\Public\PerkinElmer
Syngistix\ICP\Data\Sample Information.
Creating a New Sam ple Inform ation File

To create a new sample information file:
1. In the Sample Information group, click on New.
The New Sample Information File dialog appears.
2. Select a design from the list of Available Designs and click on OK.
This list includes a Default design and any other designs that have been previously
created and stored.
3. To create a name for the Sample Information File, in the Sample Information
group on the ribbon, click on the down button next to Save and select Save Design
As from the drop-down list.
4. You can customize the Sample Information Editor by selecting the parameters you
need to describe your samples. See Customizing the Sample Information Editor.
5. Enter the sample information.
For example, autosampler locations, Sample ID, Initial Sample Weight, etc.
6. If desired, annotate the file using the File Description field to provide further
descriptive information.
When you move the mouse cursor to this text area and click with the right mouse
button, a pop-up menu of editing commands appears.
7. Click on the down button next to Save and select Save Sample Information File
As from the drop-down list.
The Save As dialog appears. Type a name for the file, then click on Save.
Custom izing the Sam ple Inform ation Editor

To fully describe your samples, you can type new information into the table, or add/remove
parameters and then save the configuration as a sample information design to use again.
removed.
Adding Param eters to the Sam ple I nform ation Editor

To add parameters to the Sample Information Editor:
1. If you have not created a name for the new sample info file, do the following:
a. In the Sample Information group, click on New. The New Sample
Information File dialog appears.
b. Select a Design from the list of Available Designs and click on OK. This list
includes a default design and any other designs that have been previously
created and stored. To create a name for the Sample Information File, in the
Sample Information group, click on Save As then in the Save Sample
Information As dialog type a name for the new sample information file, then
click on Save.
2. In the Sample Information group, click on Parameter List.

- or -
Click with the right mouse button anywhere on the background area in the Sample
Information Editor. In the pop-up that appears, select Parameter List.
The Sample Information Parameters dialog appears.
3. In the list of Available Parameters, click on a parameter to select it. (To deselect
the parameter, click again.) The parameters are shown in alphabetical order.
4. Click on the arrow button that points to the list where you wish to move the
selected parameter. Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) override settings in the
method.
• If the entry for the parameter is common to all samples, move the parameter to
the Common list.
• If the entry for the parameter varies for each sample, move the parameter to the
Variable list. For example, the analyst name might be the same for all samples,
while the sample IDs would vary for each sample. The parameter is removed
from the Available list and appears in the list you chose.
• To change your selections, click on a parameter in the Common list or in the
Variable list, then click on an arrow pointing back to the Available list. The
parameter is returned to the Available list.
5. Select additional parameters, if desired, and move them to the appropriate lists.
When you are finished, click on OK.
6. In the Sample Information Editor, use the scroll bars to see the changes you made.
Parameters that you added to the Common list appear in the Common
Parameters table, and those added to the Variable list appear in the Parameters
That Vary by Sample table.
Rem oving Param eters from the Sam ple I nform ation Editor
To remove parameters from the Parameters common to all samples table:

 Click with the right mouse button anywhere on the background area in the Sample
Information Editor. In the pop-up that appears, select Parameter List... Click on a
parameter in the Common Parameters list, then click on an arrow pointing back to
the Available Parameters list.
To remove parameters from the Parameters that vary by sample table:
 Click with the right mouse button anywhere on the background area in the Sample
Information Editor. In the pop-up that appears, select Parameter List... Click on a
parameter in the Variable list, then click on an arrow pointing back to the Available list.
To save the sample information design:
1. Click on the down button next to Save and select Save Design As from the drop-
down list. The Save Sample Information Design File As dialog appears.
2. Type a name for the file, then click on Save.
Opening a Stored Sam ple I nform ation File

To open a stored Sample Information file:
1. In the Sample Information group, click on Open.
The Open Sample Information dialog appears.
2. Select the sample information file that you want to open, then click on Open.
M odifying a Stored Sam ple I nform ation File

removed.
To modify a stored Sample Information file:

1. On the Analysis tab in the Sample Information group, click Open.
The Open Sample Information dialog appears.
2. Select the sample information file (*.sifx) that you want to open, then click on
Open. If the Sample Information Editor dialog is not currently open, click the
Sample Info button in the ribbon.
3. You can customize the Sample Information Editor by selecting the parameters you
need to describe your samples. See Customizing the Sample Information Editor.
4. Change the sample information as desired.
5. Change the information in the File Description field as desired, using the pop-up
menu for editing commands.
6. Save the file:
• To save the file with the same name, click on Save in the Sample Information group.
• To save the file with a new name, click on Save drop-down arrow in the Sample
Information group, then click Save As. The Save Sample Information File As
dialog appears. Type a name for the file, then click on Save.
Note: If you modify a sample information file and then attempt to create a new one, a message
appears asking if you wish to save the changes to the first sample information file. This also
happens when you attempt to exit the Syngistix software.
Printing a Sam ple I nform ation File

To print the contents of a sample information file:
1. Click on the Sample Information Editor to make it active. Note that the title bar of
an active window is a different color from other windows. (The colors that appear on
the screen depend on the colors you have selected in your Windows® application.)
2. Click with the right mouse button anywhere on the background area in the Sample
Information Editor. In the pop-up that appears, select Print.
3. In the Print dialog that appears, check that the correct printer is shown. To select a
different printer, click on the drop-down arrow in the Name field and make a selection.
To make other changes, such as paper size or graphic attributes, click on the
Properties button.
Editing Sam ple Inform ation Param eters

You can edit the entry fields and add or delete rows in the Parameters that Vary by
Sample table.
To clear information in the table:
Note: When you clear information, the content in an entry field is removed, not the entry field itself.
1. Click on the entry field that contains the information you want to remove.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Edit group, click on Clear.
- or -
Click with the right mouse button. A pop-up menu appears. Click on Clear.
- or -
Press the Delete (Del) key.
To insert rows in the table:
Note: When you insert rows, the new rows are inserted before the first row you select in the table.
1. Select a row in the table by clicking on a number in the Sample Number column of
the table. The entry fields in the row become highlighted to indicate that the row is
selected.
2. If you want to insert more than one row, you select the same number of rows in the
table. For example, to insert three new rows, you would select three existing rows.
To select additional rows, hold down the Shift key while clicking on additional row
numbers.
3. On the Analysis tab, in the Edit group, click on Insert Rows.
- or -
Click with the right mouse button. A pop-up menu appears. Click on Insert Row.
To delete rows in the table:

When you delete rows, the contents of the row and all the entry fields in the row are
removed.
1. Select a row in the table by clicking on a number in the Sample Number column of
the table. The entry fields in the row are highlighted to indicate that the row is
selected.
2. To select additional rows, hold down the Shift key while clicking on additional row
numbers.
3. On the Analysis tab, in the Edit group, click on Delete Rows.
- or -
Hold down the right mouse button. A pop-up menu appears. Click on Delete Rows.
Sam ple Inform ation Editor Pop-Up M enus

The following pop-up menus contain several convenient commands as you work with the
To display the pop-up menus:

 Click with the right mouse button in the Sample Information Editor.
 When you click with the right mouse button in the Parameters that Vary by
Sample table, a pop-up menu containing editing commands for the table appears.
 When you click with the right mouse button anywhere on the background area in the
window, the Sample Information Editor pop-up menu appears.
Sam ple Inform ation Editor pop-up m enu
Parameter List... Adds new parameters to the Sample Information Editor.

Maximum Number of Samples... Opens a dialog to specify the number of samples (1
– 5000 samples) you have by typing in a value or using the up or down arrows and then
click on OK.
New Sample Info File... Selects a design and a creates a name for the new sample
information file.
Open Sample Info Opens a stored sample information file.
Save Sample Info Saves the contents of the Sample Information Editor using the same
file name.
Save Sample Info As... Saves the contents of the Sample Information Editor using a
new file name.
Save As Text... Saves the contents of the Sample Information Editor to a text file or
comma-delimited ASCII file.
Save Sample Info Design As... Saves the configuration of the Sample Information
Editor as a design file. You can use a design file to quickly customize the Sample
Information Editor with the parameters you need to describe your samples.
Print... Prints the contents of the Sample Information Editor.
Print Preview... Displays the formatted sample information report in a preview
window. Use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to enlarge or reduce the report. Click
on Close to return to the Sample Information Editor.
Table editing pop-up m enu
Parameter List... Adds new parameters to the Sample Information Editor.

Maximum Number of Samples... Opens a dialog to specify the number of samples (1
– 5000 samples) you have by typing in a value or using the up or down arrows and then
click on OK.
Clear Removes the contents of the selected entry fields.
Insert Row Inserts a new row before the currently selected row.
Delete Rows Removes the selected rows in the table.
Column Fill... Displays the Column Fill dialog for the selected column. You use this
dialog to automatically enter information for a range of samples.
Entry Dialog... Displays the Entry dialog for the selected entry field. You use this dialog
to type information for a text entry field.
Sam ple P reparation: An Ex ample

The following is an example of sample preparation:
1. An analyst weighs 1.54 grams of sample into a beaker. This is the Initial Sample
Weight.
2. Next, hydrochloric acid is added to the sample and the solution is heated so that the
sample is dissolved. After the solution is allowed to cool, the analyst quantitatively
transfers it into a 250 mL flask and fills the flask to the 250 mL mark. This is the
Sample Prep Volume.
3. A 10 mL aliquot of this solution (the Aliquot Volume) is pipetted into a 100 mL
volumetric flask and diluted to the 100 mL mark. This is the Diluted to Volume.
To summarize, for the above example, you would enter the following values:
Initial Sample Weight 1.54 grams
Sample Prep Volume 250 mL
Aliquot Volume 10 mL
Diluted to Volume 100 mL
Note: You can also record the Diluted to Volume as the ratio of the original sample volume to the
final sample volume. In this example, 10 mL of sample is diluted to 100 mL, so the ratio
would be 10:100 or 1:10. You can enter 1 for Aliquot Volume and 10 for Diluted to Volume.
Dilute Sam ples Using the ESI w ith prepFAST System

If you have an ESI with prepFAST installed and configured you can create a new Sample
Information file that includes the Auto Dilution Factor parameter, which can be used to
dilute samples.
To add the Auto Dil. Factor column to a Sample Information File:
1. Open the Sample Information Editor.
2. In the Sample Information group, click on Parameter List.
- or -
Information Editor. In the pop-up that appears, select Parameter List.
3. In the Available list, click Auto Dil. Factor#. (To deselect the parameter, click
again.)
4. Click on the arrow button that points to the Variable list.
The Auto Dil. Factor# is moved to the Variable list.
5. Click OK to close the Sample Information Parameters dialog.
The Auto Dil. Factor# parameter now appears in the Parameters That Vary By
Sample list on the Sample Information Editor.
To use the prepFAST dilution feature to dilute samples:

1. Open the Sample Information File (*.sifx) to be used for your analysis.
2. Verify that the Auto Dil. Factor parameter is available. If the column is not
available, refer to the procedure titled Dilute Samples Using the ESI with prepFAST
System.
3. For each of the samples enter the desired Dilution Factor in the Auto Dil. Factor
column. A dilution factor of n will lower the measured intensity by a factor of n.
Sam ple Inform ation P aram eters and Dialogs

Sam ple I nform ation Param eters
The parameters in the Sample Information Editor fall into three different categories:
• Sample Description parameters: These parameters include the sample and batch
names used to identify the sample, the autosampler ___location, and other optional
information for describing the sample.
• Sample Preparation parameters: These parameters include information about
the way in which the sample was prepared and the units in which the final sample
concentrations will be reported.
• Analysis Schedule parameters: These parameters are used to schedule QC's,
periodic recalibration, and matrix check samples. You can also select a Read Delay or
Wash Time for a sample that differs from the method.
Sam ple I nform ation Dialogs:

• Aliquot Volume Column Fill Dialog
• Analyze QC's Before Column Fill Dialog
• Autosampler Location Column Fill Dialog
• Diluted to Volume Column Fill Dialog
• Initial Sample Volume Column Fill Dialog
• Initial Sample Weight Column Fill Dialog
• Matrix Check Sample Entry
• Remarks Entry Dialog
• Sample ID Column Fill Dialog
• Sample Information Editor Column Fill Dialogs
• Sample Information Parameters Dialog
• Sample Units Column Fill Dialog
• Solids Ratio Column Fill Dialog
• Units Column Fill Dialogs
• User Defined Entry Field Dialog
• Sample Limits Column Fill Dialog
• Auto Dilution Factor Column Fill Dialog
Sam ple I nform ation Param eters Dialog

You use this dialog to select the exact parameters that you need to describe your samples.

1. Display the Sample Information Editor.
2. In the Sample Information group on the Analysis tab, click on Parameter List.
- or -
Information Editor. In the pop-up that appears, select Parameter List...
1. In the Available list, click on a parameter to select it. (To deselect the parameter,
click again.) The parameters are shown in alphabetical order.
2. Click on the arrow button that points to the list where you wish to move the selected
parameter. Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) override settings in the method.
• If the entry for the parameter is common to all samples, move the parameter to
the Common list.
while the sample IDs would vary for each sample.
The parameter is removed from the Available list and appears in the list you chose.
Variable list, then click on an arrow pointing back to the Available list.
The parameter is returned to the Available list.
In the Sample Information Editor, use the scroll bars to see the changes you made.
Parameters that you added to the Common list appear in the Common Parameters table,
and those added to the Variable list appear in the Parameters that Vary by Sample table.
To specify the maximum number of samples:

 Use the up or down arrows to specify the number of samples you have and then
click on OK. In the Sample Information Editor, the Parameters that Vary by Sample
table will contain this number of rows, one for each sample.
Sam ple Description Param eters

B atch ID
This is the name you give to this batch of samples.
• Type up to 25 characters for each sample. You can use any combination of letters
and numbers.
- or -
• To automatically enter a sequence of IDs, double-click on an entry field and use the
Column Fill dialog.
Sam ple ID
This is the name you give to each sample.
and numbers.
- or -
• To automatically enter a sequence of IDs, double-click on an entry field and use the
Sample ID Column Fill dialog.
Rem ark s
Click on the entry field. The Remarks Entry dialog appears, in which you can type up to 50
characters.
Autosam pler Location

This is the ___location of the solution in the autosampler tray.
• Type the ___location for each solution.
- or -
• To automatically enter the locations for a sequence of samples, double-click on an
entry field and use the Autosampler Location Column Fill dialog.
Analyst Nam e
This is the name of the person setting up or performing the analysis.
and numbers.
- or -
• To automatically enter a sequence of names, double-click on an entry field and use
the Column Fill dialog. Note: If the name is the same for all samples, assign this
parameter to the Parameters Common to All Samples table.
User Defined...
Use this parameter to define your own parameter. For example, you may want to record an
account name for the batch of samples. You can customize up to five sample information
parameters. Select User Defined... in the list of parameters, then type a name for the
parameter using up to 20 characters in the User Defined Entry field dialog.
Sam ple Preparation Param eters

Use the following guidelines when entering information about sample preparation in the
Sample Preparation Parameters
If your And your Initial Sample Weight Initial Sample Vol. Aliquot Volume and
Calibration Sample and Sample Prep Vol. and Sample Prep Vol. Diluted to Volume.
Units are... Units are...
Optional
Wt/Vol Wt/Wt Required *
(but must enter both)
Optional
Wt/Vol Wt/Vol Enter both or omit both*
Optional
Wt/Wt Wt/Wt Not used in conversion Not used in conversion
The software will not convert Wt/Wt calibration units to Wt/Vol sample units. The
Wt/Wt Wt/Vol software will only report the sample concentration in calibration units, not sample
units.
N otes:
* Without the required entries, the software will only report the sample concentration in
calibration units, not sample units. If both entries are required and you only enter one, again,
the concentration in sample units will not be reported.
If you enter the Aliquot Volume, you must also enter the Diluted to Volume for correct
reporting of results.
You select calibration units and sample units in the Method Editor on the Calibration Units and
Concentrations page. Or, you can select sample units in the Sample Information Editor. If the
sample units in the Sample Information Editor differ from those in the Method Editor, the
sample units in the Sample Information Editor will be used.
Sample Preparation Parameters: The Sample Preparation parameters are shown below.
For an example using Initial Sample Weight, Sample Prep Volume, Aliquot Volume, and
Diluted to Volume see, Sample Preparation: An Example.
Aliquot Volume: If an aliquot of the sample solution is taken and diluted to a final volume,
record the aliquot volume for this entry and the final volume for the Diluted to Volume entry.
Enter the volume using the units selected for the Volume Units. To automatically enter the
same value for a sequence of samples, double-click on an entry field and use the Aliquot
Volume Column Fill dialog.
Diluted to Volume: This is the final volume of solution obtained by diluting an aliquot of
the sample solution.
You can also record the dilution as the ratio of the original sample volume to the final sample
volume. For example, if 10 mL of sample is diluted to 200 mL, this ratio would be 10:200 or
1:20. Enter 20 for the Diluted to Volume entry and 1 for the Aliquot volume. Enter the
volume using the units selected for the Volume Units. To automatically enter the same value
for a sequence of samples, double-click on an entry field and use the Diluted to Volume
Column Fill dialog.
Solids Ratio: This is the ratio of the wet and dry weights for the sample. This ratio is used
to correct the sample concentration. For more information, see the Solids Ratio Column Fill
dialog.
Initial Sample Weight: If you weigh the sample during sample preparation, you must
enter the Initial Sample Weight and the Sample Prep Volume.
Enter the weight using the units selected for the Weight Units. To automatically enter the
same value for a sequence of samples, double-click on an entry field and use the Initial
Sample Weight Column Fill dialog.
Initial Sample Volume: If you measure the sample volumetrically during sample
preparation, you can enter the Initial Sample Volume and the Sample Prep Volume.
Enter the volume using the units selected for the Volume Units. To automatically enter the
same value for a sequence of samples, double-click on an entry field and use the Initial
Sample Volume Column Fill dialog.
Weight Units: Select the units for the weight value(s) you enter for each individual sample
or for all samples. These weight units are used for the Initial Sample Weight and the Nominal
Sample Weight entries. To automatically enter the same value for a sequence of samples,
double-click on the column header and use the Units Column Fill dialog.
Volume Units: Select the units for the volumes you enter for each individual sample or for
all samples. These weight units are used for the Initial Sample Volume, the Sample Prep
Volume, the Aliquot Volume, and the Diluted to Volume entries. To automatically enter the
same value for a sequence of samples, double-click on the column header and use the Units
Column Fill dialog.
Sample Prep Volume: After a solid sample has been dissolved or a liquid sample has been
acidified (or otherwise treated), the resulting solution is prepared to a specific volume. This is
the Sample Prep Volume. Enter the volume using the units selected for the Volume Units. To
automatically enter the same value for a sequence of samples, double-click on an entry field
and use the Column Fill dialog.
Nominal Sample Weight: This is the target weight when samples are weighed. This entry
is required only if corrections are being made to weight/volume measurements to
compensate for weight variations among samples. The Nominal Sample Weight is divided by
the Initial Sample Weight to correct the final concentration value. Enter the weight using the
units selected for the Weight Units. To automatically enter the same value for a sequence of
samples, double-click on an entry field and use the Column Fill dialog.
Sample Units: These are the units used to report the concentrations of the samples. If the
sample units in the Sample Information Editor differ from those in the Method Editor, the
sample units in the Sample Information Editor will be used. You can select different sample
units for different samples in the Sample Information Editor, but concentrations for all
elements will be reported using the same units. To automatically enter the same value for a
sequence of samples, double-click on the column header and use the Sample Units Column
Fill dialog.
Sample Limits: This parameter can be used to enable sample limit checks as defined in the
method. When this parameter is unchecked sample limit checks will not be performed on the
specific sample/s, although the active Method has Sample Limits enabled.
To select your own units:
The units available in the drop-down lists are stored in an ASCII file called UNITS.INIX
located in C:\Users\Public\PerkinElmer Syngistix\ICP\SystemFiles\Configuration. You can use
any text editor to add units to the file. You may also rearrange the units in the file so that
those used frequently are near the top of the list.
To modify the UNITS.INIx file:

1. Start the Windows Explorer.
2. Go to C:\Users\Public\PerkinElmer Syngistix\ICP\SystemFiles\Configuration.
3. Double-click on the units.inix file.
Use the Notepad application open the UNITS.INIX file.
4. The UNITS.INIX file contains four sections: volume units [Vol], weight units [Wt],
weight/volume units [Wt/Vol] and weight\weight [Wt/Wt] units. The first unit in each
section is the base unit and has a conversion factor of 1.0. Do not change or
move the base unit.
5. Add the units and the conversion factor to the appropriate section of the file using
the following format.
Units12=new_units,conversion factor
The conversion factor is multiplied by the value in new units to convert it to a value
in base units. For example, to convert milliliters to the base unit of liters, 1 mL =
1.0E-3 L, so the conversion factor is 1.0E-3.
6. In the File menu, click on Save.
7. Restart the Syngistix software.
Analysis Schedule Param eters

Recalibration B efore
Select a recalibration, reslope, or autozero before the solution identified in this row is
analyzed. Select None or leave the entry field blank if you do not want any of these options
performed before this solution. To automatically enter the same information for a sequence
of samples, double-click on an entry field and use the Recalibrate Before Column Fill dialog.
M atrix Check Sam ples

Use this parameter when analyzing a pair of matrix check samples. The first sample in the
pair is the reference sample and the second sample is the matrix check sample. The first
sample must be scheduled for analysis before the second sample. Double-click on the entry
field for the second sample in the pair of matrix check samples. The Matrix Check Sample
Entry dialog appears, in which you select options for the matrix check calculation and identify
the two samples in the matrix check pair.
Analyze QCs B efore

Use this parameter to analyze quality control samples before the selected samples. Type the
numbers of the QC samples in the entry field. These numbers are found in the QC section of
the method. Type individual QC numbers or a range of QC numbers. Use commas to
separate the numbers and ranges. Example: 1, 3-5.
To analyze QC samples at a specified frequency, double-click on the entry field. The Analyze
QCs Before Column Fill dialog appears.
Note: Periodic QC Scheduling in the sample information file will override Periodic QC Scheduling in
the Method Editor.
Read Delay
Use this parameter to use a Read Delay that differs from the read delay that is entered in the
method. Enter the Read Delay in seconds. To automatically enter the same value for a
sequence of samples, double-click on the column header and use the Column Fill dialog.
W ash Tim e
Use this parameter to use a Wash Time that differs from the Wash Time that is entered in
the method. Enter the Wash Time in seconds. To automatically enter the same value for a
sequence of samples, double-click on the column header and use the Column Fill dialog. Note
that the Wash Frequency is selected in the method. You must select Between Samples for
the Wash Frequency in order for a wash to occur.
Sam ple I nform ation Editor Dialogs

Sam ple Inform ation Param eters Dialog
You use this dialog to select the exact parameters that you need to describe your samples.
You also modify the maximum number of samples displayed in the Sample Information Editor.

1. Display the Sample Information Editor.
2. In the Sample Information group on the Analysis tab, click on Parameter List.
- or -
Information Editor. In the pop-up that appears, select Parameter List...
1. In the Available list, click on a parameter to select it. (To deselect the parameter,
click again.) The parameters are shown in alphabetical order.
2. Click on the arrow button that points to the list where you wish to move the selected
parameter. Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) override settings in the method.
• If the entry for the parameter is common to all samples, move the parameter to the
Common list.
while the sample IDs would vary for each sample.
The parameter is removed from the Available list and appears in the list you chose.
Variable list, then click on an arrow pointing back to the Available list.
The parameter is returned to the Available list.
In the Sample Information Editor, use the scroll bars to see the changes you made. Parameters
that you added to the Common list appear in the Common Parameters table, and those
added to the Variable list appear in the Parameters that Vary by Sample table.
To specify the maximum number of samples:
 Use the up or down arrows to specify the number of samples you have and then
click on OK. In the Sample Information Editor, the Parameters that Vary by Sample
table will contain this number of rows, one for each sample.
User Defined Entry Field Dialog

You use this dialog to enter a name for a parameter you want to add to the Sample
Information Editor. You can select a common user defined entry field for all samples or you
can vary the information in this entry field by sample. For more information, see Customizing
the Sample Information Editor.
 This dialog automatically appears when you select a User Defined Entry field in the
Sample Information Parameters dialog.
To define the entry field:
 Type a name for the entry field using up to 20 characters, then click on OK. The
entry field is added to the Sample Information Editor.
Colum n Fill Dialogs

Sam ple I nform ation Editor Colum n Fill Dialogs
To automatically enter information for a range of consecutive samples, the Sample
Information Editor contains Column Fill dialogs.
To display a Column Fill dialog:
 Double-click on either an entry field in the column or the column header.
To automatically enter information for a range of samples:
1. Type the information in the entry field in the dialog. Enter values or text, as
appropriate for the entry field. For a definition of the sample parameter, see Sample
Information Parameters and Dialogs.
2. Select the sample number range for your group of samples:
 In the Start box, select the sample number for the first sample in the group.
 In the End box, select the sample number for the last sample in the group.
3. Click on OK. The software enters the values in the Sample Information Editor.
To display a Column Fill dialog and pre-select a range of samples:
If desired, you can pre-select the range of samples in the Sample Information Editor by
selecting a range of entry fields in the column. When the dialog is displayed, this range will
automatically be entered.
 Click on the first row in the range of samples and drag the mouse cursor over the
entry fields that you want to fill in the column. The rows are highlighted. Right click
then click on Column Fill...
Autosam pler Location Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to enter autosampler locations for a range of consecutive samples in the

To automatically enter autosampler locations for a range of samples:

1. Select the first autosampler ___location for this range of samples in the Starting
Location box.
2. Select the increment for the autosampler locations. For example, if you want to fill
each autosampler ___location, select 1. If you want to fill every other ___location, select 2.
4. Click on OK. The software enters the IDs in the Sample Information Editor.
To display this dialog and pre-select a range of samples:
Sam ple I D Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to enter Sample IDs for a range of consecutive samples in the Sample
Information Editor. The sample IDs have a common prefix, followed by a variable number,
followed by a common suffix. For example: water1march14 and water2march14.

To automatically enter sample IDs for a range of samples:
1. Type the sample ID prefix. This is a combination of numbers or letters that will
precede the sample ID number. The total number of characters allowed for the
prefix, number, and suffix is 25.
2. Type the sample ID number. This number will be incremented by the value you
select in the Increment by box.
3. Type the sample ID suffix. This is a combination of numbers or letters that will follow
the sample ID number.
4. Select a value for the increment. The Sample ID number is incremented by this
value.

Sam ple Units Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to enter the same sample units for a range of consecutive samples in the
Sample Information Editor. The sample units that you enter in the Sample Information Editor
will be used in place of the units selected in the method.

To automatically enter sample units for a range of samples:
1. Select the units in the list.
3. Click on OK. The software enters the units in the Sample Information Editor.
Units Colum n Fill Dialogs

You use these dialogs to enter the same Weight Units or Volume Units for a range of
consecutive samples in the Sample Information Editor.
To display these dialogs:

 Double-click on the column header for Weight Units or Volume Units.
To automatically enter units for a range of samples:
1. Select the units in the list.
3. Click on OK. The software enters the units in the Sample Information Editor.
To display these dialog and pre-select a range of samples:
I nitial Sam ple W eight Colum n Fill Dialog

If the final sample concentrations are being reported in weight/weight units, you must enter
the sample weights in the Sample Information Editor. You use this dialog to enter the same
Sample Weights for a range of consecutive samples.
To automatically enter initial sample weights for a range of samples:
1. Type a value for the initial sample weight.

To display this dialog and pre-select a range of samples
then, click on Column Fill...
Diluted To Volum e Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to enter the same final sample volume for a range of consecutive samples
in the Sample Information Editor.

 Double-click on either an entry field in the column or the Diluted to Volume
column header.
To automatically enter final sample volumes for a range of samples
1. Type a value for the final sample volume.
Aliquot Volum e Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to enter the same aliquot volume for a range of consecutive samples in
the Sample Information Editor.
To automatically enter aliquot volumes for a range of samples:
1. Type a value for the aliquot volume.
Recalibrate Before Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to enter the same recalibration information for a range of consecutive
samples in the Sample Information Editor.

 In the Sample Information Editor, double-click on either an entry field in the
Recalibrate Before column or the column header.
When you include the Recalibrate Before parameter in the SIF, a new Reagent Blanks
choice is added to the Calibration type drop-down list.
• If the Reagent Blanks option is selected for a sample, all reagent blanks required
by this sample are run immediately prior to the sample run (forced rerun of relevant
reagent blanks).
• Default operation is used in the following scenarios:
o The Reagent Blanks option is not selected.
o The Recalibrate Before parameter is not included at all.
• If a required Recalibrate Before has already been run since the last calibration, it
shall not be rerun (no forced rerun).
• If there is a reagent blank defined in the SIF but not in the method, this will trigger
an error dialog telling you this during Check Analysis.
To automatically enter recalibration information for a range of samples:
1. Select a recalibration, reslope, or autozero before the solution identified in this row is
analyzed. Select None or leave the entry field blank if you do not want any of these
options performed.
2. Select the frequency in which you want to recalibrate, then select the sample numbers
for a range of samples. For example, to recalibrate before every five samples in a range
numbered 10 through 20, select Schedule after every 5 samples, then select 10 for
the Start number and 20 for the End number. In this example, the software would
automatically recalibrate before Sample Numbers 15 and 20.
Additional considerations:
• When “Insert Sample” is used to add a priority sample during an analysis, the new
SIF fields are available as defined in the SIF.
You should set the appropriate fields at that time.
• A new check is added to “Check Analysis” such that all reagent blanks specified for
subtraction for any sample in the SIF are defined in the method.
• Reagent blanks specified during “Insert Sample” are already defined in the method
as part of the “Check Analysis” done when a sample is inserted.
New reagent blanks cannot be added.
Reagent Blanks Usage Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to enter the reagent blanks to be subtracted from the sample in the
Sample Information Editor. All defined reagent blanks are analyzed as per “just in time”
scheduling, that is, it is analyzed immediately before the first sample which uses it. In effect,
the reagent blank usage now defines the scheduling.
If this parameter (column) is NOT added to the SIF, the current operation is used. That is,
all reagent blanks are analyzed at the end of each calibration and every sample
concentration is adjusted by the average concentration of all defined reagent blanks.
The Reagent Blank Usage parameter defines reagent blank usage options for each sample
with options as follows:
• Average All. Subtract average of all reagent blanks defined in the method (default
operation).
• None. No reagent blank subtraction for this sample.
• Custom. Subtract the specified reagent blank (number 1-5), corresponding to
reagent blank numbers in the method. Enter a list of one or more reagent blank
numbers (1-5) separated by commas. Each specified reagent blank number must be
defined in the method used for analysis.
You set your options used for a range of samples in the Reagent Blanks Used Column
Fill dialog, which (as with other SIF parameters) is available in the following ways: Double-
clicking the field, where the dialog shall be used to make the selection for an individual
sample, or double-clicking the column header (the “column fill” dialog).

• Double-click on either an entry field in the column or the column header.
To automatically reagent blanks used for a range of samples:
1. Defines the reagent blank usage for each sample with options as follows:
• Average All. Subtract average of all reagent blanks defined in the method
(default operation).
• None. No reagent blank subtraction for this sample.
• Custom. Subtract the specified reagent blank (number 1-5), corresponding
to reagent blank numbers in the method. Enter a list of one or more reagent
blank numbers (1-5) separated by commas. Each specified reagent blank
number must be defined in the method used for analysis.
2. Select the increment for the locations. For example, if you want to fill each ___location,
select 1. If you want to fill every other ___location, select 2.
• In the Start box, select the sample number for the first sample in the group.
• In the End box, select the sample number for the last sample in the group.
• Click on the first row in the range of samples and drag the mouse cursor over the
Analyze QCs Before Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to schedule quality control samples.
 In the Sample Information Editor, double-click on either an entry field in the
Analyze QCs Before column or the column header.
To schedule the QC samples:
1. Type the numbers of the QC samples in the entry field. These numbers are found in
the QC section of the method. Type individual QC numbers or a range of QC
numbers. Use commas to separate the numbers and ranges.
Example: 1, 3-5.
2. Select the frequency in which you want to analyze the QC samples, then select the
sample numbers for a range of samples. For example, to analyze the QCs before
every five samples in a range numbered 10 through 20, select Schedule after
every 5 samples, then select 10 for the Start number and 20 for the End number.
In this example, the software would automatically enter the QC sample numbers to
be analyzed before Sample Numbers 15 and 20.
Solids Ratio Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to enter the ratio of the wet and dry weights for the sample.

 In the Sample Information Editor, double-click on an entry field in the Solids
Ratio column.
To enter the solids ratio:
1. You may enter this ratio in one of two ways, depending on how you want to report
the results.
If you are analyzing a dry sample and want the result converted to a wet basis,
enter the ratio of dry weight divided by wet weight.
- or -
If you are analyzing a wet sample and want the result converted to a dry basis,
enter the ratio of wet weight divided by dry weight.
In either case, the concentration in calibration units is multiplied by the solids ratio
as part of the conversion from concentration in calibration units to concentration in
sample units.
In the Start box, select the sample number for the first sample in the group.
In the End box, select the sample number for the last sample in the group.
To convert a measured concentration in calibration units to a final concentration in sample
units:
Auto Dilution Factor Colum n Fill Dialog

You use this dialog to enter a dilution factor for a range of consecutive samples in the

To automatically enter autosampler locations for a range of samples:
1. Enter the desired Dilution Factor in the Value box.

3. Click on OK. The software enters the dilution factor in the Sample Information
Editor.
Rem ark s Entry Dialog

You use this dialog to enter comments about a sample or batch of samples.
 In the Sample Information Editor, click on the Remarks entry field.
To enter remarks:
 Type up to 50 characters of text, then click on OK.
M atrix Check Sam ple Entry Dialog

 In the Sample Information Editor, double-click on an entry field in the Matrix Check
Sample column. You should select the entry field for the second sample in the pair
of matrix check samples.
-or-
 In the Sample Information Editor, click on an entry field in the Matrix Check
Sample column, then click using the right mouse button and in the pop-up menu
that appears, click on Entry Dialog....
To select options for the matrix check calculation:

 Select an option:
Duplicate
A matrix check duplicate measurement is performed. The software calculates the relative
percent difference using the equation:
where:
conc #1 = the result obtained for the concentration of the reference sample
conc #2 = the result obtained for the concentration of the duplicate sample
Recovery Set Num ber

A spike recovery measurement is performed. Select the number of the recovery set on the
Checks page of the Method Editor. The recovery set number indicates the analyte
concentrations added to the reference sample to create the recovery sample. The software
calculates the spike recovery for each analyte using the equation:
where:
conc #2 = the result obtained for the concentration of the recovery sample
Diluted x fold
A matrix check dilution measurement is performed. Enter the dilution factor. This is the ratio
of the original sample volume to the final sample volume. For example, if 1 mL of sample is
diluted to 10 mL, type 10. The software calculates the percent difference using the equation:
where:
conc #2 = the result obtained for the concentration of the diluted sample DF = dilution
factor
1. Select the sample number of the Reference Sample. This is the first sample in the
pair of matrix check samples. This sample must be scheduled for analysis before the
second sample in the pair.
2. Check the sample number for the Current Sample. Change the number, if necessary,
so that it is the matrix check sample, which is the second sample in the pair.
Analysis Control W indow
Analysis Control W indow s

You can operate the instrument in either a manual mode (with or without an autosampler),
or in an automated mode (with an autosampler only). When you operate in manual mode,
you define the order and control the analysis. When you operate in automated mode, the
application can run Blanks, Standards and Samples in a pre-defined order. You can also
reprocess data stored in the Results library using different analytical conditions such as
wavelength, peak processing algorithm, background correction, standard concentrations,
units of concentration or QC concentrations.
 Select the appropriate analysis control window depending on the task you wish to
perform.
To do this Use
Analyze a few samples manually. Manual Analysis Control tab
Analyze many samples using an autosampler. Automated Analysis Control tab
Recalculate stored data using different Data Reprocessing window
analytical conditions.
Analysis Control Window . 183
M anual Analysis Tab

You use this window to set up and perform an analysis manually.
 On the Analysis tab, then in the Analyze group, click Analysis. The window
appears displaying the Manual analysis tab parameters and the associated Manual
Analysis Run List.
Note: In the Transient technique, the R ead Delay (sec) and the Override M ethod functions
are not applicable.
W indow Controls and Entries

Analyze Blank
 Click on this button to analyze the calibration or reagent blank solution shown in the
entry field. When you do this, you are defining the calibration or reagent blank for
the analysis. To interrupt the blank analysis, click again on Analyze Blank.
 To change the blank shown in the entry field, select an option from the drop-down
list. Only the blanks that you have defined in the Calib: IDs and Locations page in
the active method appear here.
Analyze Standard
 Click on this button to analyze the calibration standard shown in the entry field. The
results of this analysis are used to set up a calibration. To interrupt the standard
analysis, click again on Analyze Standard.
 To change the standard shown in the entry field, select an option from the drop-
down list. The list shows all of the standards, including reslope, that you defined in
the active method. A calibration curve is created after all blanks and standards
defined in the method are run. To view a calibration curve, click on the Calib button,
or from the Options menu, click on Calibration Display.
 To check the concentration values that were entered for the standard in the method,
click the Conc...button. In the View Standard Concentrations dialog that appears, the
concentrations and units of each standard are shown. To change the concentration of a
standard, use the Method Editor-Calibration-Calib Units and Concentration.
Analyze Sam ple

 Click on this button to analyze the sample indicated by the No: (Number) entry field.
To interrupt the analysis, click again on Analyze Sample.
Sample No.
This shows the sample number of the current sample in the sample information file.
o Enter a different sample number, if needed. The Sample ID entry field shows
the ID of the sample you selected.
Sample ID
This identifies the sample that you are currently analyzing. If you are using a Sample
Information file, the ID shown in the file appears here. Enter a different ID, if
needed.
 To add or change dilution or other data for the sample, click the Details... button.
In the Sample Details dialog that appears, change the appropriate entries by
replacing the existing text or selecting an item from a drop-down list. For example,
type a new Batch ID, then make a selection in the list of Volume Units.
Analyze QC
 Click on this button to analyze the Quality Control sample in the entry field. To
interrupt the standard analysis, click again on Analyze QC.
 To change the standard shown in the entry field, select an option from the drop-
down list. The list shows the QC samples currently defined in method.
Note: When QC Samples are run from the Manual Analysis window the following information is
used from the active method: QC Sample ID, Count as Sample, Subtract Reagent Blank, the
content from the Concentrations and Limits tab page. Information defined on the Schedule
QCs tab and both Action tab pages of the Method Editor are ignored for QCs run in Manual
Mode.
Go to A/ S Loc.
 Click on this button to move the autosampler probe to the selected autosampler
___location shown in the entry field. The Status Panel reflects this change.
Go to W ash
 Click on this button to move the autosampler probe to the wash ___location. The
Autosampler Monitor reflects the change.
Override M ethod
When using the Read Delay process, this check box controls whether the instrument will use
the values in the active method or the changes you make in this window. If it is left blank,
the values in the active method are used. If the Override Method box is checked, the values
entered in this page are used. The values entered in the method are not changed.
Note: Override Method is not applicable in the Transient technique. Use Sample Info.
Read Delay (sec)

This is the time, in seconds, that the system waits after it receives an analyze command
before it starts to measure the signal. This delay allows the sample to reach the plasma
before measurement begins. If the method contains a flush time that is greater than zero,
the system will perform a sample flush before beginning the read delay. By default, the read
delay from the method will be used.
 To use a read delay that is different than that shown in the method, select the
Override Method box and enter a new read delay value.
Note: R ead Delay is not applicable in the Transient technique.
Sam ple Inform ation File

This field shows the Sample Information File that describes the sample sequence.
 To select a Sample Information File, click on the folder icon in the field box. In the
Open Sample Information dialog that appears, select an existing sample
information file. If you wish to create a new file, use the Sample Information Editor.
Note: The sample information file should contain entries for samples only. All other solutions, such
as blanks and standards, are defined in the Method Editor.
Save Data to Results Data Set

This shows the name of the results data set where the analysis results will be stored. Saving
data is optional.
 To save data, select a results data set name where the data will be stored by clicking
on the folder icon in the field box and in the Select Results Data Set dialog that
appears, type a new data set name or select an existing one. A check mark appears
in the Save Data box next to During Analysis, confirming that data will be saved.
 If you do not want to save data, disable Save Data, or do not specify a results data
set name.
Note: To be able to reprocess data, it must be saved.
Note: For information on the amount of disk storage space that is required for your results, see
Equation for Calculating Disk Storage for Results.
Print Log During Analyses

Select the Print Log box to print a log of signals, analytical results, and other information
about the analysis. The log includes an analytical header and, for each sample, a sample
header and the data that is shown in the Results Display window. Look at all of the selections
on the Method Editor Window Options page to get an overview of the selected analytical
results that will appear in the printout.
Run List
The Run List on the right half of the window displays the corresponding sample information
and order in which they will be run.
Clear List: To clear the display click on this button.
Print List: To print the sequence, ___location, sample type, ID, and status information
shown, click on this button. The printed report also shows the current date and time as
well as the method name.
Insert Sample: To insert a new sample into the sequence (only during an analysis),
click on this button and in the Insert Sample dialog that appears, enter new sample
information.
Load Tray: Click on this button to raise the autosampler probe and move it to the back
so that the sample tray can be removed or installed. Click on Load Tray again to restore
the probe to its operating position.
Progress Bar (in the Status Panel)

The status of the analysis is shown in the Status Panel. The Progress Bar shows how much
(the approximate percentage) of the analysis has been completed for the current sample.
The current operation being performed is shown below the Progress Bar.
Autom ated Analysis Tab

When you want to perform an automated analysis, (the application runs blanks, standards
and samples in a pre-defined order) use this window to control the system and autosampler.
Usually, you enter information in the method for analyzing blanks, calibration standards, and
QC samples. If, however, you wish to analyze any of the blanks, calibration standards, or QC
samples as samples, you must enter their IDs in the sample information file. As a result, they
will be treated like samples in addition to the usage specified in the method.
1. On the Analysis tab, then in the Analyze group, click Analysis.
The window appears displaying the Automated tab parameters on the left side and
the associated automated Run List on the right side.
You use this screen to select Methods and a Sample Information File. You also can select a
results data set to store the data, print an analysis log, and select other actions to occur
during an analysis.
Note: You can change setup options even after an analysis has begun by returning to this window.
W indow Controls and Entries

Analyze All
 Click on this button to analyze all of the samples in the Run List on the right side of
this window.
 To interrupt the analysis sequence, click again on Analyze All. The Stopping an
Analytical Sequence dialog appears, so that you can select when the analysis will stop.
Usually, Analyze All first calibrates the system, then analyzes the samples identified on the
this window. If, however, you stopped the automated analysis before all the samples were
analyzed (and did not click on Reset Sequence), you may resume the analysis at a particular
place in the analytical sequence by clicking again on Analyze All. The Continuing an
Analytical Sequence dialog appears so that you can select the point where the interrupted
analysis will restart.
Calibrate
 Click on this button to start the calibration sequence. The system uses the blank and
standards defined in the method.
 To interrupt the calibration sequence, click again on Calibrate. The Stopping an
Analytical Sequence dialog appears so that you can select when the blank and
standard analysis will stop. If you stopped the blank and standard analysis, (and you
did not click on Reset Sequence), you may resume at a particular place in the
calibration sequence by clicking again on Calibrate. The Continuing an Analytical
Sequence dialog appears so that you can select the point where the interrupted
analysis will restart.
When calibration is complete, you may want to examine the calibration curves in the
Calibration window before analyzing samples.
Analyze Sam ples

 Click on this button to start analyzing samples after the instrument has been
calibrated.
 Click on the button a second time to stop the analyses. The Stopping an Analytical
Sequence dialog appears, so that you can select when the sample analysis will stop.
The analysis usually starts at the beginning of the sequence that is shown on this window. If,
however, you stopped the automated analysis before all samples were analyzed, (and you did
not click on Reset Sequence), you may resume the analysis at a particular place in the
analytical sequence by clicking again on Analyze Samples. The Continuing an Analytical
Sequence dialog appears so that you can select the point where the interrupted analysis will
restart.
Note: If you schedule one or more After Initial Calib QC samples in the method, Analyze
Sam ples will analyze the QC as part of the sample list. This is useful if you wish to use an
existing calibration curve, analyze the After Initial Calib QC sample as a check (without
reanalyzing your calibration standards), then take action based on the pass or fail status of
the QC. For more information on QCs see the Method Editor: QC Pages.
Stopping an Analytical Sequence

When you stop an analysis, you use this dialog to give the system further instructions.
 When an analytical sequence is in progress, click on the button that you used to
begin the analysis: Analyze All, Calibrate, or Analyze Samples. These buttons are
located in the Automated Analysis Control window.
Using this dialog:

1. Select one of the options.
Stop immediately - The system stops the analysis immediately when you click on
OK.
Complete current replicate - The system finishes the measurement for the
current replicate and then stops the analysis.
Complete all replicates for current sample - The system finishes all the
replicate measurements on the current sample and then stops the analysis.
2. Click on OK.
Or, if you decide not to stop the analysis, click on Cancel.
Continuing an Analytical Sequence

When you stop an analysis and then decide to continue it, you use this dialog to give the
system instructions.
 After you stop an analysis, click on the button that you originally used to start the
analysis. Do not click on Reset Sequence unless you want to start a new analysis.
These buttons are in the Automated Analysis Control window.
Using this dialog:

1. Select one of the options.
2. Continue with next sequence # - The analysis will continue with the next
solution in the analytical sequence. The next sequence number is the one that
follows the last completed sequence number.
3. Reanalyze previous sequence # and continue - The analysis will continue with
the previous solution in the analytical sequence. The previous sequence number is
the one that was being analyzed when the analysis stopped.
4. Continue with sequence # n - The analysis will continue with a selected solution
in the analytical sequence. Type the autosampler ___location of the sequence in the
entry field.
5. Restart current Method - The analysis will restart the method that was being
performed when the analysis was interrupted. This performs the same action as
clicking on Reset and then on Analyze All, Analyze Samples or Calibrate.
Note: If you have multiple methods, only the current method is rerun.
6. Click on OK. The system continues the analysis, based on the option selected.
Or, if you decide not to continue the analysis, click on Cancel.
Reset Sequence
This button resets the analytical sequence back to the beginning.
 Click on this button to reset the analytical sequence to 1. The next time you click on
Analyze All, Analyze Samples or Calibrate, the sequence will be rebuilt and the
system will start with the first item in the list.
M ethod Source
 Choose Use the Active Method for your Analysis which uses the active method
already in memory to analyze samples. (This is the normal choice when using a
single method to analyze samples.)
- or -
 Choose Specify methods for your analysis which opens methods in the list to
analyze samples. (Use this option when you want to analyze samples using several
methods in a sequence.)
Analytical Sequence Table

This sequence of method and sample information works with the Run List.
Method: You use this entry field to select the method(s) for the Automated analysis.
• Double-click on an entry field in the Method column. In the Open
Method dialog that appears, select a method.
Note: To select more than one method, you must first select the Method
source. This option is located below the Methods and Sample Locations table.
You can select up to 50 methods.
Delay (min): This is the time, in minutes, that the system waits before it starts the method.
(Maximum of 99 minutes)
Define By selecting samples from a sample information file, information you have
Samples: supplied about the samples (for example, sample weights or dilutions) is used
in the analysis. Use this column to specify the samples you want to use from a
sample information file.
First, open a sample information file. Then, select the check box for Use
Sample Info below the name of the sample information file. Then three
options appear in the Sample Info File column in a drop-down list. If you want
to analyze all of the samples in the sample information file, select All Defined
from the drop-down list. If you want to select only certain autosampler
locations, select Locations. If you want to select samples by the sample
numbers listed in the sample information file, select Sample Nos.
Locations: If you do not want to analyze all of the samples in the sample information file,
use this entry field to select only the autosampler locations of the samples that
you want to analyze. If you have selected All Defined or Sample Nos. in the
Sample Info File drop-down list, you cannot enter locations here. If you have
not selected the check box for Use Sample Information below the name of the
sample information file, the locations do not apply to a sample information file.
• Type individual locations or a range of locations. Use commas to separate
the locations and ranges. It is not necessary to enter the locations of
blanks, QC's, check or calibration solutions. Enter locations for these if you
want them to be treated as a sample within the analysis. Example: 10-
15, 18, 20, 22, 25-30.
Sample Nos: If you do not want to analyze all the samples in the sample information file,
use this entry field to select only the sample numbers that you want to
analyze. If you have selected All Defined or Locations from the Sample Info
File drop-down list, you cannot enter sample numbers here.
Example: If you only want to analyze #s 1, 3, 4, and 5, but not #2, in the
Sample Info File column, select Sample Nos. This opens the Sample numbers
field so that the sample numbers can be entered.
Append Method: This button is only enabled during an analysis. Click on this button to
display the Append Method dialog from where you can add methods to the run list after an
analysis has started.
Use Sam ple I nfo

Select this check box to use the information specified in the Sample Information File (initial
weight, dilution, volume, etc.) during the analysis. The software uses the information to
calculate corrections for final results.
A Sample Information File stores information about the samples. The system uses this file to
label the data from your samples and often needs it to calculate final concentrations. The
sample information file also specifies the autosampler locations of the samples. This field
shows the Sample Information File that describes the sample sequence.
 To select a Sample Information File, click on the folder icon in the field box. In the
Open Sample Information dialog that appears, select an existing sample
information file. If you wish to create a new file, use the Sample Information Editor.
Note: If a sample information file is not entered, the "Untitled" sample information file that is
currently open in the editor is listed.
Save data to Results Data Set

This shows the name of the results data set where the analysis results will be stored.
 Clicking the check box confirms that Save data to Results Data Set is enabled
and you can select a Results Data Set. To select options for the type of data to be
saved and for the type of results to be displayed and printed, use the Options page
 To save data, select a results data set name where the data will be stored by clicking
on the folder icon in the field box and in the Select Results Data Set dialog that
appears, type a new data set name, or select an existing one.
 If you do not want to save data, do not specify a results data set name, or click on
the Save data to Results Data Set check box to clear the check mark, gray out
the field, and remove the folder icon.
Note: For information on the amount of disk storage space that is required for your results, see
Equation for Calculating Disk Storage for Results.
Print Log During Analyses

Select this check box to print a log of signals, analytical results, and other information about
the analysis. The log includes an analytical header and, for each sample, a sample header
and the data that is shown in the Results Display window as selected in the Options page of
the Method Editor. Look at the selections on the Method Editor Window Options page to get
an overview of the selected analytical results that will appear in the printout.
Autom atic Ex port

To automatically export data and write it into a file that can be read by many other
programs, including spreadsheet and database management programs. The export file
contains ASCII data records.
 On the Analysis tab, in the Analyze group, click on Automatic Export.
or
 On the Analysis window, in the Automated tab under Auto Export, click on the
settings button.
To automatically reformat data:
Note: You must first create the Export Design(s) in the Data Manager. An export design efines a
subset of data items that you want to export from a data set. For more information, refer to
Data Manager Help. When exporting data, you have the ability to select two of your designs
as Export Design 1 and Export Design 2. You may want to do this if you want different
information to be exported or you want the data to be exported to two separate file
locations. Remember, in each Export Design created you assign the directory path where you
want your results stored.
1. Click the check box for Export Design 1. The Open dialog appears.
2. Navigate to your desired Export Design (*.xptx) file.
3. If a file is displayed in the entry field, type the name of the design you created in the
Data Manager or click the open file browse button to the right of the entry field;
when the Open dialog appears select the name of the design (*.xptx) and click on OK.
4. If you want to export Particle Counter data, select Export Design 2.
5. Navigate to your desired Particle Export Design (*.pxpx) file.
6. If a file is displayed in the entry field, type the name of the design you created in the
Data Manager or click the open file browse button to the right of the entry field;
when the Open dialog appears select the name of the design (*.pxpx) and click on OK.
7. Click on OK.
A check mark appears in the Auto Export check box indicating that for each analysis
you perform, data will be exported automatically. To stop exporting data in this
manner, click on the check box to clear the check mark.
Scheduler
Click the Settings button to display the Automatic Shutdown/Startup dialog.
To schedule an automatic shutdown or Startup, click on Shutdown or Start-up. Select
options controlling time of and events to occur at shutdown and startup. This feature allows
you to shut down the plasma at the end of the analysis and start it up again at a later
specified time.
Auto W avelength R ealign

It may be important to correct for small changes in wavelength alignment that may occur
during an analysis. This is done using the autowavelength realign feature. Select this box to
have the system perform an auto wavelength realign. For more information, see Automatic
Wavelength Realignment.
Note: The Auto W avelength R ealign option is not applicable in the Transient technique.
If more than one method is listed, you can view which method is being used for the current
analysis. The methods are numbered, type in, or click the arrow, to choose the Method
number.
Run List
The Run List on the right half of the window displays the samples associated with the
method and order in which they will be run.
Rebuild List: To refresh the display (to show changes you have made to the method or
sample information file), click on this button.
Print List: To print the sequence, ___location, sample type, ID, and status information
shown, click on this button. The printed report also shows the current date and time as
well as the method name.
Insert Sample: To insert a new sample into the sequence (only during an analysis),
click on this button and in the Insert Sample dialog that appears, enter new sample
information.
Load Tray: Click on this button to raise the autosampler probe and move it to the back
so that the sample tray can be removed or installed. Click on Load Tray again to restore
the probe to its operating position.
Progress Bar (in the Status Panel)

The status of the analysis is shown in the Status Panel. The Progress Bar shows how much
(the approximate percentage) of the analysis has been completed for the current sample.
The current operation being performed is shown below the Progress Bar.
Enable/ Disable Analytes

You use this dialog to include or exclude analytes in the active method from an automated
analysis, manual analysis or data reprocessing. This dialog applies only to single methods run
from memory.
 In the Analysis tab, in the Analyze group, click on Enable/Disable Analytes.
 In the Continuous Graphics display, click on the Select Analytes button.
An example of an Enable/Disable Analytes window displays:
Using this dialog

1. Review the list of analytes and decide which to include or exclude. These analytes
are taken from the active method.
• To include an analyte in an analysis, click on the check box so that a check
appears.
• To exclude an analyte from an analysis sequence, click on the check box so
that the check is cleared.
Note: The Enabled parameter has a column fill dialog that can be accessed by double-clicking on
the column header.
2. Click on OK.
Note: Analytes will remain disabled until re-enabled using this dialog or until a new method is
loaded.
Autosam pler Loading List

Use this window to view and print the list of solutions you need to fill the autosampler tray.
The information shown is taken from the active method and the current sample information
file.
 Make the appropriate entries on the Set Up page of the Automated Analysis
Control window and then click on the Analyze tab.
 In the Analysis group click on Autosampler Load List.
An example of an Autosampler Loading List window displays:
Using this dialog:
1. Set up an automated or manual analysis by selecting a method and sample

information file.
2. In the Autosampler Loading List screen review the following information: the
name of the Method used, the Sample Information file used and the blanks,
calibration standards and samples in the order that they are to be placed in the
autosampler tray.
Note: In the list of autosampler Locations and Solutions, the method is not shown for samples
(unknowns).
3. Clicking on the Location column header sorts the list by ___location.

4. Clicking on the Method column header (while in multi-method mode) sorts the list
by method.
Note: If a change is made to the method, SIF, or Auto Analysis window which affects the contents
of the Loading List, the Loading List window is automatically updated.
5. To print the list, right-click and then click on Print Autosampler Loading List or
click on the button and select Print Active Window. In the print dialog that
appears, select your printer and click on OK.
Data Reprocessing W indow

You use this window to reprocess sample data that is stored in a results data set. There are
several reasons why you might want to reprocess data:
• You can "peak" or adjust the wavelength and change the analytical conditions of the
method. For example, the line for Co 228.616 is showing up at 228.652, but all the
concentrations are being calculated at 228.616. After "peaking" and updating the
method, the wavelengths are changed to 228.652. Reprocessing allows the stored
data to be recalled and the concentrations to be corrected according to the new and
proper wavelength.
• You chose peak height and wanted peak area.
• You chose 3 points per peak and want 5 or 7.
• You created a MSF model to correct for some overlapping peak and want to obtain
the true concentration of your analyte.
• You entered 0.1 for a concentration of a standard and it is actually 1.0.
• You chose mg/mL but you need the results to print out in ppb or oz/ton.
• You chose a linear calibration equation instead of nonlinear.
• You ran just the samples and forgot to recall the calibration from another data set.
Therefore, no concentrations are given and you need that information.
• You entered the wrong QC concentration or wrong QC limits the first time.
Note: Reprocess cannot be accessed unless the Analysis Control Windows are closed.
To display this window

 On the Results tab, in the Results group, click Reprocess.
Using this w indow

1. Click the Save reprocessed data check-box to activate the Save reprocessed
data to field with a browse icon.
2. Next to Data Set to Reprocess, click the browse icon and select a results data set
that contains the data you want to reprocess.
3. In the Data Reprocessing window, the results from the reprocessed data will be
saved to the data set shown in the entry field. This field defaults to the data set from
the most recent analysis.
To change to a different data set, click the browse icon and in the Select Results
Data Set dialog that appears, type a new data set name or select an existing one.
4. The Method should be open in the Method Editor so if you want to reprocess using
different method parameters, that information can be used. Confirm that the method
in use contains the correct settings for the results data set that is to be reprocessed.
5. In the Data Reprocessing dialog table, review the information. The IDs in the
selected results data set are listed along with the sample information that was used
when the data was originally collected. To edit this information, type the new
information into the fields as desired. To access a pop-up menu containing
commands for editing the table, right click anywhere in the table. To hide columns
that do not contain data, select the Hide Empty Columns check box.
Note: There is a column fill dialog available for each of the parameters in the table, except Sample
Type and Original Method. To access a column fill dialog, double-click on the parameter's
column header.
 To select items of interest for reprocessing, select the associated row numbers in the
table. To select a series of rows, click on the first row number of interest, hold down
the Shift key, and click on the last row number of interest. You can also drag over
the row numbers column using the mouse cursor. To select non-consecutive rows,
hold down the Ctrl key and click on each row number.
Tip: The order in which samples are selected is the order in which reprocessing occurs. As you
select each row, the reprocessing sequence appears in the Sequence column.
6. Click on Reprocess.
Data Reprocessing Display

This shows a status of the reprocessing operation.
Save Reprocessed Data: This box is selected automatically (a check mark appears),
indicating that the reprocessed data generated will be saved to the results data set shown in
the entry field. To select a different results data set, click the browse icon, and in the Select
Results Data Set dialog that appears, type a new data set name or select an existing one.
Note that the spectral data is not saved with the reprocessed results and does not change
with reprocessing.
Data Set to Reprocess: Select the results data set that contains the data you want to
reprocess. Click the browse icon and in the Results Data Set dialog that appears, select an
existing data set name. The sample parameters from the results data set you selected are
brought into the Data Reprocessing window. The column heads in bold indicate that this
information from the original analysis cannot be modified.
Save reprocessed data to: After selecting the data set to reprocess, this field becomes
active with a browse icon so you can select the where to save the reprocessed data.
Reprocess: Click on this button to begin reprocessing. Click again to interrupt reprocessing.
Print Log: Select this box to print a log of signals, analytical results, and other information
about the analysis. The log includes an analytical header and, for each sample, a sample
header and the data that is shown in the Results Display window as selected on the Options
page of the Method. Look at all of the selections on the Method Editor Window Options page
to get an overview of the selected analytical results that will appear in the printout.
Hide Empty Columns: Select this box to hide columns that do not contain data.
Only show samples with Universal Data: Select this box to filter the display so that only
samples that were collected with the Universal Data Acquisition parameter enabled in the
method are displayed.
Select all samples in current order: Checking this box selects all samples in the order
they are displayed when you open a data set.
Number of samples selected: Displays the number of samples selected for reprocess.
Note: For an example using Initial Sample Weight, Sample Prep Volume, Aliquot Volume, and
Diluted to Volume see, Sample Preparation: An Example.
Sequence: This is the sequence in which samples will be reprocessed. This sequence
appears as you select each row number.
Sample ID: This is the name you gave to each sample.
Sample Type: This is the solution type: blank, standard, sample, etc.
Omit Replicates: This is the entry for replicate numbers that you do not wish to reprocess
for a sample.
Matrix Check Samples: This shows any samples that are designated as matrix checks.
Date/Time: This shows the date and time that each sample was analyzed.
Initial Sample Wt: This is the quantity of sample weight before sample preparation.
Initial Sample Vol: This is the quantity of sample volume before sample preparation.
Sample Units: Use this column to change the sample units on a per sample basis before
reprocessing data. The concentration will be calculated based on the new units. (All of the
analytes in a sample must have the same sample units to use this parameter.)
Weight Units: This shows the units of the Initial Sample Quantity. These are either weight
or volume units.
Sample Prep. Volume: After a solid sample has been dissolved or a liquid sample has been
acidified (or otherwise treated), the resulting solution is prepared to a specific volume. This is
the Sample Prep Volume.
Aliquot Volume: If an aliquot of the sample solution is taken and diluted to a final volume,
record the aliquot volume for this entry and the final volume for the Diluted to Volume entry.
Diluted to Volume: This is the final volume of solution obtained by diluting an aliquot of
the sample solution. You can also record the dilution as the ratio of the original sample
volume to the final sample volume. For example, if 10 mL of sample is diluted to 200 mL, this
ratio would be 10:200 or 1:20. Enter 20 for the Diluted to Volume entry and 1 for the Aliquot
volume.
Volume Units: If the final sample concentrations are being reported in weight/weight units,
you must enter the units for the Sample Volume.
Solids Ratio: This is the ratio of the wet and dry weights for the sample. This ratio is used
to correct the sample concentration. For more information, see the Solids Ratio Column Fill
dialog.
Nominal Sample Weight: This is the target weight when samples are weighed. This entry
is required only if corrections are being made to weight/volume measurements to
compensate for weight variations among samples. The Nominal Sample Weight is divided by
the Initial Sample Weight to correct the final concentration value.
Batch ID: This is the name you give to this batch of samples.
Original Method: This shows the method you used in the analysis. This information cannot
be modified.
Remarks: The remarks you entered in the Sample Information file before the initial analysis.
Sample Limits: Check this box to enable sample limit checks as defined in the method. If
you uncheck this parameter, then sample limit checks will not be performed for the particular
sample.
Equation for Calculating Disk Storage for R esults

To roughly calculate the amount of hard disk storage space that is required for storing result
data sets, use the following equation:
Database size increase = (Analytes * Samples) * 550 + (Analytes * Samples *

Replicates) * Type-Factor
Database size is in bytes
Samples = actual samples + no. of standard analyses + no. of blank analyses + no. of QC
analyses (i.e. number of entries in analysis list)
Type-factor =
300 Not storing spectra
500 Storing spectra, normal resolution, no slit scanning
Storing spectra, normal resolution, 4-position slit scanning

1100
Storing spectra, high resolution, no slit scanning
Refer to the following table for some examples:

Analytes Samples Replicates Type- Approximate Size
Factor Increase (Bytes)
10 54 1 500 567,000
20 54 7 500 4,374,000
20 54 3 300 1,566,000
40 29 3 1100 4,466,000
Data View er
Data View er W indow

Use this window to view detailed information about your current sample and to track data
from multiple quantitative analyses as your sample batches are processed. Scrolling results
tables provide an Intensity view that displays the measured signal for each element
examined by the instrument-with or without related RSD's; a Concentration view; an
Unfactored Concentration view; a graphic representation of Internal Standards plotted over
time; and a QC (Quality Control) view.
The Data Viewer window is made up of multiple tabs, each of which present the running
analytic data from your samples in a different way:
• Corrected Intensities tab
• Conc. in Calib. Units tab
• Conc. in Sample Units tab
• Internal Standards tab
• QC tab
When you initially start a new software session, or after you click Clear Data, the Data Viewer
tabs are empty. They become populated as data is acquired, regardless of whether or not the
window is open in your workspace. As you run samples, the tabs are updated in real time. The
table-based tabs collect a scrolling list of sample results collected during quantitative analyses
to a maximum of 1000 samples, after which the first samples scroll off the top of the list as
new samples continue to be added at the bottom. Index numbering of the developing list goes
up to a maximum count of 9,999 before rolling over to begin at 1 again.
To help you keep track of where you are in the data, your position in the scrolling list on any
table is retained when you move between the Corrected Intensities, Conc. in Calib Units, and
Conc. in Sample Units tabs, so that you can compare multiple types of data for a single
sample without losing your place. In addition, the calibration curves are displayed in-line in
the table.
In the tables, sample data is displayed in alternating rows of white and gray to improve
readability. Additional color cues employed in the tables include the use of a red font to
indicate QC failures, and the standard KED mode green and DRC mode yellow used in the
column headers to indicate analytes using these modes. On the Conc. tab, a purple font is used
to denote internal standards, which are also identified with an (IS) in the relevant analyte
header. Note that all tables take their base colors from your system colors; if you change from
the default Windows system colors, you may change the table background colors.
Data Viewer . 203
Data View er Comm on Controls

The following controls are common to multiple tabs in the Data Viewer window:
Show RSDs: Enable this check box to display the related RSD (Relative Standard Deviation)
for each sample displayed in the Data Viewer tables. If you have chosen to display RSDs
onscreen and you click Export All..., the RSDs are exported to the worksheet corresponding
to the tab where they are displayed. And whether displayed or not, RSD information is
always exported to separate Intensity RSDs and Concentration RSDs sheets.
Show Replicates: Click this check box to display the related replicates for each sample
displayed in the Data Viewer tables. If you have chosen to display replicates onscreen and
you click Export All..., the replicates are exported to the worksheet corresponding to the tab
where they are displayed. And whether displayed or not, replicate information is always
exported to separate Intensity and Concentration sheets.
Advanced…: Click this button to open the Advanced Display Options dialog box, and
configure display preferences for the Corrected Intensities, Conc. in Calib Units, Conc. in
Sample Units, Internal Standards, and QC tabs.
Export All...: Click this button to export all current data from the Corrected Intensities,
Conc. in Calib Units, Conc. in Sample Units, Internal Standards, and QC tabs to Microsoft
Excel. RSDs are always exported to a separate sheet in the Excel workbook. Additional
information, including the relevant dataset name, method name, time and date of
acquisition, reprocessing indicators, and QC status is also made available in the exported file
to provide more clear and complete sample identification, even though it may not be present
in the on-screen report views in the software.
The default file format for the export function is .xlsx, but .xls is also generally available.
However, due to limitations in Microsoft Excel, if you are exporting more than 256 columns of
data, you can only export in .xlsx format.
You do not need to have Microsoft Excel installed on the same computer as your instrument
software in order to perform a data viewer export. If Excel is not installed, the export file will
still be saved with all applicable data, and with the Internal Standards graph drawn in .jpg
form (rather than the usual editable Excel graph object). You can then transfer the file to
another computer or open the file with an Excel-compatible reader.
If you have a version of Microsoft Excel earlier than 2007 installed on your computer, you will
be allowed to save to .xlsx format, but you will not be able to correctly open the resulting file
in that version of Excel (the file will appear to contain garbage information). In this case, you
can choose to instead save to .xls format, which will open in any version of Excel, or you can
open the resulting .xlsx file in an Excel-compatible viewer or on another computer running
Excel 2007.
Clear Data: Click this button to clear all current data from the Data Viewer tabs, except the
Current Sample report. Note that you may wish to export your data before clearing in order
to preserve it for future examination.
Corrected Intensities Tab

The Corrected Intensities tab displays the measured signal intensity for each element
measured by the instrument. The column headings consist of the analytes as named in the
related method along with the mass in amu. The relevant units are also displayed, again as
defined in the method, below the analyte name in parentheses. Analytes that are acting as
Internal Standards are identified with an (IS) in the relevant analyte header. The units used
for any standards are converted to the units used for the sample where any difference exists.
Select the Show RSDs check box to display the related Relative Standard Deviation values
for each sample. You can also display additional columns to show the sample acquisition date
and time, reprocessed data flags, display autosampler ___location, indicate samples outside of
limits, and QC function status indicators — click Advanced to configure these options.
Select the Show Replicates check box to display the related replicates values for each
sample. You can also display additional columns to show the sample acquisition date and
time, reprocessed data flags, display autosampler ___location, indicate samples outside of limits
and QC function status indicators — click Advanced to configure these options.
When the QC Status column is displayed, you can click on any Failed cell to go to the
corresponding detailed data section of the Data Viewer QC tab. Note that if a QC measure
specifies that there be a valid calibration in the current workspace, and none exists, the QC
Status column will appear blank, rather than showing Passed or Failed. The QC status will
also be blank if QC checking is not enabled in the given method; or when it is enabled, but
no QC limits have been specified.
Data Viewer . 205
Conc. in Calib. Units Tab

The Conc. in Calib. Units tab displays the adjusted sample concentration for each element
measured by the instrument. This tab consists of a tabular display with the sample name in
the first column and masses in subsequent columns with the concentration units directly
beneath. The column headings consist of the analytes as named in the related method along
with the mass in amu. The relevant units are also displayed, again as defined in the method,
below the analyte name in parentheses. Each row represents a single sample. Analytes that
are acting as Internal Standards are identified with an (IS) in the relevant analyte header,
and a purple font is used to highlight the internal standard values within the table (where a
valid blank with internal standards has been applied). For each internal standard, the IS
percent recovery value is displayed, together with the related intensity RSD (if RSDs are
displayed).
corresponding detailed data section of the Data Viewer QC tab.
Note: If a QC measure specifies that there be a valid calibration in the current workspace, and
none exists, the QC Status column will appear blank, rather than showing P assed or Failed.
The QC status will also be blank if QC checking is not enabled in the given method; or when
it is enabled, but no QC limits have been specified.
Conc. in Sam ple Units Tab

This tab is similar to the Concentrations view, but displays data measured without
concentration or dilution factors. It consists of a tabular display with the sample name in the
first column and masses in subsequent columns with the concentration units directly
beneath. The column headings consist of the analytes as named in the related method along
with the mass in amu. The relevant units are also displayed, again as defined in the method,
below the analyte name in parentheses. Each row represents a single sample. Analytes that
are acting as Internal Standards are identified with an (IS) in the relevant analyte header.
corresponding detailed data section of the Data Viewer QC tab. Note that if a QC measure
specifies that there be a valid calibration in the current workspace, and none exists, the QC
Status column will appear blank, rather than showing Passed or Failed . The QC status will
also be blank if QC checking is not enabled in the given method; or when it is enabled, but
no QC limits have been specified.
Data Viewer . 207
Internal Standards Tab

This tab shows a graph illustrating the percent recovery for each Internal Standard plotted
over time. The data displayed here is a subset of the data displayed on the Intensity tab —
only the internal standards are displayed in graphic format. The internal standard recovery is
defined as the current IS intensity/IS intensity of active calibration blank. When a new blank
is run, all subsequent IS intensities are then applied against that blank's IS intensities.
Up to ten distinct colors are plotted at any one time; additional internal standards are plotted
using those same colors again, so that a color may appear more than once in a single plot.
Note that the legend of the Internal Standards graph can display only the number of internal
standards that can fit into the screen; where the number of standards exceeds this, the
legend simply indicates More…. This is a static indication, and not a clickable link leading to
additional information. To see more standards in the legend, expand the screen.
Note: The internal standards calculations performed on this tab are completely independent of
those performed through the QC functions; activation of QC checking in the method is not
required for the plotting of internal standards data on this tab.
When a value is in shutdown, an S appears at the top of the graph, with the plot lines
extending up outside of the top boundaries of the graph on either side. See Reported
Shutdown for more information.
When you move your mouse over a point in the graph a screen tip appears displaying the
following additional information for that point: row index and sample ID numbers; analyte
name and mass; % recovery; intensity; and units used for the intensity.
Blanks and normalization factors
On the Report window Internal Standards tab, the internal standards plotted are normalized
against the most recent blank processed, for all samples, and across multiple methods, until
a new blank is introduced. Each blank effects a new normalization factor specifically and only
for those internal standards listed in that blank, cancelling all previous factors for all
subsequent internal standards.
If a blank is not present, or no internal standards are defined in the blank, then a
normalization factor cannot be defined, and no internal standards points are plotted on the
graph. Other situations in which normalization cannot be factored include cases in which the
intensity of an internal standard in the blank is zero, or where the internal standard is in
shutdown, or is in brackets (wherein one of its equation analytes is in shutdown).
In addition, all existing normalization factors are cleared if you manually clear the current
Blank or Calibration & Blank via the Analysis menu. Also, if you open or create a new
calibration file, load a calibration in the Dataset window, or run an operation that loads a new
calibration file (such as reprocessing a blank, standard, or sample using original conditions),
the normalization factors will again be cleared.
When the normalization factor is undefined or has been cleared, no points are plotted on the
graph until a new, valid blank is run and normalization is re-established. In the case of
reprocessing, no points are plotted as long as the Use Original Conditions check box is
selected, as sufficient data is not available.
Note: Where only a single blank has been run, no point is plotted on the graph; plotting begins at
the next sample. Also, when a new blank is run, no point is plotted on the graph for the
blank; plotting resumes immediately thereafter.
QC Tab
This tab displays relevant Quality Control data for samples run for which QC criteria has been
defined in the selected method. The data displayed includes the basic sample information, such as
the originating row index number and analyte sample information. Analytes that are acting as
Internal Standards are identified with an (IS) in the relevant analyte header. When a sample falls
outside of the specified QC criteria, the relevant data is displayed in red text. QC data is displayed
for only as long as the corresponding sample entries appear on the Intensities, Concentrations, and
Unfactored Concentrations tabs.
The data on the QC tab is organized into the following categories: QC Standards; QC Spikes;
QC Duplicates; QC Dilutions; and Samples, Blanks, and Calibration Standards:
• For QC Standards, which are grouped by standard number, the original sample concentration is
displayed, followed by the RSD and % recovery.
• QC Spikes display the % recovery of the spike. QC Duplicate Spikes are also listed here, showing
the % difference. For all QC Spikes and QC Duplicate Spikes listed, this tab also displays the
original row index of the parent sample.
• QC Duplicates and QC Dilutions display the % difference of the duplicate or dilution. For all QC
Duplicates and QC Dilutions listed, this tab also displays the original row index of the parent
sample.
• The Samples, Blanks, and Calibration Standards section displays the named information only where
a sample fails the QC criteria specified — Samples display sample concentration, IS % recovery,
RSD, and SD information; Blanks display measured intensity SD data; and Calibration Standards
display net intensity RSD data.
The categories are each displayed in their own collapsible tree format — click the + and -
signs beside each header to expand and view or collapse and hide the available data.
All QC types from the Method window QC tab are considered in this section. However, because the
QC Calibration sub-tab deals with limits on the calibration as a whole (such as slope, intercept, and
correlation coefficient limits) rather than on individual samples, no QC failure is flagged if an
individual calibration standard goes outside specified limits, and no data, sample names or analyte
headers appear in red if a calibration fails a QC check. When a calibration fails, the calibration
information is displayed on the Intensities, Concentrations, and Unfactored Concentrations tabs as a
Calibration Curve, and expanded upon on the QC tab with the addition of Slope, Intercept, and
Correlation Coefficient values for each analyte. Also note that repeated samples and diluted samples
as a result of QC failure actions are not added to this tab as QC Duplicates or QC Dilutions.
If a QC measure requires that there be a valid calibration in the current workspace, and none exists,
the QC Status column will appear blank, rather than showing Passed or Failed, and the relevant cells
on the QC tab will also appear blank, as no data could be properly calculated.
You can also access the data on this tab from any of the other tabular views where a QC Status cell
displays a Failed marker; simply click the Failed cell or the corresponding Sample ID to go to the
relevant row on the QC tab. Note that QC failure messages are not displayed on this view — to view
a failure message, you must look at the relevant individual Current Sample report.
You can display additional columns to show the acquisition date and time, and reprocessed
data flags for relevant samples — click Advanced to configure this option.
Data Viewer . 209
Advanced Display Options Dialog

The Advanced... button displays a dialog to define Data Viewer display options. You can
specify how the analytes are sorted in the tables; whether or not to display the acquisition
date and time for each sample; whether or not to display reprocessed data and QC pass/fail
indicators where relevant; and set the number of decimal places to display for Intensity,
Concentration, RSD, SD, and % Recovery values.
To define display options:
1. Click Advanced...
The Advanced Data Viewer Display Options dialog box appears.
2. In the Sort Analyte header by drop-down list, select the type of sort order to use
for analytes in the Data Viewer table headers.
3. If you have enabled QC (Quality Control) checking in one or more of your methods,
and wish to display whether or not the QC measures have passed or failed on the
Intensities, Concentrations, and Unfactored Concentrations tabs, enable the Display
Quality Control Status check box . Whether displayed onscreen or not, QC
information is always exported with the sample data.
4. If you want to display the Sample Acquisition Date and Time on the Intensities,
Concentrations, and Unfactored Concentrations tabs, enable the Display Sample
Acquisition Date and Time check box. Whether displayed onscreen or not, time
and date information is always exported with the sample data.
5. To Indicate Samples Outside of Limits click this check box and select a color for
the Lower Limit and Upper Limit from the drop-down. The sample limits are
entered in the Sample Limits sub tab of the Method Editor Checks tab and are
shown based on the type of concentration selected.
6. To Display Autosampler Location click this check box. Adds a A/S Loc column
displaying the autosampler locations of all samples.
7. In the Intensity field, select the number of decimal places to display for Intensity
values. Valid values = 0-4
8. In the Concentration field: Select the number of decimal places to display for
Concentration values. Valid values = 0-4
9. In the RSDs field: Select the number of decimal places to display for RSD (Relative
Standard Deviation) values. Valid values = 0-4
10. In the % Recoveries field: Select the number of decimal places to display for
Percent Recovery values in general, and for Percent Difference values on the QC tab.
Valid values = 0-4
11. Click OK to save your changes.
Data Viewer . 211
Data Ex port Functions

You can export data from the Data Viewer to Excel. With the touch of a button, you can
export the running data from the Intensities, Concentrations, Unfactored Concentrations,
Internal Standards, and QC Data Viewer tabs to a Microsoft Excel compatible file.
Note: You do not need to have Microsoft Excel installed on the same computer as your instrument
software in order to perform a data export. If Excel is not installed, the export file will still be
saved with all applicable data, and with the Internal Standards graph drawn in .jpg form. You
can then transfer the file to another computer, or open the file with an Excel-compatible
reader.
At any point in your determinations, click the Export All... button to export all currently
available data from the Intensities, Concentrations, Unfactored Concentrations, Internal
Standards, and QC Data Viewer tabs to a Microsoft Excel compatible file. Each tab is given a
separate worksheet in the resulting .xls or .xlsx file.
Additional information, including the relevant dataset name, method name, QC pass/fail, and
time and date of acquisition, is also made available in the exported file to provide more clear
and complete sample identification, even though it may not be present in the onscreen
report views in the instrument software.
The default file format for the export function is .xlsx, but .xls is also generally available.
However, due to limitations in Microsoft Excel, if you are exporting more than 256 columns of
data, you can only export in .xlsx format.
Note: If you have a version of Microsoft Excel earlier than 2007 installed on your computer, you will
be allowed to save to .xlsx format, but you will not be able to correctly open the resulting file
in that version of Excel (the file will appear to contain garbage information). In this case, you
can choose to instead save to .xls format, which will open in any version of Excel, or you can
open the resulting .xlsx file in an Excel-compatible viewer or on another computer running
Excel 2007.
Tip: If you will be printing your exported reports to a black and white printer, append the mode
you are using to each analyte name in your method so that this information is included in
your print-outs (otherwise, mode is indicated by color only).
R eprint Data W indow

You use this window to specify which results data you want to reprint. The Reprint function
will allow you to create an exact copy of your original results data printout.
 On the Results tab, in the Results group, click Reprint Data .
The Reprint Data dialog appears:
Using this window:

Note: If you plan on using the Reprint Data function, we recommend that you enable the Spectral
Data option when collecting data. You enable Spectral Data by checking this option on the
Options tab page of the Method Editor. If Spectral Data is not checked and you run an analysis,
the samples will still be stored in a batch and will be available for reprinting, however, no data
will be shown for those samples.
1. Next to Results Data Set Name, click on the file icon and select a results data set
that contains the data you want to reprint.
2. Next to Analysis Batch Date/Time, click on the file icon and select a batch that
you want to reprint. The Select Analysis Batch dialog appears and displays the
batches that are available in the data set you selected. Batches are identified by the
date and time they were initially created.
The rules for how batches are created are as follows:
• When you are performing Manual Analyses, a batch is created when you run the
first solution after opening the Manual Analysis window. The batch will end when you
close the Manual Analysis window. All samples that are run in between are stored as
part of the same batch.
• When you are performing Automated Analyses, a new batch is created when you
first select one of the analyze buttons (Analyze All, Calibrate, and Analyze Samples).
The batch will end when you close the Automated Analysis Control window. If the
analysis is paused and then continued, the continuation of the analysis will be part
of the same batch.
• When you are Reprocessing Analyses a new batch is created when you first
open the Data Reprocessing window and click the Reprocess button. The batch
will end when you close the Data Reprocessing window.
3. Click Preview to preview the selected data in the Results window, without printing.
4. Click Print to print the selected data.
Output is sent to the Results window. It should be noted that no new data is stored
to the Results database when you use the Reprint function.
Devices
P um p Control
You use this dialog to select options for the peristaltic pump.
1. On the Instrument tab, click on Devices.
The devices screen appears.
2. Click the Pump tab.
Using this dialog

 Select the settings that correspond to your instrument configuration.
Pum p Settings
Tubing: Select the tubing type from the drop-down list, for example:
• black/black
• orange/red
• orange/blue, etc.
The pump tubing selected will determine the pump speed needed to achieve a given sample
flow rate.
Flush Rate: Enter the default flush speed. This is the pump speed that will be used when you
click on the Flush button in the Plasma Control window. A sample flush is normally used to
deliver sample from the sample vessel to the nebulizer at a faster rate than the normal sample
flow rate. This decreases the total amount of time it takes to analyze each sample.
Enable Tubing Saver: Select this check-box to use the Tubing Saver feature, which extends
the lifespan of the peristalic pump tubing by operating the pump at a slower speed than normal.
Devices . 215
Autosam pler Configuration

You use this dialog to view the autosampler model and select the tray type that you are using.
1. On the Instrument tab, in the Devices group, click on Devices.
2. Click the Autosampler tab.
Using this dialog:

 Select the tray type that corresponds to your autosampler configuration.
M odel
The autosampler model was set up when the software was installed.
 To change the model, exit the software and run the Reconfigure utility.
To run the Reconfigure utility, click on Start All Programs PerkinElmer
Syngistix for ICP Reconfigure.
Tray Type
Select the tray type that corresponds to your autosampler configuration.
1. Click on Browse to select a different autosampler tray.

2. In the dialog that appears, the trays are listed that can be used with the current
autosampler configuration.
3. Click on the tray you are using and then click on Open.
To turn peristalic pump off while moving autosampler:
 Select this checkbox to turn off the pump while the autosampler probe arm moves
horizontally between samples.
To flush at start of analysis (displayed only when an ESI with prepFAST is installed and
configured):
 Select this checkbox to have the ESI with prepFAST system flush at the start of an
analysis.
Rinse Options
The Rinse options display for those autosamplers that have a rinse ___location used to rinse
the sample probe. If you want to change the rinse solution continuously, select one of the
options where the pump is switched on. Use a higher Pump speed to change the rinse
solution more quickly.
Select from the following rinse options:
Pump always off: The rinse pump is always switched off, even when the sampling probe is
in the rinse ___location. When this option is active, other rinse pump options cannot be selected.
Pump always on: The rinse pump runs continuously.
Pump on while probe in rinse loc: The rinse pump is on for the dwell time that the
sampling probe is in the rinse ___location. The dwell time is preset in the operating software and
cannot be changed by the user.
Pump on while probe in rinse loc. plus xx seconds: The rinse pump is on for the dwell
time that the sampling probe is in the rinse ___location; it continues to pump for the number of
seconds entered in the entry box after the sampling probe has been raised out of the rinse
___location.
Pump on when probe in rinse loc. for xx seconds: The rinse pump starts when the
sampling probe enters the rinse ___location and pumps for the number of seconds entered in
the entry box. This time can be longer or shorter than the default dwell time of the probe in
the rinse ___location.
Devices . 217
FIAS
You use the FIAS Control window to manually control the FIAS pump module and view the
progress of the FIAS program. The status of the FIAS pump module and the FIAS program
are shown at the top of this window. The FIAS On/Off and Goto Next Step buttons will
always be disabled since there is no FIAS program in this configuration. You can only use
these controls when there is no analysis in progress.
Note: FIAS is not available for use in the Syngistix ES version.

2. Click the FIAS tab.
Valve Fill/Inject
To change the position of the valve, click on this button.
• Fill -- The sample loop is filled with sample.
• Inject -- The sample in the sample loop is injected into the carrier stream.
Pump 1
 To start or stop the pump, click on this button. To the right of the button you can
select a value for the speed of pump 1.
Pump 2
 To start or stop the pump, click on this button. To the right of the button you can
Remotes
• Remotes 2 through 10 are switches that you use to control instruments that are
connected to the Remote contacts on the rear of the flow-injection unit. Remote 1 is
always used to trigger the Read function on the spectrometer.
• Select the box to switch the remote on; a cross appears in the box. Clear the box to
switch off the remote.
High Throughput System (HTS)

Use this dialog to select options for the HTS. Users have the choice of running the system
solely by using the peripump. To do this uncheck the Enable HTS check box, and replumb
the tubing as described below. The LEDs on the HTS are turned off.
1. On the Instrument tab, click on Devices.
2. Click the HTS tab.
High Throughput System Settings

Enable HTS: Check this check box to enable the HTS or uncheck the box to disable the
HTS.
Valve: Set the loop to the Load or Inject position.
Vacuum: Turn the vacuum pump On or Off.
• Enabling the HTS activates the Vacuum and Valve buttons in the Devices section of
the Instrument tab and replaces the Peristaltic Pump and Autosampler tabs from the
Sampler section of the Method Editor with the HTS tab.
• Disabling the HTS deactivates the Vacuum and Valve buttons in the Devices
section of the Instrument tab and replaces the HTS tab in Sampler section of the
Method Editor with the Peristaltic Pump and Autosampler tabs.
Apply settings: Click this button to implement the pump settings.
Devices . 219
To replum b the tubing for operation of the peripum p w ithout HTS (that is,
the HTS disabled):
1. Disconnect the autosampler probe from valve position #1 and attach it where the
carrier line connects to the black/black sample tubing before the peripump. You will
need to disconnect the carrier line at the peripump and set it aside.
2. Disconnect the nebulizer line from valve position #5 and attach it to where the
carrier line connects to the black/black sample tubing after the peripump. You will
need to disconnect the carrier line at the peripump and set it aside.
Note: This carrier line is the short one that connects to valve position #4.
R em ote Trigger
The Remote Trigger capability is only available for the Avio series and Optima 5000 and
above running in the Continuous technique.
To display this item:
2. Click the Remote Trigger tab.
Using this function

 To Enable or Disable the Remote Trigger function, click in the check box to enable
it. It is enabled when a check mark appears in the check box.
The Trigger will be monitored for an indefinite time period prior to the read delay
step of either a Manual Analysis or an Auto Analysis per sample. The external trigger
must be sustained for a period of at least 2 seconds. You will see the waiting for
read trigger with a counter displayed in the spectrometer tool bar status display.
 Using Cancel Analysis will terminate the monitoring and analysis.
Hardw are Control W indow s
Hardw are Control W indow s

These windows are used to manually control specific parts of the hardware. Because a
method usually controls some of these functions automatically during an analysis, these
windows will be most useful to you during method development and for setup.
 Select the appropriate hardware control window depending on the task you wish to
perform.
To do this Use
Manually adjust the plasma and monitor the Plasma Control Window
settings.
Perform special spectrometer operations, Spectrometer Control Window
including adjusting alignment.
Control the FIAS valve, pumps, and remotes
independent of any other ICP function.
Plasm a Control W indow

You can use the Plasma Control window to modify plasma parameters, to monitor the status
of major components affecting the plasma and sample introduction system, and to ignite the
plasma and shut it off.
A Quick Look
 On the Instrument tab, click Plasma Control.
Current settings are

displayed here.
Check this box to use the Click this button to apply

settings in this window in new settings for gas flows,
place of the method settings. RF power, or pump flow
rate.
Controls and Displays in the Plasm a Control W indow

Plasma Switch
• Click on this switch (or press F9) to turn the plasma on and off.
To turn the plasma off, you can also use the Emergency Plasma Off button
located on the instrument above the sample compartment.
Hint: You can press F9 to turn the plasma on and off even if the Plasma Control window is not open.
The Plasma Status window indicates if ignition is successful or if there is a problem. For more
information, see System Monitors. For details about the ignition process, see Igniting the
Plasma. Wait one hour before analyzing samples. This warm-up time ensures accuracy in
Hardware Control Windows . 223
your results since it allows the temperature of the sample introduction system to fully
stabilize.
Override Method
If this box is checked, the instrument will use values for your next analysis as specified in this
window. If the box is not checked, the instrument will use the values in the active method.
Selecting Override Method does not change the values in the active method or the method
stored in the results library.
Gas Flows
If you select the Override Method checkbox, the Plas, Aux, and Neb buttons allow you to
change the post-ignition flow rates of the argon gases and to monitor their current values.
Plas, Aux, and Neb refer to the plasma, auxiliary, and nebulizer gases. The blue numbers in
the display indicate the current flow rate.
• To start or stop gas flow, click on the desired button beneath the display. The green
light on a gas button indicates that the gas is flowing.
If you stop the plasma gas flow while the torch

is ignited, the torch will go out.
• To change a gas flow rate, select or type a value in the box beneath the appropriate
gas display. For more information, see Recommended Settings for Plasma
Parameters and Recommended Settings for Nebulizers. The maximum flow rate that
you can enter cannot actually be attained by some nebulizers. If the nebulizer cannot
reach the highest value, it will return the value it reached to the display. An error
message will be recorded on the Plasma tab of the Instrument Diagnostics window.
• Click on Apply after you have adjusted the setting for the flow rates.
RF Power
These allow you to change the radio frequency power that is dissipated in the plasma and to
monitor the current power.
• To change the power setting, select or type a value. For more information see
Recommended Settings for Plasma Parameters. Click on Apply after you have
adjusted the RF power.
Pump and Flush
These allow you to change the sample flow rate and to monitor the status.
• To change the sample flow rate, select or type the appropriate value. The software
adjusts the pump speed based on the type of pump tubing you selected in the Pump
Configuration dialog. To change the pump tubing, in the Options menu, click on
Pump. A typical sample flow rate is 1.5 mL/min for all instruments. Ranges for
sample flow rates vary with the pump and pump tubing you are using. For example,
values are from 0.6 to 5.7 mL/min for the PerkinElmer pump (with 0.76 mm i.d.
tubing) and from 0 to 2.5 mL/min for the Gilson pump. Then, click on Apply. For
more information, see the Configure Pump dialog.
• Click on Pump to start or stop the peristaltic pump. The green light indicates that
the pump is turned on.
• Click on Flush to set the pump speed to the flush setting in the Pump Configuration
dialog.
Overriding M ethod Settings
Recom m ended Settings for Plasm a Param eters

Parameter Aqueous Organic
Helical Flat Plate Helical Flat Plate
Plasma Flow 15 L/min 8 L/min 15 L/min 15 L/min
Auxiliary Flow: 0.2 L/min 0.2 mL/min 0.5 mL/min 0.5 mL/min
Nebulizer Flow: 0.80 L/min 0.70 L/min 0.50 L/min 0.50 L/min
(for Low-Flow GemCone or the
Concentric Glass nebulizer)
RF Power: 1300 watts 1500 watts 1300 watts 1500 watts
Sample Flow Rate: 1.50 mL/min 1.0 mL/min 0.80 mL/min 1.0 mL/min
Recom m ended Settings for Nebulizers

Argon Flow Rate
Nebulizer Part Number Typical Value Operating Range
GemTip Cross-Flow N0680503 0.8 L/min 0.7 – 1.3 L/mon
Low-Flow GemCone N0690671 0.6 L/min 0.4 – 0.95 L/min
High Solids GemCone N0690670 1 L/min 0.7 – 1.0 L/min
Concentric Glass 00472020 0.8 L/min 0.7 – 1.3 L/min

(MEINHARD) Type A
Concentric Glass 00472022 0.8 L/min 0.7 – 1.3 L/min

(MEINHARD) Type C
Concentric Glass N0681574 0.6 L/min 0.4 – 0.7 L/min

(MEINHARD) Type K
Ultrasonic (115 V) N0691709 1.0 L/min or less n/a
Ultrasonic (230 V) N0691710 1.0 L/min or less n/a
Spectrom eter Control W indow

You can use the Spectrometer Control window to adjust and align the position from which
the plasma is viewed, control various spectrometer manual settings, and perform calibrations
of the spectrometer.
A Quick Look
 On the Instrument tab, in the Spectrometer group, click on Spectrometer Control.
Simultaneous ICP Spectrometers
The Spectrometer Control window is shown below as it appears for simultaneous ICP
spectrometers and is set for radial viewing.
Note: In the Transient technique the following buttons: Align View , W avelength Calibration, and
Hg R ealign buttons are not displayed since they are not applicable to FIAS.
Adjusting the Torch View ing Position

In the Spectrometer Control window, you can:
 modify the coordinates for the torch viewing position
-or-
 automatically align the torch viewing position for the highest signal intensity by
clicking on Align View. The spectrometer uses a computer-controlled mirror in the
transfer optics to adjust the area of the plasma viewed by the optical system.
Modifying the Coordinates for the Torch Viewing Position
Due to the various temperature zones in the plasma and differences in analyte ionization
processes, slight adjustments to the torch viewing position may give higher intensity signals for
particular analytes. Adjustments should be made on an empirical basis. After verification of the
desired results, the new settings may be used to override the Viewing Distance setting in the
method for all analytes. Keep in mind that, alternatively, the software can automatically align the
torch viewing position for a particular analyte using Align View.
The crosshair on the Torch Viewing Position display shows what part of the plasma is
currently being viewed by the spectrometer. After modifying one or both coordinates, click on
Apply to set the new viewing position. The cross-hair then moves to the new position and the
blue numbers in the display indicate the current settings for the coordinates.
For radial viewing, you can modify: For axial viewing, you can modify the
• the viewing position from the RF coil to viewing position relative to the plasma
the tip of the plasma . (horizontal scale center on two axes.
0 to 30 mm)
• the position relative to the plasma
center (vertical scale -10 to 10 mm)
To use the new settings in place of the settings in the method, select Override Method.
The settings for both coordinates will be used. If you do not select Override Method, the
system will use the setting for the Viewing Distance parameter. This parameter is in the
method on the Sampler: Plasma page. It has only one coordinate and assumes the other
coordinate to be 0. For example, a setting of 15.0 indicates the coordinates of 15.0 and 0.0.
If you want to set the torch viewing position individually for each analyte, you can do this
using the Viewing Distance parameter in the method.
Automatically Aligning the Torch Viewing Position
Note: This procedure is not applicable to the Transient technique.
Perform this procedure when:

• the instrument or software is first installed
• the instrument is moved to a new ___location
• the torch is removed or replaced
• the RF coil is replaced
• you want to optimize intensities for an individual analyte
1. On the Instrument tab in the Spectrometer group, click on Spectrometer Control.
The Spectrometer Control window appears.
2. On Dual View instruments, select Axial or Radial. We recommend that you first do the
alignment in one viewing mode, then select the other viewing mode and repeat the
procedure.
3. To view spectra collected during the procedure, open the Spectra Display window.
4. Click on Align View in the Spectrometer Control window to open the Align View
dialog.
5. Select the element and wavelength.

This is the wavelength that the system will use to measure the intensities at different
viewing positions and locate the position that gives the highest intensity. You have
the following choices.
 Click on the Select Analyte option and then select Manganese (Mn), which is
typically used as the alignment wavelength for the majority of analyses.
-or-
 Click on the Select Analyte option and then select another element from the
drop-down list. This feature is for specialized analyses where you want to
optimize the intensity for an individual analyte of interest. This may adversely
affect the intensities of other analytes.
-or-
 Click on the Other option and type in an element and/or wavelength not in the
drop-down lists.
Note: If you have an ESI with prepFAST installed and configured, specify the Autosampler Location
of the solution.
6. Set the Read Delay time.

7. Aspirate a solution containing the element you have selected. In a HTS system,
place the carrier line in the alignment solution.
If you are using Manganese (Mn), use 10 mg/L for radial viewing or use 1 mg/L for
axial viewing.
• When using radial viewing, the system adjusts the lateral viewing position only.
• When using axial viewing, the system adjusts both coordinates.
8. Click Align, to begin the alignment procedure. In a HTS system, the HTS changes
to Load and Vacuum Off and the align procedure begins.
The system will determine the intensity at the selected wavelength, while adjusting
the viewing position in incremental steps. In the Results window, a report is
generated that gives the intensities found at each position. The system changes the
Torch Viewing Position to the position that gives the highest intensity. In the
Spectrometer Control window, the software resets the coordinates so that the 0 and
15 position is at the ___location of highest intensity.
Note: If you have performed the procedure above, but are not satisfied with the results, you can
perform an Extended Search over a larger area.
9. Click Extended Search (For axial viewing only) and repeat the procedure above to
perform a search over a larger area of the torch.
Note: This search takes longer than the usual procedure. Before using Extended Search, you
should perform the sodium bullet test to make sure that the sample is reaching the plasma.
If any of the following conditions are found, a message dialog appears to give you an
opportunity to confirm that you wish to use the new alignment (or cancel it) if desired:
• The distance from the last alignment is greater than 5 mm.
• The value of the peak is less than 10,000 counts.
• The element wavelength used for the last optimization is not the same as the one
used for the previous optimization.
M anual Settings: Spectrom eter Control W indow

Override Method: If this box is checked, the instrument will use the value for your analysis
as specified in this window. If the box is not checked, the instrument will use the value in the
active method. Selecting Override Method does not change a value in the active method or in
the method stored in the results library.
Purge Gas: Nitrogen is used to purge the optical system during operation to remove oxygen
and moisture. Usually, the purge should be set to Normal. The High setting may be used to
improve sensitivity for elements with wavelengths below 190 nm since oxygen absorbs below
190 nm. On scanning CCD ICP spectrometers, you have the option of turning the purge gas off.
View Mode (Dual View instruments only)
Select the plasma viewing mode.
Radial: Light emitted from the side of the plasma passes through the torch slit and is
directed to the spectrometer optics.
Axial: Light emitted along the axis of the plasma is directed to the spectrometer
optics. The observation zone of the plasma is circular and the spectrometer views a
column of light from the central channel of the plasma.
Attenuated (Attn) Radial or Attenuated (Attn) Axial
These settings are available only for scanning CCD ICP spectrometers. Use these settings
when lower intensities are desired, for example, for samples of high concentration that would
normally saturate the detector and for sensitive wavelengths, typically in axial mode.
Shutter Auto/Closed/Open
A shutter in the transfer optics allows light from the plasma to enter the spectrometer optics.
This shutter may be set to the Auto, Closed, or Open position. The Auto setting indicates that
the shutter is under instrument control.
Usually, the shutter is set to Auto. If you have an extensive number of samples to analyze,
however, you may wish to set the shutter to the open position manually to increase
analytical throughput. Be sure to close the shutter when the analysis is complete.
Leaving the shutter in the open position with the plasma on could lead to
deterioration of the optics and eventual degradation of UV performance. It is
recommended that the shutter be closed when analyses are not being performed.
To measure dark current, take measurements with the shutter in the closed position.
Hg Lamp Off/On
This control appears only for simultaneous ICP spectrometers. An internal mercury lamp,
under system control, is used for the mercury realignment procedure and periodic mercury
recalibration. Manual control of this lamp is available for diagnostic purposes to verify that
the signal is reaching the detector and that the mercury lamp is working.
Overriding M ethod Settings

In the Spectrometer Control window, the following settings can override method settings.
Setting in Spectrometer Setting in Method

Control Window
Torch Viewing Position: To The View Dist (Viewing Distance) parameter is set in
change the position, select new the method on the Sampler: Plasma page.
coordinates and click on Apply. The Viewing Distance parameter has only one coordinate
For either axial or radial viewing, and assumes the other coordinate to be 0. For example, a
both coordinates will be used. setting of 15 indicates the coordinates of 15 and 0.
Purge Gas The Purge Gas Flow parameter is set on the

Spectrometer: Settings page.
To override a setting in the method, select the Override Method box next to the setting in
the Spectrometer Control window.
Table of Spectrom eter Alignm ent and Calibration Controls
Control What it Does When to Use

Align View Optimizes the torch viewing position for the
highest signal intensity. • the instrument or software is first
installed
• the instrument is moved to a new
___location
• the torch is removed or replaced
• the RF coil is replaced
• you want to optimize intensities for an
individual analyte
Wavelength Gathers data for UV or VIS emission lines to The instrument must be operated with the
Calibration compensate for slight variations in optical plasma on for at least one hour before
alignment. At the end of the UV or VIS initiating wavelength calibration on a
(sim ultaneous wavelength calibration, the system spectrometer.
spectrom eters) determines the wavelength offset of an
emission line from the internal mercury lamp Perform this procedure:
and records the slit position as a reference • when the instrument or software is first
point for future mercury realignments. installed
• when the instrument is moved to a new
___location
• after reinstalling or upgrading the
software
• if analyte peaks in the Examine Spectra
window are significantly offset from the
central line for the wavelength on a
consistent basis
Initialize Optics Performs a prism scan to optimize The instrument must be operated with the
wavelength for the slit in the instrument plasma on for at least 10 minutes before
(scann ing CCD optics. The system takes an intensity reading, initializing optics.
spectrom eters) scans the surrounding intensity range and
locates the midpoint. If this midpoint varies Initialize Optics is performed automatically
from the initial intensity measurement, the during analyses. However, if there are wide
system will optimize optics for use in fluctuations in ambient laboratory
subsequent analyses. temperature that appear to affect intensity,
you can initialize optics manually. To do
this, click on the Initialize Optics button in
the Spectrometer Control window.
Hg Realign To compensate for spectrometer drift (for The spectrometer must be in the ready
example, changes in barometric pressure), mode before initiating a mercury
(sim ultaneous the system compares the mercury slit realignment.
spectrom eters position recorded at the end of the
only) wavelength calibration to the current position Use before adjusting the peak wavelength,
found on the detector. a procedure which allows you to fine-tune
the calibration for a particular wavelength.
For more information, see Adjusting the
Wavelength.
Use before collecting data for MSF models.

Detector The system collects and processes the
Calibration detector signal bias and dark current data in • the instrument or software is first
order to quantify signals from the detector installed
properly. • the instrument is moved to a new
___location
• after reinstalling or upgrading the
software
• before checking detection limits
Note: On scanning CCD ICP spectrometers,
a detector calibration is performed
automatically when you start the software.
Perform ing a System W avelength Calibration
This topic covers the procedure for simultaneous ICP spectrometers.

Perform this procedure:
• when the instrument or software is first installed
• when the instrument is moved to a new ___location
• after reinstalling or upgrading the software
• if analyte peaks in the Examine Spectra window are significantly offset from the
central line for the wavelength on a consistent basis
Notes: If your peaks are slightly offset, a system wavelength calibration is usually not necessary.
Instead, fine adjustments to wavelengths can be made using the Examine Spectra window.
For more information, see Examine Spectra Window.
If using MSF and a wavelength calibration is performed, you must update the instrument and
data set. The MSF models must then be recreated before performing an analysis for accurate
results. Failure to do so will result in MSF not being calculated for certain wavelengths.
Im portant: Since spectrometers are sensitive to thermal effects, it is important that the instrument
be operated with the plasma on for at least 30 minutes before initiating wavelength
calibration on a spectrometer.
Solutions You'll Need for Wavelength Calibration

• Calmix 3 solution (Part No. N0582152) available through PerkinElmer, which
contains 100 mg/L of P, K, S; and 20 mg/L of As, La, Li, Mn, Mo, Ni, Sc, Na.
• For spectrometers that have a visible wavelength channel on the detector, you will
need VIS Wavecal mix (Part No. N9302946) available through PerkinElmer, which
contains 1 mg/mL Ba, Ca; and 10 mg/L of La, Li, Mn, Na, Sr; and 50 mg/L of K.
• Rinse solution
To initiate a wavelength calibration:
1. Make sure that the plasma is lit and has been on for at least one hour on a spectrometer.
2. On the Instrument tab in the Spectrometer group, click on Spectrometer Control.
To perform UV channel wavelength calibration:
Note: If you have an ESI with prepFAST installed and configured specify the Autosampler Location
of the solution on the Wavelength Calibration dialog.
1. Aspirate the Calmix 3 solution (Part No. N0582152). In a HTS system, remove the
carrier line from the carrier bottle and place it in the UV wavelength calibration
solution.
Note: On Axial (XL) instruments, you may need to dilute the wavecal solution 1:10 to keep certain
emission lines from saturating the detector. On Dual View (DV) instruments, select Radial
viewing. If you have selected axial, a message appears informing you to change to radial.
2. Select UV, then click on Wavelength Calibration in the Spectrometer Control

window.
3. In the Wavelength Calibration dialog that appears, click on Calibrate to perform
the calibration In a HTS system, the HTS changes to Load and Vacuum Off and
the calibration procedure begins.
The UV calibration may take several minutes. You may view the spectra used for
calibration by clicking on Spectra in the toolbar. When the UV calibration is
complete, the UV coefficients and RMS (Root Means Square) value will be displayed
in the Results window. These values should meet the following specifications.
UV Coefficients and RMS Specification
First Coefficient Absolute value < 2.0

Second Coefficient Absolute value < 2.0
Third Coefficient Absolute value < 8.0
RMS < 2.0
(measures variability of
wavelength offsets)
If these specifications are not met, repeat the wavelength calibration and make sure all
peaks can be seen in the Spectra Display window. If the specifications are still not met, a
complete optical alignment may be required. Contact your PerkinElmer service engineer.
For spectrometers that have a visible wavelength channel on the detector, to
perform VIS channel wavelength calibration:
1. Aspirate the VIS Wavecal mix (Part No. N9302946). In a HTS system, remove
the carrier line from the carrier bottle and place it inthe UV wavelength calibration
solution.
Note: On Axial (XL) instruments, you may need to dilute the wavecal solution 1:10 to keep certain
emission lines from saturating the detector. On Dual View (DV) instruments, select Radial
viewing. If you have selected axial, a message appears informing you to change to radial.
2. Select VIS, then click on Wavelength Calibration in the Spectrometer Control

window.
3. In the Wavelength Calibration dialog that appears, click on Calibrate to perform
the calibration In a HTS system, the HTS changes to Load and Vacuum Off and
the calibration procedure begins.
The VIS calibration may take several minutes. You may view the spectra used for
calibration by clicking on Spectra in the toolbar. When the VIS calibration is
complete, the VIS coefficients and RMS (Root Means Square) value will be displayed
in the Results window. These values should meet the following specifications.
VIS Coefficients and RMS Specification
First Coefficient Absolute value < 3.0

Second Coefficient Absolute value < 3.0
Third Coefficient Absolute value < 12.0
RMS < 2.0
(measures variability of
wavelength offsets)
If these specifications are not met, repeat the wavelength calibration and make sure all
peaks can be seen in the Spectra Display window. If the specifications are still not met, a
complete optical alignment may be required. Contact your PerkinElmer service engineer.
Perform ing a M ercury Realignm ent
This function is available only on simultaneous ICP spectrometers.

A mercury realignment compares the known wavelengths of the internal mercury lamp with
the found positions on the detectors and is used to compensate for spectrometer drift. It is
especially useful before collecting data that you will use for a Wavelength Adjustment
(Examine Spectra window) or MSF.
Note: In the Automated Analysis Control window, you can specify a mercury realignment (called
Auto Wavelength Realign) to occur at defined intervals during an automated analysis (one-
hour intervals are recommended). For more information, see Autom ated Analysis
Control: Set Up P age.
To perform a mercury realignment:

1. On the Instrument tab in the Spectrometer group, click Hg Realign.
The Hg Realign dialog appears populated with the settings from the last
realignment.
2. Click on Realign to start the mercury realignment.
The routine takes about one minute.
Perform ing a Detector Calibration

The system collects and processes the detector signal bias and dark current data in order to
quantify signals from the detector properly.
Note: On scanning CCD ICP spectrometers, a detector calibration is performed automatically when
you start the software and takes 15 to 30 seconds.

• the instrument or software is first installed
• the instrument is moved to a new ___location
• after reinstalling or upgrading the software
• before checking detection limits.

The plasma does not need to be on for this procedure.
To perform a detector calibration:
1. On the Instrument tab in the Spectrometer group, click Spectrometer Control.
2. Click the Detector Calibration button in the Spectrometer Control window to
display the Detector Calibration dialog. Click the Calibrate button to begin Detector
Calibration.
The system automatically closes the shutter to measure signal bias and dark current.
The detector calibration routine may take up to twenty minutes.
Perform ing a Detection Lim it Diagnostic Check

The Detection Limit Performance Check calculates detection limits for analytes, the results of
which are displayed in the Mean Data and Replicate Data sections of your analysis report.
You can use this Performance Check to evaluate how well your instrument is reading.
 On the Instrument tab, in the Spectrometer group, select Performance
Checks.
The Performance Checks dialog is displayed.
To use this window:

1. Use the Replicate spin box to select the number of replicates.
2. Use the SD spin box to enter the factor to multiply by the standard deviation to
calculate the detection limit.
3. In the Sample ID text box specify a name to identify the sample.
By default, "DL Check" is used as the sample ID."
4. Select which set of Concentration Units will be used for detection limit
calculations. Your choices are: Calibration units or Sample units.
5. Select the Manual radio button if you wish to run manually.
or
Select the Autosampler radio button if you wish to run with an autosampler. If you
select Autosampler, the Location spin box becomes enabled. From the Location
spin box, specify the sample ___location.
6. Open a method that contains at least one analyte with a valid calibration curve. The
equation used cannot be Bracketing or Method of Additions.
7. Click OK on the Performance Checks dialog to begin the Detection Limit analysis.
The Performance Checks dialog closes and the Detection Limit Checks analysis
begins.
FI AS Control W indow
You can use the FIAS Control window to control the valve, pumps, and remotes independent
of any other ICP functions.
Controls and Displays in the FIAS Control W indow

You use the FIAS Control window to manually control the FIAS pump module and view the
progress of the FIAS program. The status of the FIAS pump module and the FIAS program
are shown at the top of this window. The FIAS On/Off and Goto Next Step buttons will
always be disabled since there is no FIAS program in this configuration. You can only use
these controls when there is no analysis in progress.
2. Click the FIAS tab.
Valve Fill/Inject
To change the position of the valve, click on this button.
• Fill -- The sample loop is filled with sample.
• Inject -- The sample in the sample loop is injected into the carrier stream.
Pump 1
• To start or stop the pump, click on this button. To the right of the button you can
Pump 2
• To start or stop the pump, click on this button. To the right of the button you can
Remotes
• Remotes 2 through 10 are switches that you use to control instruments that are
connected to the Remote contacts on the rear of the flow-injection unit. Remote 1 is
always used to trigger the Read function on the spectrometer.
• Select the box to switch the remote on; a cross appears in the box. Clear the box to
switch off the remote.
Controlling a FIAS Pum p

When a FIAS is configured, its pumps, valve, and remotes are controlled directly via the FIAS
Control window with one exception. When the plasma is extinguished for any reason (turned
off by the user, or due to a hardware error), the FIAS pumps (if a FIAS is configured and
connected), will turn off.
The following processes are not affected by the presence of a FIAS:
• ICP peristaltic pump. If you do not want to use the ICP peristaltic pump while
using the FIAS, you must turn it off manually by setting the pump speed to 0. In this
case, 0 should be considered a valid speed; no functionality should be disabled due
to a speed of 0.
• Startup/Shutdown. The Pumps Off At End feature (which automatically turns
the FIAS pumps off at the end of an analysis), is not used in ICP. Of course, as
described above, if the plasma is automatically shut down at the end of an analysis,
the FIAS pumps will be turned off as part of that process.
I nform ation Display W indow s
Inform ation Display W indow s

An overview of the Information Display Windows follows:
Continuous Graphics Display W indow

View spectra and associated information, as each spectrum is generated during an analysis.
Spectra Display W indow

View spectra and associated information, as each spectrum is generated during an analysis.
The Results Display W indow

View a list of the analytical results as they are generated from an analysis.
• See also Printing Results to print a paper copy report of the analytical results
shown in the Results Display window.
Calibration Display W indow

View the calibration curves:
• during routine analysis to visually check the calibrations.
• during Method Development to ascertain an appropriate curve fitting algorithm.

View the samples listed according to the autosampler ___location number.
Information Display Windows . 239
Continuous Graphics Display W indow

This real-time display offers the ability to view data for selected analytical wavelengths in a
continuous readout mode. This is useful for optimizing system parameters and watching the
instrument performance.
This is a separate mode from that used by manual and automated analyses. In this window,
data will be plotted graphically, in real-time, on a screen that consists of intensity on the y-
axis and time on the x-axis. The benefit is the ability to see and evaluate the time behavior
of analytical signals. You can diagnose sample introduction issues and easily optimize
parameters since the signal can be seen in real-time.
 On the Instrument tab, in the Spectrometer group, click Continuous Graphics.
Note: If you attempt to open the Continuous Graphics window when no analytes are defined in the
current method, the Open Method dialog displays. This prompts you to open a method with
at least one analyte defined before going into Continuous Graphics.
Analyte Table
Analyte: Displays the analyte names (as defined in the method).
Signal: Shows the current signal value for each analyte.
Visible: Shows whether each analyte is visible on the graph (checked), or is hidden (unchecked).
Style: Shows the line type and color for each analyte displayed on the graph.
Factor: For each analyte, the factor multiplied by the signal before it is displayed and graphed.
Offset: For each analyte, the offset added to the signal before it is displayed and graphed.
Select Analytes Button: Opens the Enable/Disable Elements dialog.
Y-ax is Lim its

Max: The maximum value (10 to 65000000 ) for the y-axis (implemented when Apply button clicked).
Min: The minimum value (-65000000 to 65000000) for the y-axis (implemented when Apply
button clicked).
Note: It must be less than the M ax limit minus the minimum height of the graph (a value of 10)
Selecting Settings and Colors

You use the Continuous Graphics Display Options dialog to select the settings and colors
for both the on-screen and printed window. To select this dialog:
1. In the Continuous Graphics window, right-click to display a pop-up menu.
• Display Options: Click this button to open the Continuous Graphics Options dialog.
• Print: Click this button to print an image of the window; similar to the printing
format of the Examine window.
• Auto Expand Graph: Sets the maximum value on the y-axis to about 10%
greater than the highest current signal value of any analyte.
• Auto Zero Graph: Sets the current signal of each analyte to zero.
• Set Graph Maximum: Sets the graph to its maximum size.
2. Click Display Options to display the Continuous Graphics Options dialog.
3. Set the options for the display.

• Settings Tab - Entries on this page allow you to choose parameters that control
the amount of noise in the displayed signals.
Time Constant: (0.1-10 seconds): The amount of damping to be applied to
the graphical signals. A very small amount of damping (for example 0.2
seconds) allows the signal to react quickly to changes, but with additional
noise. A larger amount of damping removes some of the noise, but the
signal will not react as quickly to changes.
Data Display Repeat Time: (0.5-10 seconds): The amount of time

between updates of the digital displays. The signal is being averaged
between each update.
Figures After Decimal: (0-4): The number of decimal places in the
displayed values.
Signal Scale: Select the type of Y-axis scaling that should be performed:
Linear: Display a linear, even scale.
Logarithmic: Display a scale that increases in powers of ten.
Integration Time: Time the instrument integrates to take each data
spectrum.
Set Defaults: Click to restore the settings on this page to their factory
recommended values.
• Lines Tab - Define the type of lines and their widths on this page.
The type of lines and their widths can be defined on this page.
Analyte: Lists the names of all analytes for which data is being collected as
defined in the method.
Line Width: Lists the line widths (in pixels) for each of the analytes signals.
Line Type: Lists the line types for each analyte signal.
Note: If you choose a line type other than solid, the line width must be set to 1 for
the line to be rendered in the desired style.
Set Defaults: Click to restore the line options to their factory preset values.
• Colors Tab - Set the colors for the components of the graph on this page.
Define the colors for the components of the graph on this page.
Background: Click on the color tab under Screen to select the background
color of the graph.
Axes and Labels: Click on the color tabs under Screen or Printer to select
the colors for the axes and labels.
Screen: Select the colors for an on-screen plot.
Printer: Select the colors that will be printed on a color printer.
Defaults: Click this button to restore the screen color options to their
factory preset values.
Spectra Display W indow : P rinting Spectra

You can print the spectra that is shown in the Spectra Display or Examine Spectra windows.
To adjust the printout colors, right click on the spectra and select Display Option from the
popup menu. Change the colors in the Display Options dialog. If the printer color selections
have been modified, and you wish to return to the default colors, click on Printer under the
default color settings. Click OK to close the dialog.
To print spectra:
1. Click on the Spectra Display or Examine Spectra window to make it the active
window.
Note that the title bar of an active window is a different color from other windows.
(The colors displayed on your screen depend on the Windows colors you have
defined for your PC.)
2. From the Applications button select Print Active Window.
to select another printer, click the drop-down arrow next to the Printer Name field.
Click on the Printer name to select it. To change other setup options such as the
paper size, click on Properties.
The Spectra Display window always uses a layout of three rows and two columns for
printouts. Changing the layout on the screen will not affect the printout. Up to six
spectra are printed on one page.
When you print the Examine Spectra window, the spectra are overlaid in one graph
on the page.
R esults Display W indow

The Results Display window shows the measurements made on the current samples, such as
the calculated concentration values and statistical information.
You use this window to display results that are generated from the Manual Analysis Control
window, the Automated Analysis Control window, the Spectrometer Control window or the
Data Reprocessing window. The format of the Results is not variable in this window, but you
can create custom reports from the Data Manager Utility.
 On the Results tab, Results group, click on Results.
Results Options
To display the Results Options dialog:
 Right-click in the Results window and select Display Options.
The Results Options dialog appears.
Lines of Data to Display

 Select the maximum lines of data you want to display in the Results Window from
the drop-down list.
To select view ing options

1. Click on the check box for each item you wish to view.
2. After you have made your selections, click on OK to close the dialog.
Select Show Unpopulated Fields for Sample Wt., Initial Sample Vol., Dilution,
Sample Prep. Vol, Autosampler Location, and Analyst from the sample header in the
results log for all sample types.
Note: Blank spaces replace the field label for an unpopulated field value on lines that have multiple
fields. Also, those lines where all fields are unpopulated will not be displayed.
Select Show Nebulizer Parameters to create a report of nebulizer parameters

which follows the sample header.
Printing
To print this window:
All information shown in this window can be printed as follows:
• automatically (See Printing Results for further information), or
• From the Syngistix Application button select Print Active Window (while the
Results Display window is opened). Then select Quick Print or Print Preview.
Tip: When you clear the Results Display (on the Results tab in the Results group click Clear), the
contents are written to a log file called results.log in the user's home directory (for example,
C:\Users\Public\PerkinElmer\Syngistix\ICP\SystemFiles\Temporary Files). This log file is
erased each time you restart Syngistix. A log file is an ASCII text file that can be printed,
modified in a text editor (e.g., Notepad) or saved.
Note: The Results Display window can only contain 2000 lines of information at a time
(approximately 12 pages). When the 2000-line limit is exceeded, new lines are added at the
end of the display and old lines are removed from the beginning. The lines removed from the
display are stored in results.log under the user's home directory, for example: C:\pe\Default
User\Temporary Files\Results.log.
Using this W indow

Customize the Results Display by selecting the items you wish to include by selecting Options
in the Method Editor:
Tip: To obtain the most abbreviated list of results, select only Means and Statistics from the
M ethod Editor Options page.
Select the type of information you want to include in the Results Display and the Printed Log
for your analysis.
Analytical Header: Select this to include a header when a new analysis is begun. A
new analysis header is also displayed each time the current method is modified and
another sample is analyzed.
Method Header: Select this to include a header that contains information on the
method. Select short or expanded.
Sample Header: Select this to include a header with sample information. Click the
checkbox if you want to start each sample on a new page.
Replicate Data: Select this to include data for each replicate.
Means and Statistics: Select this to include the mean values of each set of replicates
and to include the standard deviation, relative standard deviation, and the residual error.
You must have means selected in order to display statistics.
Auto Integration Report: Select this to include auto integration data for each
measurement when auto integration is being used.
Display over calibration message: Select this option to display an over calibration
message when the sample concentration is greater than the entered percentage of the
highest standard. When this option is checked the % spin box is enabled. In the % spin
box enter a value between 100 and 999 %.
Analysis List: Select this option to include a summary of the operations that were
performed on all of the samples.
Matrix Test Reports: If there is a sample matrix, mark this box to include matrix
reports.
Calibration Summary (Auto Analysis only): Select this to include a calibration
summary in the Results Display window. If this is selected, the calibration summary is
automatically included for automated analyses after the last standard is analyzed. Note:
For manual analyses, you must select the Calibration Summary command in the Analyses
menu.
Detailed Cal. Summary: Select this option to display a detailed summary of each
calibration curve, including the calculated concentration of each standard. This summary
will be displayed after the final standard has been run.
Save with Results - Spectral Data: Select this to include the spectral data in the
results data set. The spectral data must be stored in a results data set if it is to be
displayed in the Examine Spectra window or used for setting up MSF models or Data
Reprocessing.
Remarks: Use this entry field to type your comments regarding the method.
Saving this w indow

When you clear the Results Display (on the Results tab in the Results group click Clear), the
contents are written to a log file called results.log in the user's home directory (for example
C:\Users\Public\PerkinElmer Syngistix\ICP\SystemFiles\Temporary Files). This log file is
erased each time you restart Syngistix. A log file is a text file that can be printed, modified in
a text editor (e.g., Notepad,) or saved.
Note: The Results Display window is not cleared automatically when you start a new analysis. To
clear the window, on the Results tab in the Results group click Clear.
An overview of this w indow

The following are the major sections that may appear in the Results Display window:
• Analytical Header
• Auto Integration Header and Information
• Replicate Header and Information
• Mean Header and Information
• Calibration Summary Header and Information
• Sample Header
• Method Header
For information on saturated samples, see Correcting Saturated Samples.
Analytical Header
A discussion of each entry from the Analytical Header appears below:
Start Time: The date and time when the current analysis began.
Note: To set the format for Date/Time, click on the Windows Start menu button point to
Settings, and then click Control P anel. In the Control Panel window, click the Date/ Time
icon and enter the information in the dialog box.
Logged In Analyst: The name of the Analyst taken from the Windows system log in.
Spectrometer Mode: The Spectrometer Model selected in the current configuration.
Plasma On Time: The time the plasma was ignited.
Technique: The name of the sampling technique selected in the Select Sampling
Technique dialog. (ICP, Continuous, Transient.)
Autosampler Model: The type of Autosampler model you are using.
Sample Information File: The name of the Sample Information File (.sifx file) and the
full pathname.
Results Data Set: The name of the Results Data Set. A Data Set contains the essential
components of an analysis, i.e. the Method, the spectral data, Sample Information and
the analytical results. You specify the Results Data Set name when any one of the
following actions is performed:
• Manual Analysis Control window → Results Data Set Name (Open button) →
Results Data Set dialog
• Automated Analysis Control window Set Up tab →
Results Data Set Name: (Open... button) → Results Data Set dialog
• Data Reprocessing window → Save Results in Data Set (Open... button) →
Results Data Set dialog
Note: Look at all of the selections on the Options page in the Method Editor window to get an
overview of the selected Analytical Results that will appear in the Results data set or the
Results window.
Results Library: The name and ___location of the Library where the Results are saved.
Replicate Header and I nform ation

Following each sample header is the replicate header along with the results for each analyte.
(A replicate is a repeated read cycle performed on a sample and calibration solution.)
Replicate Data: The identification name you gave to the sample solution.
Replicate Number: The number of the current replicate in a series of replicates
performed on each analyte. You select the number of total replicates for the analytes in
the:
Method Editor → Spectrometer → Settings tab
Analyte: The name of the element analyzed. The element symbol is shown along with
the emission wavelength that was used. The element and wavelength are taken from the
active method.
Net Intensity: The resulting intensity from the element analysis minus the background
signal.
Corrected Intensity: The resulting intensity after an internal standard correction (for
example, blanks, reagent blanks, internal standards, IEC models) has been applied.
Calibration Concentration Units: The concentration of the element in calibration
units. You select these units in the:
Method Editor → Calibration pages→ Calibration Units and Standard
Concentrations page
Concentration Sample Units: The concentration of the element in sample units.
Conversion from sample results determined in Calib Units to results expressed in Sample
Units involves corrections made for weight, volume, and dilution information supplied for
samples in a Sample Information File (or the Sample Details dialog in a manual analysis),
e.g. converting from mg/L to mg/kg. Corrections are also automatically made for
converting units with order-of-magnitude differences, e.g. converting mg/L to µg/L.
You select these units in the: Method Editor → Calibration pages → Equations and
Sample Units tab or in the Sample Information Editor
If the sample units in the Sample Information Editor differ from those in the Method
Editor, the sample units in the Sample Information Editor will be used.
Analysis Time: The time when the current sample was analyzed.
Note: To set the format for Date/Time, open the Control Panel window and double-click on the
Date/Time icon.
M ean Header and I nform ation

An explanation of the Mean information appears below:
Analyte: The name of the element analyzed at a specified wavelength. The element
symbol is shown along with the emission wavelength that was used. The element and
wavelength are taken from the active method.
Mean Corrected Intensity: For each sample, the mean corrected intensity. The mean
concentration is expressed in standard units or sample units.
Concentration in Calibration Units: For each sample, the concentration calculated
using the mean corrected intensity value.
Standard Deviations: For each sample, the standard deviation of the mean standard
concentration values expressed in calibration units or sample units.
Sample Concentration Units: For each sample, the mean sample concentration
expressed in sample units.
%RSD: For each sample, the %RSD of either the corrected signal and the mean
standard (or sample) concentration.
Residual Error: The amount the calibration standard deviates from the entered
concentration as a percent.
Information Line: Additional information about the sample measurements that may be
of interest to you, e.g., standard applied, QC messages (including QC recoveries), etc.
Sam ple Header

A discussion of each entry from the Sample Header appears below:
Sequence No: This is the sequence in the run list.
Sample ID: The name you give to each sample. Can be any combination of letters and
numbers up to 25 characters.
Analyst: The name of the person performing the analysis. This is entered in the Sample
Information file.
Nebulizer Back Pressure: This is the argon flow rate for the nebulizer or sample
carrier gas. Valid range: 0 - 2.0 L/min.
Sample Wt: When working with weight units, this is the sample weight entered in the
Sample Information File.
Dilution: If a sample was diluted, the dilution factor (10ml to 100 ml is a factor of 10).
Autosampler Location: The ___location of the solution in the autosampler.
Date Collected: The date and time when the current sample was analyzed.
Note: To set the format for Date/Time, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click
Control P anel. In the Control Panel window click the Date/ Tim e icon and enter the
information in the dialog box.
Sample Prep Volume: After a solid sample has been dissolved or a liquid sample has been
acidified (or otherwise treated) the resulting solution is prepared to a specific volume. This is
the Sample Prep Volume. The information is from the Sample Information File.
Data Type: Original or Reprocessed.
M ethod Header
You can display a short or expanded method header in the Results Display window. Make a
selection in the Method Editor Options tab.
A discussion of each entry from the Method Header appears below.
Method Name: The method name used for the analysis. You specify this name in the
Save Method As dialog when you select Save As... from the Save drop-down in the
Method group.
IEC: The name of the Interelement Correction File (.IEC file) will appear only if you
make the appropriate selections: Method Editor → Process page → Spectral
Corrections tab (select IEC for an element under the Overlap Correction Column and
select an IEC Table) and Results are saved.
Method Description: A brief description of the method used for the analysis. You
specify this name when you select: Method Editor window → Spectrometer page
→Define Elements tab → Method Description
Method Last Saved: The date and time of the method was last saved.
MSF: The name of the Multicomponent Spectral Fitting File (.MSF file) will appear only if
you make the appropriate selections: Method Editor → Process page →
Peak Algorithm..., tab (select MSF for an element under the Peak Algorithm Column).
Also select an MSF Table on the Spectral Corrections page.
Method Header Expanded: The Expanded Method Header contains all the above
entries, plus the additional entries listed below.
Analyte: The name of the element analyzed. The element symbol is shown along with
the emission wavelength that was used. The element and wavelength are taken from the
active method.
Calib Eq'n: This is the calibration equation that is specified in the current method. (A list
of calibration types is shown on the Calibration page of the Method Editor window.) After
the calibration curve has been determined, you can clear (delete) the calibration by
clicking on Clear Calibration Blank from the Analysis menu.
Processing: Peak area, peak height or MSF.
View: Plasma viewing condition: Attenuated Axial or Attenuated Radial.
Internal Standard: Lists the name of the Internal Standard as it appears on the
Spectrometer pages, Define Elements tab. If there is no Internal Standard, then None or
N/A is displayed.
IEC: InterElement Correction, Yes/No.
Calibration Sum m ary Header and I nform ation

The following information is shown in the Calibration Summary:
Analyte: The name of the element used for the calibration. The element symbol is
shown along with the emission wavelength that was used for the calibration. The
elements and wavelengths are taken from the active method.
Standards: The total number of standards applied. The standards are taken from the
active method.
Equation: The type of calibration equation used to calculate the calibration curve, taken
from the active method. Possible choices are linear, linear-bracketed, linear-thru-zero or
non-linear. See the Method Editor Calibration pages: Calibration Equations and Sample
Units page.
Intercept: The calculated y-intercept of the calibration curve. The y-intercept is the
point where the calibration curve crosses the y-axis of the calibration plot. It represents
zero concentration.
Slope: The calculated slope of the calibration curve. Slope represents the relationship of
the increase in intensity to the increase in concentration. It is the ratio of the change in
the y-axis to the change in the x-axis.
Curvature: The calculated curvature is the "a" coefficient in the equation (b = slope
and c = intercept): where x is the concentration and y is the intensity for a non-linear
calibration curve.
Correlation Coefficient: The calculated correlation coefficient. The correlation
coefficient shows how well the data fit the calibration curve. A value of 1.000000
indicates a perfect fit.
Note: The value will always be 1.000000 if your calibration curve has only two points (calibration
blank and 1 calibration standard).
Reslope: The reslope standard is used to make small corrections to the slope of the
calibration curve. Usually, a calibration blank is analyzed just before the reslope
standard. The new reslope value is then compared with a multipoint curve. Reslope is a
time-saving device that lets you adjust a curve without running multiple calibration sites.
The application uses the new curve (reslope) to determine the concentration values.
Detailed Calibration Sum m ary Header and I nform ation

The Detailed Calibration Summary is displayed after the final standard has been run. In this
section a detailed summary of each calibration curve, including the calculated concentration
of each standard is displayed.
The following information is shown in the Detailed Calibration Summary:
Calibration Data For: The name of the element used for the calibration. The element
symbol is shown along with the wavelength that was used for the calibration. The
elements and wavelengths are taken from the active method.
Equation: The type of calibration equation used to calculate the calibration curve, taken from
the active method. Possible choices are linear, linear-bracketed, linear-thru-zero or non-linear.
See the Method Editor Calibration pages: Calibration Equations and Sample Units page.
ID: The ID for each standard is listed.
Mean Signal: The mean signal of each standard is displayed.
Entered Concentration: The entered concentration of each standard is displayed.
Calculated Concentration: The calculated concentration of each standard is displayed.
Residual Error: The amount the calibration standard deviates from the entered
concentration.
Standard Deviation: The standard deviation for each standard is displayed.
%RSD: The relative standard deviation for each standard is displayed.
Coefficient: The calculated correlation coefficient. The correlation coefficient shows
how well the data fit the calibration curve. A value of 1.000000 indicates a perfect fit.
Note: The value will always be 1.000000 if your calibration curve has only two points (calibration
blank and 1 calibration standard).
Slope: The calculated slope of the calibration curve. Slope represents the relationship of
the increase in intensity to the increase in concentration. It is the ratio of the change in
the y-axis to the change in the x-axis
Intercept: The calculated y-intercept of the calibration curve. The y-intercept is the
point where the calibration curve crosses the y-axis of the calibration plot. It represents
zero concentration.
Printing R esults
You can automatically send a hard copy report of the analytical results to the printer as the
results are generated.
Note: If you want to be certain that all of the analytical results generated by the spectrometer are
documented you are encouraged to print a log during the analysis.
To print a log of your results:

 Make sure that there is a check-mark in the Print Log box in the Manual Analysis
Control, Automated Analysis Control, or Data Reprocessing window. If it is blank,
click on the check-box if to select it. You must have a printer online. The default
printer is automatically selected. Options for the printed log can also be selected on
the Options tab of the Method Editor.
Correcting Saturated Sam ples

One or more of the samples you analyzed may indicate an intensity of "saturated". If an
analyte saturates, you will either see the indication of "Saturated" in the Results Display
window (listed under Net Intensity) or the Spectra Display window. In the Examine Spectra
window, the sample ID will be crossed out and either the saturation intensity value or the
word "Saturated" will appear in the intensity column.
When an analyte saturates, it means that the measurement at the chosen wavelength could
not be made because the intensity of the emitted light was too high to measure.
The reasons for an analyte saturating are:
• The sample contained too high a concentration of the analyte.
• The wavelength chosen for the analyte was too sensitive.
• In some cases, saturation may occur if the read delay is not sufficient when the
instrument takes an initial measurement (called a pre-shot) to determine the auto
integration time. Try increasing the read delay to allow the signal to be fully
stabilized in the plasma before a measurement is taken.
• The software displays a saturation error code or message to give further information.
Refer to Saturation Codes.
To correct for saturation, do one of the following:
 Choose a less intense wavelength for the analyte.
To change the wavelength, open the Method Editor, and select a different
wavelength for the element. Make this selection from the Spectrometer page. Save
the method and then reanalyze the samples.
 On Dual View instruments, you can change the plasma viewing type from Axial to
Radial.
By changing the viewing type to Radial, the intensity at the wavelength of interest
may decrease. Change the viewing type on the Sampler: Plasma page of the Method
Editor. Save the method and then reanalyze the samples.
Note: On scanning CCD ICP spectrometers, you have the option of using Attenuated Axial or
Attenuated Radial as the plasma viewing type in the method. Use these settings to provide
lower intensities for samples of high concentration that would normally saturate the detector
and for sensitive wavelengths.
 Dilute the sample.

To decrease the concentration of the element, you can dilute the sample. If you
choose to dilute the sample, be sure to update the dilution information in the Sample
Information File and save the file before reanalyzing the samples. See Using the
Sample Information Editor for more information.
Saturation Codes
The software provides the following saturation error codes or messages. In some cases,
saturation is indicated during "preshot." This is an initial reading that is taken to determine
the optimum auto-integration time. On the Options page of the method you can select Auto
Integration Report which will give you the exact integration times determined during "auto-
integration" or "pre-shot."
Code Description
2 "Saturated2" appears in the Net Intensity column in the Results Display. This
information also appears in the Spectra Display window. This code and message applies
only to simultaneous ICP spectrometers.
The intensity measured during pre-shot is too high for several wavelengths and the
detector cannot read out the data. You may be able to rerun the analysis and select
only one of the wavelengths to prevent saturation from occurring.
information also appears in the Spectra Display window.
The intensity measured for the analyte during pre-shot is too high, even for a 1 ms
integration (the shortest integration time available). Either the wavelength chosen for
the analyte was too sensitive or the sample contained too high a concentration of the
analyte.
information also appears in the Spectra Display window.
The intensity measured for the analyte during the replicate readings is too high. This
may have occurred because the signal wasn't stabilized before the pre-shot
measurement, so the signal intensity changed between the "pre-shot" reading and the
time the replicate was measured.
For the Optima 7300/8300 and Avio 500, Avio 550 Max, Avio 560 Max, in manual
integration, the message "Saturation within survey window" appears in the Results
Display. For either type of integration, the message "Saturated. Code = 4" appears in
the Spectra Display.
First, try increasing the read delay and rerunning the analysis. If saturation still occurs,
the wavelength chosen for the analyte was too sensitive or the sample contained too
high a concentration of the analyte.
5 In automatic integration, the message "Saturation outside of integration window"
appears in the Results Display. A peak with too high an intensity was found outside of
the auto integration window but within the survey window.
For the Optima 7300/8300 and Avio 500, Avio 550 Max, Avio 560 Max in manual
integration, the message "Saturation within survey window" appears in the Results
Display. For either type of integration, the message "Saturated. Code = 5" appears in
the Spectra Display.
For more information on the integration and survey windows, refer to the Spectral
Windows page in the Method Editor.
The saturated peak may not be the analyte of interest, but an interferent. If you are
using background correction, be sure to check that the background correction points
are not placed in the range where saturation is occurring, which can invalidate your
results.
6 In automatic integration, the message "Saturation outside of integration window"
appears in the Results Display. In manual integration, the message "Saturation outside
survey window" appears in the Results Display. A peak with too high an intensity was
found outside the Survey window. For either type of integration, the message
"Saturated. Code = 6" appears in the Spectra Display.
For more information on the integration and survey windows, refer to the Spectral
Windows page in the Method Editor.
The saturated peak may not be the analyte of interest, but an interferent. If you are
using background correction, be sure to check that the background correction points
are not placed in the range where saturation is occurring, which can invalidate your
results.
Calibration Display W indow

The Calibration Display window shows the active calibration as it is being generated and when it
is being used by the system. If this window is empty, there is no active calibration curve.
You use this window to:
• Determine whether the standards lie on the curve and compare this graphic display
of the calibration to the correlation coefficient.
• Check that you have selected the correct algorithm (linear, linear-bracketing, linear
through zero, and nonlinear) for the calibration.
• View the effect on the calibration after selection of different algorithms or other
Method parameters (e.g., subtraction).
• Print this window for your reports to present a graphical display of the calibration.
• Run a calibration curve with two or three standards (a multipoint curve). Use Reslope
to determine a new value for the curve to compare it with the multipoint curve.
 On the Results tab in the Calibration group, click Calib.
Selecting Layout and Colors

To select the layout, number of calibration curves to be viewed at one time, and colors for both
the on-screen and printed Calibration window, you use the Calibration Display Options dialog.
To display this dialog, right-click anywhere inside of the Calibration Display window and select
Display Options. For information on printing, see Printing Calibration Curves below.
Reslope
Run a calibration curve with two or three standards (a multipoint curve). Use Reslope to
determine a new value for the curve to compare it with the multipoint curve. The reslope
curve, which appears as a dashed line, lets you adjust a curve without running multiple
calibration sites. The application uses the new curve (reslope) to determine the concentration
values.
Resizing, Labeling and Order

You can resize the Spectra Display window by placing the cursor on any side or corner of the
window until the cursor changes to a double-headed arrow shape. Click and hold the left
mouse button as you drag the mouse and change the window size.
• Resizing the window changes the size of each pane but not the number of panes.
• As the size is increased, you can view additional information, which includes the
Intensity and Concentration values for every element to be measured in that
solution. Also, you can see the concentration units and range for the x- and y-axes.
• The number in the lower-left corner of a pane corresponds to the row number of the
element in the Method Editor. To rearrange the order of the elements in the panes,
you can reorder the elements in the Method Editor.
Calib Eq'n
This is the calibration equation that is specified in the current method. (A list of calibration types is
shown on the Calibration page of the Method Editor window.) After the calibration curve has been
determined, you can clear (delete) the calibration by clicking on New Calibration in the
Calibration group.
Corr. Coeff.
The correlation coefficient indicates how well the data fit the generated calibration curve. A
value of 1.0000 would indicate a perfect fit.
Printing Calibration Curves

You can print the calibration curves shown in the Calibration Display window. To adjust the
printout colors, right-click anywhere inside of the Calibration Display window and select
Display Options to change the colors.
If the printer color selections have been modified and you wish to return to the default
colors, click on the Defaults button.
To print calibration curves:
1. Click on the Calibration Display window to make it active. Note that the title bar of an
active window is a different color from other windows. (The colors that appear
depend on the Windows settings you have chosen on your PC.)
to select a different printer, click the drop-down arrow next to the Printer Name field.
Click on the Printer name to select it. To change other setup options, such as the
paper size, click on Properties.
The calibration curves are always printed in a layout of two columns and three rows. Changing
the layout on the screen will not affect the printout. Up to six calibration curves are printed on
one page.

Use this window to view and print the list of solutions you need to fill the autosampler tray. The
information shown is taken from the active method and the current sample information file.

1. Make the appropriate entries on the Set Up page of the Automated Analysis Control
window and then click on the Analyze tab.
2. In the Analysis group click on Autosampler Load List.
An example of an Autosampler Loading List window follows:
Using this window:

1. Set up an automated or manual analysis by selecting a method and sample
information file.
2. In the Autosampler Loading List, review the following information: the name of
the method used, the sample information file used and the blanks, calibration
standards and samples in the order that they are to be placed in the autosampler
tray.
Note: In the list of autosampler locations and solutions, the method is not shown for samples (unknowns).
3. Clicking on the Location column header shall sort the list by ___location.
4. Clicking on the Method column header (while in multi-method mode) sorts the list by
method.
Note: If a change is made to the method, SIF, or Auto Analysis window which affects the contents
of the Loading List, the Loading List window is automatically updated.
5. To print the list, right-click and then click on Print Autosampler Loading List or
click on the button and select Print Active Window. In the print dialog that
appears, select your printer and click on OK.
Ex am ine
Spectra/ M SF/ Transient Peak s
W indow
Overview of Ex am ine
The examine window displayed is dependent on the technique you are using.
• If you are using the Continuous Technique, you will see the Examine/MSF window.
• If you are using the Transient Technique, you will see the Examine Transient Peaks
window.
Overview of Ex am ine/ M SF
This window serves a dual purpose:
• You can examine the spectra that have been saved to a data set.
• You can correct for spectral interference by setting background correction points or by
using the MSF (Multicomponent Spectral Fitting) technique.
Refer to About Interference Correction for more information on the different ways you can use the
software to correct interferences.
 On the Results tab, in the Examine group, click on Examine.
Using the Ex am ine Spectra/ M SF w indow for the first tim e

By default, this window opens in the Examine Spectra mode. In this mode, the word Examine is
displayed in the top-left corner of the window. In Examine Spectra mode, you can:
• Modify method parameters directly from the Examine window
• Modify the appearance of the spectra to aid in method development
• Set up spectral displays for reports
removed.
For more information on using this window in Examine Spectra mode, see Examine Spectra
Window.
 To change this window to Examine MSF mode, select MSF from the drop-down list in the
top-left corner of the window. For more information on using MSF, see Overview of How
MSF Functions.
Examine Spectra/MSF/Transient Peaks Window . 259
Overview of Ex am ine Transient P eaks

1. On the Techniques tab, in the ICP group, click on Transient. Syngistix switches to the
Transient mode.
2. On the Results tab, in the Examine group, click on Transient.
Using the Ex am ine Transient P eak s w indow for the first tim e
By default, this window opens in the Examine Transient Peaks mode. In this mode, the word
Examine Transient Peaks is displayed in the top-left corner of the window. In Examine
Transient Peaks mode, you can:
• modify method parameters directly from the Examine window.
• modify the appearance of the spectra to aid in method development.
• set up spectral displays for reports.
removed.
Overview of the Ex am ine Spectra W indow

Note: For information about using multicomponent spectral fitting (MSF), see How to Use the MSF
Window.
The main function of the Examine Spectra window is to display spectra that were saved to a Data
Set so that you can:
1. Modify Method parameters:
• Select Peak Wavelength and Background Correction Points directly from the graphic
display.
• Select Peak Algorithm (peak height or peak area) and the Points/Peak based on your
observation of spectra in the Examine Spectra window.
• Refer to the Update Method Parameters dialog.
2. Change the presentation of the spectra to aid in Method Development so that you can
identify interferences and select appropriate wavelength(s) for an element, etc.
3. Set up spectral displays for your printouts.
4. Troubleshoot possible hardware problems by evaluating standard spectra. (e.g., not
enough sample entering plasma, clogs, etc.)
5. Fine-tune the instrument wavelength calibration.
6. Correct saturated data. See Correcting Saturated Samples for more information.
 On the Results tab, in the Examine group, click on Examine.
Using this w indow

Tip 1: If you w ant to m odify the m ethod, open it before you begin using the Examine Spectra/MSF
window. In order for you to interact with the method, this method must contain the same elements
and wavelengths as the one used for data collection of the samples (data set). To ensure that you
save both the spectral data and the method used to collect them, make sure to select both the
Spectral Data check box and the Copy of Method check box in the Method Editor window Options
page. Optionally, you can open a data set from the Data Reprocessing window and determine the
appropriate method from the Original Method column. You would then open the appropriate method
(using the MethEd button on the Toolbar).
removed.
Tip 2: Save the m ethod, if you wish to retain the changes made to method parameters from the
Examine Spectra/MSF window.
Tip 3: Save spectra to the same data set if you will want to overlay these spectra in the same display
because you can select only one Data Set per Examine session.
M enus
Examine or MSF: Select either Examine or MSF to toggle the window between two different
modes.
Data menu Line menu Method menu Graph menu Replicates List
(This menu is Average, First, or
present only in Last
Examine mode.)
MSF menu Rescale button

(This menu is
present only in MSF
mode.)
Analyte and W avelength selection buttons

First, Previous, Next, Last analyte in the list. Use these buttons to change the currently
displayed analyte. For more information, see Select an Analyte and Wavelength To Display.
List of analytes button. Click this button to view a list of selected analytes. You can select any
analyte from the list to display it.
Wavelength display. Displays the wavelength of the cursor position.
Wavelength ID button. Opens the Wavelength Table dialog.
Spectra Display Options Dialog

Right-click in the Spectra Display and select Display Options in the popup menu. In this dialog,
you can select the layout and number of spectra to be viewed at one time. You can also select
colors to display on screen and for printing a screen of the Spectra Display window. In addition, if
you are using Multicomponent Spectral Fitting, you can select whether or not to display the MSF
analyte spectra along with the uncorrected spectra.
Layout
To select a display layout:
 To use the default layout of all spectra, place a check mark next to Auto-Layout. An
appropriate number of rows and columns will automatically be selected to display all the
spectra. For example, if there are 11 analytes, Auto Layout displays a 4 x 3 grid.
 To customize row and column layout, first remove the check mark next to Auto-Layout.
Then click on the counter spin buttons to specify the number of Rows and Columns in
the display. The number of rows and columns each range from 1 to 16, which means that
1 to 256 panes can be displayed at once.
Selecting Colors
To change Spectra Display screen colors:

1. In the Screen column, click on the drop-down menu for the item you want to change and
select a color.
2. To change the colors without closing the Spectra Display Options dialog, click on Apply.
You can see the effect of the screen color changes in the Spectra Display window and
modify them if desired.
-or-
If you are satisfied with the colors, click on OK to apply the changes and close the dialog.
Note: To return to the original screen colors, click on the Screen button under Default Color Settings.
To change colors for a printout of the Spectra Display screen:

1. In the Printer column, click on the drop-down menu for the item you want to change and
select a color.
2. To change the colors without closing the Spectra Display Options dialog, click on Apply.
To see the effect of the printer color changes, you must print the Spectra Display window
on a color printer (see Printing Spectra).
-or-
If you are satisfied with the colors, click on OK to apply the changes and close the dialog.
Printing Spectra
 To create a printout of the spectra, click the Application button, select Print Active
Window, and select Quick Print or Print Preview. The spectra are printed in black and
white or in color, depending on the type of printer you have. See Printing Spectra.
Displaying MSF Analyte Spectra
 To display the corrected MSF analyte spectra, select the Enable MSF analyte spectra
checkbox on the bottom of the Colors section. You can then view the corrected MSF
spectra in comparison with the uncorrected spectra.
Return to the Default Colors
 To change all of the screen colors or printer colors back to their default settings, select the
Defaults buttons under the Screen or Printer columns.
 To change the colors without closing the Spectra Display Options dialog, click on Apply.
-or-
To apply the change and close the dialog, click on OK.
Spectra
MSF spectra line width – All other spectra line width
 To select line widths for displaying spectra, type a number from 1 to 10 to designate the
relative line width for MSF Spectra and for All Other Spectra.
MSF Spectra Line Width defaults to 1 and All Other spectra Line Width defaults to 2.
Return to the Default User-Configurable Options
 To change all of the user-configurable options (other than the colors) in this dialog back to
their default settings, click the Defaults button.
 To change the user-configurable options without closing the Spectra Display Options
dialog, click on Apply. You can see the effect of the changes in the Spectra Display
window and modify them if desired.
-or-
If you are satisfied with the user-configurable options, click on OK to apply the changes
and close the dialog.
Smoothing: This option default is enabled to smooth the displayed spectra. Analytical values are
not affected. To disable this option, click to uncheck if you do not want smoothing.
Display at End: Check this option to display spectra simultaneously after all spectra are acquired.
Setting a N ew Peak W av elength for the M ethod

When you view the peak for an analyte, the peak's highest intensity may not occur exactly at the
wavelength that you specified in the method. In this situation, you can modify the peak
wavelength in the method directly from the Examine Spectra window.
To set and update the peak wavelength:
1. Display the spectra for the analyte of interest in the Examine Spectra/MSF window.
2. Open the method that was used to generate the data. If you are not sure which method
was used, select Import from Results Library... in the Method button drop down,
then select the results data set.
3. In the Examine Spectra/MSF window, click on the name of the sample in the Samples
list to designate the active spectrum on the graphics display.
4. Drag the vertical cursor to the point of maximum intensity on the peak. The peak
maximum can be determined by observing the value in the Intensity column on the right
side of the window. The Wavelength display shows the cursor position.
5. In the Method menu, select Set Peak Wavelength.
The Wavelength display shows the chosen wavelength, and the peak wavelength symbol
is repositioned to align with the cursor.
6. In the Method menu, select Update Method Parameters...
The Update Method Parameters dialog appears. The current wavelength from the method
and the revised wavelength are shown.
7. Be sure a check mark appears next to Peak Wavelength, then select one of the following:
Update: Click on the Update button to update the method according to the revised
wavelength and any other selections you have made in this dialog. However, the method
changes will not be saved to disk.
Update and Save Method: Click on the Update and Save Method button to modify
the method according to the revised wavelength and any other selections you have made
in this dialog and save the method to disk.
8. You can view the change in the Method Editor on the Spectrometer: Define Elements page.
Tip: The analyte name specified in the method usually contains the reference wavelength (for example
As193.696), but can be renamed if desired.
Ex am ine Spectra W indow Using the Background Correction Point

Option
Note: Auto Background Correction (Auto) is the default setting for Spectral Corrections in all new
methods. It uses a propriety PerkinElmer algorithm that dynamically creates a background
correction spectrum for each ICP replicate and/or average spectrum with no user interaction.
To set a background correction point, choose Add Background Point from the Method menu in
the Examine/MSF window.
Tip 1: When the standards and samples are not matrix matched, it is considered good practice to use at
least a one-point background correction.
Tip 2: For any type of sloping background, use a two-point or Automatic background correction, and
select an alternate wavelength for the element whenever it is possible.
To select Background Correction (BGC) points follow the steps below:

1. Select the active spectrum.
2. Click on the spectrum name in the samples list to designate the active spectrum on the
graphics display.
3. Graphically select a BGC point.
4. Use the drag technique (or the horizontal scroll bar) to position vertical the cursor
wherever you want to place a BGC point. Alternately, you can place a BGC point with your
mouse. To do so, hold down the Ctrl key, point your mouse where you want a BGC point,
and click.
5. Click on the Method menu and then click on Add BGC Point.
Note that green crosshairs appear on the graph to indicate the position of the BGC point.
To reposition an existing BGC point, simply drag it with the mouse cursor.
Note: A red BGC point located at either end of the X axis indicates that the background offset in the
method is outside of the wavelength range shown in Examine. To reposition the BGC point within
the x axis, simply drag it with the mouse cursor. The color returns to green.
6. For a second BGC point repeat step 3-5, otherwise skip to step 7.
You may only select up to two BGC points per spectrum.
Note: To remove a BGC point, drag it to any position outside of the graphic display.
7. Update the Method.

8. In the Method menu, click on the Update Method Parameters option to display the
Update Method Parameters dialog. Note that up to three check marks will appear when
you have selected two BGC points and the offset values for selected BGC point(s) are
listed automatically. For example:
9. Click on the Update button to enter the new BGC points into the Method.
Note: Save the M ethod if you wish to save the updated BGC offset value(s) and correction type (i.e.,
1-Point, 2-Point or None).
Identifying Elem ents Using the B utton

To help you identify an element responsible for an interfering peak:
1. Move the vertical cursor to the interfering peak, note the wavelength, and click on ID.
2. The Wavelength table appears showing a list of elements and wavelengths in the same
spectral measurement range as the current peak.
Update M ethod Param eters Dialog

 To update method parameters, choose Update Method Parameters from the Method menu
in the Examine/MSF window.
The Update Method Parameters dialog has several different uses described below:
For using this dialog to: See:

Set the peak wavelength and update the method. Setting a New Peak Wavelength for the
Method
Adjust Background Correction Using the Background Correction Point
Button
View the Auto Integration Window wavelengths.
Modify the Peak Algorithm and Points/Peak Method Editor Process: Spectral Peak
Processing Page for information on these
parameters.
Update
 Click on the Update button to modify the method according to the selections you have
made in this dialog. However, the method changes will not be saved to disk. If you have
selected that you want to update the method to a new peak wavelength, be sure to select
the check box for Peak Wavelength, then click on Update.
Update and Save M ethod

 Click on the Update and Save Method button to modify the method according to the
selections you have made in this dialog and save the method to disk.
Ex porting Spectra from the Ex am ine M SF W indow

Open the Export Spectra dialog by selecting Export Spectra from the Data menu in the
Examine MSF window. You must have a data set open to use this option.
You can export spectral data, which includes all the data points collected in the spectral
measurement range for each analyte to construct the peak that represents the intensity values.
Then you can view the exported data in a spreadsheet or database program of your choice and
graph the data points, if desired.
For example, after exporting the spectral data, here is an excerpt from the resulting spreadsheet:
The first column lists the wavelengths in the spectral measurement range for the analyte, Cd 228.802. The
number of wavelengths will depend on how the peak was processed as defined by the method parameters
(peak algorithm, points/peak, and, on simultaneous ICP spectrometers, whether signal profiling was used).
The remaining columns list the intensities for each data point in counts per second (cps). By using the
spreadsheet program to graph the following data points, you can re-create the peaks from the Examine
Spectra/MSF window.
Fill in the appropriate choices in the Export Spectra dialog:
• Format: Choose the column format you wish to use for displaying the wavelength data
for each sample. If all samples share the same wavelengths, select the option for Single
Wavelength Column, and the first column in the resulting spreadsheet will display the
wavelengths in the spectral measurement range as shown above. If one or more of the
samples uses a different set of wavelengths, select the option for Wavelength Column for
Each Sample, and the wavelength column in the spreadsheet will be repeated for each
sample.
• Analytes: Choose to export data for the analyte currently displayed in the Examine
window, or choose all analytes.
• Auto BGC: Choose to Export Auto BGC information or not to export any by selecting
None.
• Replicates: Choose to include data from the first or last replicate, the average (mean)
values, or all replicates.
• Data Delimited by: Choose the delimit character preferred by your spreadsheet or
database program. Columns of data can be separated by commas, tabs, or semicolons.
• File name: Select a name for the export file. Choose the same name as the data set or
create a different name.
• Extension: Choose the extension preferred by your spreadsheet or database program.
• Directory: Use the default Reports directory or browse to locate the directory where you
want to save the exported file.
Printing Spectra
You can print the spectra that are shown in the Spectra Display or Examine Spectra windows. To
adjust the printout colors, right click on the spectra and select Display Option from the popup
menu. Change the colors in the Display Options dialog. If the printer color selections have been
modified, and you wish to return to the default colors, click on Printer under the default color
settings. Click OK to close the dialog.
To print spectra:
1. Click on the Spectra Display or Examine Spectra window to make it the active window.
Note that the title bar of an active window is a different color from other windows. (The
colors displayed on your screen depend on the Windows colors you have defined for your
PC.)
3. In the Print dialog that appears, check that the correct printer is shown. If you need to
select another printer, click the drop-down arrow next to the Printer Name field. Click on
the Printer name to select it. To change other setup options such as the paper size, click
on Properties.
The Spectra Display window always uses a layout of three rows and two columns for
printouts. Changing the layout on the screen will not affect the printout. Up to six spectra
are printed on one page. When you print the Examine Spectra window, the spectra are
overlaid in one graph on the page.
Ex am ine/ M FS or Ex am ine Transient P eaks W indow

Selecting an Analyte, W avelength or Peak to Display
Use the toolbar buttons along the bottom of the Examine window to select different analytes to
display. You can also access these commands from the Data menu.
The analyte selection toolbar for spectra looks like this:
The analyte selection toolbar for peaks looks like this:
Select: To display:
The Analytes list, which lists the wavelength for each element that was selected from Go
to Analyte.
Double-click on one of the analyte names. You can then view that wavelength for all of
the sample(s) listed in the legend.
The first analyte in the Analytes list.
The prior element in the Analytes list (starting from the analyte that was displayed
before you clicked on this button). If you continue to press this button, you will make
analyte selections that move back up toward the top of the Analytes list. At the top
of the list, this button ceases to function. Then, you can press the Next button or Last
button to move down the list.
The next analyte in the Analytes list (starting from the analyte that was displayed before
you clicked on this button). If you continue to press this button, you will make analyte
selections that move downward toward the bottom of the Analytes list. At the last
analyte in the list, this button ceases to function. Then, you can click on the Back button
or First button to move back up the list.
The last analyte in the Analytes list.
Select a Wavelength.
Note: In the Examine Transient Peaks window, time appears in place of wavelength.
How to Use the Ex am ine M SF W indow

Before using the Examine MSF window, select MSF from the list at the top left of the Examine
Spectra window. The window toggles from Examine mode to MSF mode. The two modes share
much of the same functionality. However, several differences exist between the Examine Spectra
window and the Examine MSF window. These differences are shown in the following pictures and
also described below.
To start using the Examine MSF window, select spectra to display:
1. Click on the Data menu, and then click on Data Set.
2. Complete the Data Selection Wizard to select samples and analytes.
The Examine MSF window displays the first analyte. You can now use the MSF menu to assign
values for an MSF model (blank, analyte, interferent). You save the model as an MSF file, to be
used during analysis or reprocessing to correct for spectral interferences.
W hat You See in the Ex amine M SF W indow

The window is split vertically with the graph on the left and the legend on the right. Notice that
the default background color in MSF mode is different than Examine Spectra mode to help you tell
at a glance which mode you are using. The graph shows you the spectrum for the selected
analyte. The legend shows you the list of samples for each analyte.
The legend displays columns to indicate and set the MSF values, as well as the visible attribute,
line style scaling, and offset. Since there is an entry for each sample, it is easy to tell at a glance
how these settings are adjusted relative to all of the samples. More importantly, all of the samples'
intensities are listed together in one column. Also, you can click on one sample and its spectrum is
identified in the graph with data points (which are indicated by small squares along the line).
In Examine MSF mode, there is no Method menu. Instead there is an MSF menu which you use to
assign values for an MSF model that you can use to correct for spectral interferences.
Along the bottom of the graph are buttons for Select First Analyte, Select Previous Analyte, Select
Next Analyte, Select Last Analyte, and Select Analyte.
The replicates list is grayed out in Examine MSF mode.
You can easily allow more space for the graph or legend. To do so, position your mouse over
"splitter bar" that separates the left and right panes. Your cursor changes to a double-headed
arrow. Drag left or right to increase the size of a pane. (If your cursor does not change to a
double-headed arrow, you must disable the "auto-position splitter" option in the Examine Display
Options dialog.)
Note: The Examine MSF window is used to create the MSF model. To view the results of using MSF in an
analysis, you must open the Results Display and the Spectral Display windows. The Results Display
window lists the analytical results and indicates that the sample was processed by MSF (as
applicable, the .msf file name will be listed for each analyte in the sample). The Spectra Display
window shows both the uncorrected data and the MSF-corrected analyte data.
How to Use the Ex am ine Transient Peaks W indow

Before you begin using the Examine Transient Peaks window, open the method that was used to
generate the peaks. If you are not sure which method was used, select Import From Results
Library... from the Method button drop down, then select the results data set. If you want to use
a different method, it must contain some (but not all) of the elements that were originally used
when the data was collected.
Selecting peak s to display

1. Open the Examine Transient Peaks window (in the Toolbar, click on the Examine button).
Select Analyte or Overlay from the top-left drop-down list, if necessary. If you select
Analyte mode you will be able to compare peaks from a single data set. If you select
Overlay mode you will be able to compare peaks from multiple data sets.
2. In the Examine window, click on the Data menu, and click on Select Data Set in Analyte
Mode or Add Data Set Signals in Overlay Mode.
3. Complete the Data Selection Wizard to select samples and analytes.
W hat You See in the Ex amine Transients Peak s W indow

The window is split vertically with the graph (Analyte) on the left and the legend (Samples) on the
right. The graph shows all peaks of a chosen analyte for all the samples. The legend shows you
the AA and BG peaks which are graphed. It displays columns to indicate and set the hide visible,
scaling and offset. Since there is an entry for each sample, it is easy to tell at a glance how these
settings are adjusted relative to all of the samples. More importantly, all of the samples' values are
listed together in one column. Also you can click on one sample and it is highlighted in the graph.
Along the bottom of the graph are buttons which are operable in the Analyte Mode. As shown in the
illustration below the buttons from left to right are: Select First Analyte, Select Previous Analyte,
Select Next Analyte, Select Last Analyte, Select Analyte from the list. (You can also access
these commands from the Data Menu of the Analyte Mode.)
At the top of the graph there is a drop-down list to select which replicate mode is displayed. There are
four replicate modes: Average Replicate, First Replicate, Last Replicate, and All Replicates.
To allow more space for the legend or graph.
1. By default, the Auto Position Splitter Bar is checked in the Examine Transient Peaks
Options Dialog. This causes the system to automatically position the splitter bar, which
separates the graph from the legend, so that the legend is exactly wide enough to display
the text it contains. You can easily allow more space for the graph or legend.
2. First uncheck the Auto Position Splitter Bar check box in the Examine Transient Peaks
Options Dialog, then position your mouse over "splitter bar" that separates the left and
right panes. Your cursor changes to a double-headed arrow.
3. Drag left or right to increase the size of a pane. (If your cursor does not change to a
double-headed arrow, you must disable the "auto-position splitter" option in the Examine
Display Options dialog.)
Ex am ine Transient Peaks Options: W indow Colors

This tab, in the Examine Transients Peaks Options window, allows you to select the colors for
the screen and your printer for various parts of the Examine Transients Peaks window.
Note: You can choose Printer colors in this dialog and then print the graph display in the Examine
Transient Peaks window as follows:
1. Right-click on the Examine Transient Peaks window and select Display Options from the
popup menu.
2. Select the Window tab to Select colors for the following items:
• Axes and Label
• Graph Title
• Analyte Mode Background
• Overlay Mode Background
• Read Delay and Read End Marks
• Time Cursor
• Axis Grid Divisions
• Active Signal Points
• Peak Maximum Mark
3. Click on the OK button to apply your choices.
You can always return to the default settings by clicking on the Defaults button.
Ex am ine Transient Peak s Options: Line Colors

This tab, in the Examine Transients Peaks Options window, allows you to select the colors styles
and line widths for the lines which will appear on the screen and your printer. Clicking on the style
column of the style section displays a drop-down menu of various line choices which you can
select to display in the Examine Transient peaks window.
 Click on the OK button to apply your choices.

You can always return to the default settings by clicking on the Set Defaults button.
An Overview of How M SF Functions

Multicomponent Spectral Fitting (MSF) uses multivariate calibration to determine the concentration
of an analyte. Multivariate calibration is analogous to a mathematical filter that can distinguish
between the components of a complex spectral profile. The signal contribution of three
components can be separated from the analyte:
• interference
• background
• noise
Although MSF is very useful for correction of spectral overlap it requires that you have knowledge
of the expected components in the real samples (for an exception, see Masking). In practice, this
means you will need to prepare individual solutions for the blank, interferent(s), and analyte.
Note 1: MSF is not suitable where there is complete overlap of analyte and interferent (In that case, use
the Inter Element Correction (IEC). For all other types of spectral overlap, MSF is a powerful
technique that can be used to improve detection limits and precision.
Note 2: Even when there are no interferences, you can use MSF's ability to improve detection limits and
precision. (Simply create a two-component model that is composed of just the blank spectra and
the analyte spectra.) MSF is beneficial when:
• it is difficult to assess BGC points, or

• the noise contribution is significant, such as in measurements near an analyte's detection
limit
For a two-component model, MSF may save you time because:
MSF can automatically correct for the background so there is no need to select BGC points.
MSF uses all of the information about the peak so there is no need to select peak wavelength.
Note 3: MSF may be used along with internal standardization to further improve precision, which may be
especially important for measuring analytes in a complex matrix.
Steps to Using M SF
An overview of how to perform Multicomponent Spectral Fitting is shown below, along with
information about how the software uses input data to calculate analyte concentration:
For an explanation: In the Syngistix software, click where appears.

I nter-Elem ent Correction
About Spectral Interferences

The presence of Spectral Interferences can cause the results of an analysis to be incorrect.
The software provides several techniques for minimizing or completely removing spectral
interferences. For information on Syngistix interference correction techniques, see About
Interference Correction.
About Spectral I nterferences

Spectral interferences encountered in ICP-OES fall into four different categories, each with its
own causes and remedies.
Type of Interference
Cause
Simple Background Shift
A high concentration of the interfering
A shift in background that is essentially constant over a analyte may emit a continuum of
given range. The background may shift either up or down. radiation in the given wavelength range
Remedy
Set a background correction point
somewhere near, but not falling on, the
profile of the analyte you are measuring.
Or select a different wavelength that is
not affected by the interferent.
Sloping Background Shift Cause

(1) Overlapping of an analyte line by one
A shift that occurs on only one side of the given wavelength
wing of another severely broadened line
range
nearby
(2) Molecular emission bands are
sometimes present in the ICP discharge,
especially when the plasma is not
shielded from the ambient atmosphere.
Remedy
Since the slope of the interferent is
constant on either side of the peak, set
two background correction points,
one on either side of the peak of the
analyte you are measuring.
Inter-Element Correction . 279
Direct Spectral Overlap Cause

Two lines may appear to be overlapped
Ideally no interfering emission line can fall directly on the
when they cannot be resolved by the
analyte emission line; however, because spectral lines have
spectrometer.
a finite width and measurement systems are imperfect,
direct spectral overlap does occur. Remedy
Use an alternate wavelength for the
analyte you are measuring, if available.
Or use the Inter-Element Correction
(IEC) technique.
Complex Background Shift Cause

This interference is usually caused by the
This type of shift is represented by a shift in background
occurrence of a number of intense,
intensity that varies significantly on either side of the
closely spaced emission lines nearby, and
analyte line.
perhaps directly overlapping, the analyte
wavelength.
Remedy
Use an alternate wavelength for the
analyte you are measuring, if available.
Or use the Multi-spectral component
Fitting (MSF) technique.
About Interference Correction

Syngistix offers several methods to correct spectral interference.
Choose a topic that describes a method you are interested in learning more about:
• Setting Background Correction Points
• Using Inter-Element Correction (IEC)
IEC corrects interferences as long as the concentration of the interfering element
remains within the linear concentration range, the matrix remains constant, and the
plasma conditions remain unchanged.
For information on the similarities and differences between IEC and MSF, see IEC or MSF:
Which to Use.
• Using MSF (Multicomponent Spectral Fitting)
MSF uses mathematical models to distinguish analyte spectra from interfering
spectra. MSF involves a very different process for interference correction as
compared to IEC.
As well as correcting for interferences, MSF can improve detection limits and precision. MSF
uses a multiple linear regression to fit the models created to unknown spectra during an
analysis. Since, only the peak shapes need to remain constant, typically, the models are
independent of concentration, plasma conditions, and matrix effects.
• For information on how to apply MSF, see Using the MSF Menu
• For background and tutorial information about MSF, see Overview of How MSF
Functions.
IEC and M SF: W hich To Use

IEC and MSF are two techniques you can use to minimize or remove spectral interferences.
Inter-Element Correction (IEC) uses mathematical correction factors to reallocate emission
intensities. Multicomponent Spectral Fitting (MSF) uses multivariate calibration to determine
the concentration of an analyte.
Use I EC if...
You expect direct spectral overlaps.
You are taking data for use by an organization that requires Interelement Correction.
Use M SF if...
You want better interference correction, better detection limits, and better precision than are
normally obtained with IEC.
I EC and M SF: Sim ilarities, Differences, and R estrictions on Use

Sim ilarities
Both IEC and MSF:
• Involve mathematical adjustment/recalculation of intensity data
• Require an initial analysis to create a mathematical model
Save the model as a file for use in the Process Page/Spectral Corrections tab of the method.
Differences
IEC MSF
Model created and IEC Model Builder window Examine MSF window
edited
Model stored IEC file MSF file
Model used in the Overlap Correction set to IEC Processing mode is set to MSF
method and IEC table name selected and MSF table name selected
in method in method
Restrictions on use You must use the same You must use the same
resolution, profiling, resolution and profiling
background correction points, settings for data collection as
and plasma parameter entries for end use.
for IEC data collection as for
end use.
Overview of the IEC P rocess

Inter-element Correction (IEC) is a method of correcting for spectral interferences. It
uses mathematical correction factors to reallocate emission intensities. Use the Inter-element
Correction Model Builder window to set up and update IEC corrections for the elements and
wavelengths you are analyzing. IEC can be run using Data Reprocessing or in an analysis.
Before you use this window, you must complete the Preliminary Steps described below. Once
the data have been collected, use the IEC window as a tool to interactively determine the
factors. This window also gives you the option of changing certain method parameters and
having the new settings incorporated into the calculated IEC factors.
Prelim inary Steps

Before you create an Inter-element Correction Table (IEC), you must:
Open the Method Editor and, in your method, define the calibration standards and a pure
solution for each interfering analyte.
Run an analysis, making sure you store the data so that it can be reprocessed using IEC.
Once analysis is completed, set up an IEC model to calculate factors and set correction limits.
Using I EC
Here is a summary of how to use the IEC model.
• Open the IEC Model Builder from the Tools menu
• Create and save the model (the .IEC file)
• Specify the IEC file in the method and save the method
• Analyze your samples or reprocess your data
N otes:
You should have the same Resolution setting, background correction points, and plasma
parameter entries for IEC data collection as for the analysis you want to correct. If you
change any of these parameters in the method, you should recreate IEC factors.
• If you have some elements for which you want to create IEC factors for multiple
wavelengths, refer to Multiple Wavelengths per Element.
• If you do not follow the procedures in Multiple Wavelengths per Element, you will get
errors if you try to collect IEC data for any element with more than one wavelength
in the method.
Interelement Correction M odel Builder

How I EC W ork s
When the calibration standards and interfering analyte solutions are read, Syngistix builds a
mathematical matrix that defines the concentrations observed for each analyte. This matrix,
which is stored in the IEC table file, is a model of the spectral interferences expected from
the elements you analyzed.
Each IEC standard solution is measured for the analytes you designate in the active method.
(It is possible to deselect or "disable" elements from this analysis using the Enable/Disable
Elements dialog.)The IEC correction factors are the ratios of the apparent concentration for
each analyte to the concentration measured for the IEC reference element.
You do not have to analyze an IEC Standard solution for every element in your analysis, only
those that produce interferences you want to correct for using IEC. If you skip IEC Standard
solutions, Syngistix assumes that there is no interference from these elements and will use
zeros for these elements in the IEC table.
Creating an I nterelem ent Correction Table

You create an Inter-element Correction Table by entering information on the pages of the
IEC Model Builder window. The following steps provide an overview of this process. For
complete information about using each page, click on the page name in the steps below.
To create a new IEC table:
Note: Before you set up the IEC model, run an analysis as you normally would and save the data.
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Data Correction group, select IEC.

The IEC Model Builder window Set Up page appears.
2. If another IEC model already exists, and you want to start a new one, select New
from the IEC drop-down menu. Then select IEC Model. (This option is grayed out
unless the IEC Model Builder window is open.)
3. On the Set Up page, from the IEC drop-down menu, click on Open... to select the
Results Data Set to be used in determining the factors. Enter any remarks you
want to save with the file.
4. On the Set Limits page you can enter correction limits for each analyte in the Minimum
Concentration for Interference Correction column. Note that you can skip this page and
set low factors to zero after calculation using the Calculate Factors page.
5. On the Calculate Factors page, select samples (the pure solutions of the
interferents), and then match the various analytes requiring interference correction
with the samples that contain the pure interfering element. Factors are automatically
calculated after you choose an interfering analyte.
6. On the Summarize Factors page you can print the factors. You can also edit the
factors on this page before saving.
7. Save the IEC model by selecting Save from the IEC drop-down menu. Then type a
file name.
8. Click Update Method to update analytes in the method which require IEC
correction.
To modify and re-save the IEC factors:

• If you modify the IEC factors and want to save the changes, select Save from the
IEC drop-down menu
• If you modify the IEC factors and want to save the changes but also retain the
original file, selecting Save As from the IEC drop-down menu.
• To save the information as a text file, select Save IEC Factors as text from the
IEC drop-down menu.
To use an existing IEC model with a new result data set:
You can recalculate the factors of an existing IEC model to use with a different results data
set, i.e., a results data set other than the one you used to create the IEC model.
1. Create a new IEC table or open an existing one.
2. On the Set Up page, from the IEC drop-down menu, click on Open... to select a
different results data set.
A warning message appears asking if you want to recalculate IEC factors.

3. Click on Yes to recalculate IEC factors based on the selected result data set. (If you
click No, the current model is cleared.)
The samples in the selected results data set are checked against samples in the IEC
model.
If the new results data set does not contain samples that are in the current IEC
model, a message appears informing you that samples are missing.
If the new results data set contains the same samples as in the IEC model, the new
results set is checked for duplicate sample IDs. If duplicate sample IDs exist, you are
given an opportunity to choose one sample from each group of duplicates.
Samples from the new result data set are checked if they contain analytes that are
part of the current IEC model. A message appears that describes each sample along
with its missing analytes.
M odifying an I nterelem ent Correction Table

You can modify an existing IEC table by reanalyzing IEC standards, analyzing new IEC
standards or directly editing the table.
removed.
To edit IEC factors directly:

1. From the IEC drop-down menu, click on Open...
The IEC window, Set Up page appears.
2. Select the IEC file name, or on the Set Up page, click on Open... to find and select
the results data set used.
3. Enter new factors on the Calculate Factors Page.
To save the changes:
1. If you modified the IEC factors and want to save the changes, from the IEC drop-
down menu, click on Save.
2. If you modified the IEC factors and want to save the changes but also retain the
original file, from the IEC drop-down menu, click on Save As.
3. To save the information as a text file, from the IEC drop-down menu, click on Save
IEC Factors As Text.
Set Up Page
Use this page to select the Results Data Set containing the data to be used in determining
the factors. Enter comments in the Remarks field.
To display this page:

 On the Analysis tab, in the Data Correction group, click on IEC. The Inter-
Element Correction Model Builder opens with the Set Up page displayed.
To use this page:
1. If you already have a model that you want to change, click on the Results data set
browse button.
2. Select a file name, or enter a new file name.
3. Click on OK.
To open a data set:
1. From the IEC drop-down menu, click on Open to display the Open dialog
2. to search for an existing data set. The Select Results Data Set window appears.
3. Click the Browse button if you need to search for another data base. The Open
dialog appears.
4. Search for and select the file.
5. Click on Open. The data sets are listed in the Select Results Data Set window.
6. Select a data set.
7. Click on OK.
After you have selected a data set, the file name appears in the Results Data Set field. The
Method Used to Collect Data field is automatically filled in.
Remarks: Use this entry field to type your comments regarding the IEC table.
Set Lim its Page

On the Set Limits page of the IEC Model Builder you can define the correction limit for
elements that you are measuring. For example, you can enter the detection limits of the
analytes. Any apparent concentration from an interfering element at or below the value
entered should be set to zero. Note that the units should be the same as the calibration units
entered on the Calibration page in the method.
Note: You may choose to skip this page and simply set low factors to zero after calculation using
the Calculate Factors page.

1. On the Analysis tab. in the Data Correction group, IEC .
2. Click the Set Limits tab.
To use this page:
Analytes: This column automatically lists the analytes from the results data set chosen on
the Set up page. Read through this list to make sure that these are the analytes for which
IEC factors should be calculated.
Minimum Concentration for Interference Correction: You can manually change any
entry in the Minimum Concentration column by typing in a new entry on the Set Limits page.
You can also double-click on the Minimum Concentration heading to display the Minimum
Concentration Column Fill dialog. The concentration limit you enter in this dialog will be
entered for all analytes on the Set Limits page. Click OK to close the dialog.
You can also select a range of entries or select noncontiguous entries and then display the
Minimum Concentration Column Fill dialog.
To select a range of entries, click on an entry, press the Shift key and click on another entry.
All of the entries in between these two will be selected.
To select noncontiguous entries, click on an entry, then press the Control key and click on
additional entries.
Once your entries are selected, right click. When the pop-up Edit menu appears, click on
Column fill... and the Minimum Concentration Column Fill dialog will appear. You can also
display the Minimum Concentration Column Fill dialog by right clicking and selecting Column
fill....
Units: The units are the standard units, not the sample units.
Using Correction Limits: The correction limits are applied automatically and are used
during IEC factor creation and during sample analysis.
During IEC factor creation:
If an apparent analyte concentration (concentration measured at the analyte line, but due to
the interferent instead of the analyte) is greater than or equal to the analyte's correction
limit, an IEC factor for the analyte/interferent pair is calculated and entered into the IEC
factors table.
If an apparent analyte concentration is less than the correction limit, the IEC factor entered
into the IEC table for the analyte/interferent pair is zero. This is because the effect of the
interferent on the analyte was not sufficient to warrant a correction.
During sample analysis:
If an apparent analyte concentration is greater than or equal to the correction limit, the
software then applies the IEC factor to the analyte concentration and a final result is
calculated and appears in the Results Display window.
If an apparent analyte concentration calculated by applying IEC is less than the correction
limit, correction for this analyte/interferent pair is not performed. This is because the effect
of the interferent on the analyte was not sufficient to warrant a correction.
Calculate Factors Page

The Calculate Factors page is used to match the analytes requiring interference correction
with the samples that contain pure interfering element.
The formula for calculation is:
For an example of how factors are calculated, see Interelement Correction Model Builder:
Summarize Factors Page.

1. On the Analysis tab. in the Data Correction group, IEC.
2. Click on the Calculate Factors tab.
Using this page:
1. Select an analyte that requires IEC correction.
Use the control buttons on the top of the page to scroll through the names of all the
analytes in the active method.
2. Click on the Select Samples button or double-click on the Sample ID header.
In the Select Samples dialog that appears, select the samples (that is, the pure
solutions of the interferents) which will appear on the Calculate Factors page. Click
on OK to return to the Calculate Factors page.
3. For each sample, designate the interfering analyte by selecting the analyte name
from the drop-down list in the Interfering Analyte column. Select None if you want
to turn off that sample during the calculation of factors for the current analyte.
4. Click on Display Wavelength Table to display the Wavelength Table dialog. Use
this Table to search for elements at a particular wavelength or to choose
wavelengths not found on the Method Periodic Table. Additional information such as
intensities and BEC’s are given for certain elements.
5. The software automatically calculates factors for all combinations of interfering
analyte with the active analyte.
The Actual Concentration of Interferent and Apparent Analyte Concentration and IEC
factor are automatically entered.
6. Any factors that are very small can be set to zero by clicking on the check boxes
under Set to Zero. Any factors not calculated are set to zero.
Note: Any errors encountered are displayed in the IEC Factors column. Error types are:
#No sample: Sample ID not found.

#No analyte: Interfering Analyte not found.
#DIV/0: IEC Factor calculation encountered a divide by zero error.
Sum m arize Factors P age

Use this page to view the IEC table selected on the Setup Page, and, if needed, edit factors
directly. The values calculated on the Calculate Factors page are transferred automatically to
this summary page. You can update the method to use the factors and print the factors. You
can also edit the factors on this page before you save them.

1. On the Analysis tab. in the Data Correction group, IEC.
2. Click on the Summarize Factors tab on the bottom of the Interelement Correction Window.
Using this page:
Each factor is applied to the analysis results of the analyte shown in the row to compensate
for interference caused by the Reference Element in the column. If you want to change a
factor, you can either edit directly (by double-clicking it), reanalyze standards or analyze new
standards.
I EC Factors
Analytes: These are analytes from the method used to create the IEC table.
Interferent Reference Element: These are the names for the elements whose signals
may be interfering with the analyte signal. Each analysis element is also a potential
Interferent Reference Element.
For a given analyte, you cannot have IEC factors for more than one Reference Element per
interfering element. For example, if multiple Fe lines are used in an analysis and the analyst
needs to correct for Fe interference on an analyte line, only one of the Fe lines (i.e.
Reference Elements) can have a non-zero IEC factor in the row for that analyte.
Double-click on an Interferent Reference Element IEC factor to display the User Entered IEC
Factors dialog, where you can choose Automatic Calculation or Manually Set Factors.
Note: You can also enter a factor manually into the spreadsheet: Click on the entry and type the
new factor.
Show: Click the radio button to either Show All Analytes and all factors, even the ones
that are zero; or Only Non-zero Factors, which limits the display to only those analytes
and interfering elements where at least one value in every row and column is not zero.
Update Method: After you save the IEC file (File/Save command), click the Update
Method button to update the method in the Method Editor. When you click Update Method,
the name of the IEC file is entered in the Method Editor, Process Page, Spectral Corrections
page of the active method. The Interference Correction on all analytes with nonzero factors
will be set to IEC. IEC is automatically selected to perform Overlap Correction for analytes
with nonzero factors.
Print Factors: Click the Print Factors button to print the table of factors as currently
displayed. Print the complete table showing all analytes, or the table that contains only
analytes and interfering elements where each row and column contains at least one nonzero
IEC factor. Select the radio button to print in either Portrait (vertical) or Landscape
(horizontal)
How Factors are Calculated: The value of each factor is equal to the apparent analyte
concentration divided by the interferent concentration. The apparent analyte concentration is
the concentration measured at the analyte line, but due to the interferent instead of the
analyte.
When you analyze samples, the software multiplies the interferent concentration by the IEC
factor. It then subtracts this product from the measured analyte concentration to result in
the corrected analyte concentration.
For example, suppose you are determining As and you know that Fe is creating an
interference. You find that:
The IEC factor is calculated at:
You then analyze a sample with the measured results of:
Multiplying:
40 ppb is the signal in As that is actually due to Fe.

The corrected concentration of:
M ultiple W avelengths per Elem ent

Refer to the following guidelines when you want to create IEC factors for elements with
multiple wavelengths.
Note: If you do not use these guidelines, you will get errors if you try to collect or use IEC data for
any element with more than one wavelength in the method.
• For a given analyte, you cannot have IEC factors for more than one Reference
Element per interfering element.
For example, if multiple Fe lines are used in an analysis and the analyst needs to correct for
Fe interference on an analyte line, only one of the Fe lines (i.e. Reference Elements) can
have a non-zero IEC factor in the row for that analyte.
• Also, it is important when an IEC Standard for an interfering element with multiple
lines in a method is analyzed, that the other "elements" defined for the interfering
element are not analyzed as analytes. Otherwise, you would be making a correction
for an element on itself.
For example, you would be correcting for the interference of Fe on Fe.
• To ensure that only one Reference Element per interfering element has IEC factors
associated with a given analyte, it is best to analyze only one IEC Standard per
interfering element. To avoid the situation where an element is corrected for
interference upon itself, you can disable data collection for those elements by using
the Enable/Disable Elements function. See the Analysis Menu.
Ex am ple 1
As an example, suppose you have a method that contains three Fe lines named Fe1, Fe2,
and Fe3. For the simplest case, we will use Fe1 as the Reference Element for all IEC
corrections. To create IEC factors for Fe interference correction:
1. Calibrate using the method as usual using the Calib page.
2. When ready to analyze the Fe IEC Standard on the Analyze page:
a. Select Fe1 as the Reference Element.
b. In the Analysis menu, open the Enable/Disable function and disable Fe2 and Fe3.
c. Analyze the Fe IEC Standard.
Note: Remember to re-enable Fe2 and Fe3 before measuring IEC Standards for other elements.
Ex am ple 2
In a more complex example, suppose that you are using the same method containing three
Fe lines, but you want to use Fe1 as the Reference Element for correction of Fe on As and
Fe2 for correction of Fe on Cr. You may want to do a correction of this sort so that you can
match an interferent atom line with an analyte atom line and interferent ion line with an
analyte ion line to improve the quality of the interference correction. To create the Fe IEC
factors for this situation:
1. Calibrate as usual.
2. To create the factor for correction of Fe on As,
a. Select Fe1 as the Reference Element.
b. Disable Fe2, Fe3, and Cr.
c. Analyze the Fe IEC Standard.
d. Select Fe2 as the next Reference Element.
e. Re-enable Fe2 and Cr and disable Fe1 and As (Fe3 should still be disabled).
f. Analyze the Fe IEC Standard.
Remember to enable the disabled elements before measuring other IEC Standards.
Calibration and Calculations
Calibration and Calculations

The following calibrations and calculations are explained in detail:
Calibration
• Linear Calibration
• Linear Forced through Zero
• Linear Bracketing Calibration
• Non-Linear Calibration
• Non-Linear Bracketing Algorithm
• Correlation Coefficient
• Weighted Linear Calibration
• Method of Additions, Sample Intercept
• Method of Additions, Calculated Intercept
• Method of Additions Calibrate
Calculations
• Standard Deviation and Precision
• Reslope
• Internal Standardization
Calibration and Calculations . 295
Edit Calibration
You use the Edit Calibration window to recalculate the calibration curve for the selected
element or elements using Include and Reanalyze options. When you first display this
window, the Include option is selected for each calibration standard.
Note: In this window, you can make changes to the Calibration Equation. These changes will be
saved in the Method Editor.
Analyte: Select an analyte from the drop-down list.
First, Previous, Next, Last Buttons Use these buttons to change the
currently displayed analyte.
Calibration Display: The graphical display of the analyte calibration showing the standard
point residual lines, excluded points (using the check boxes in the Include column of the
table to the right of this display.
Slope: This is the slope of the calibration curve. For a nonlinear curve, this is the slope at
zero concentration.
Intercept: This is the zero concentration, which is the value of the point at which the
calibration curve crosses the Y-axis.
Correlation Coefficient: This indicates how well the data fit the calibration curve. In
general, the better the fit, the larger the correlation coefficient. A value of 1.0 indicates a
perfect fit.
Last Sample Concentration: This is the concentration of the last sample analyzed in the
calibration units. A value will only be given for unknown samples.
Calibration Table:
Std#: The number of each standard as defined in the current method.
Include: Click in the check box to select each calibration standard that you want the
system to use when it recalculates the calibration curve. With multi-element instruments, this
option affects only the calibration curve for the selected element.
Standard ID: The name assigned to the standard in the method.

Entered Concentration: The concentration of the calibration standard that you entered on
the Calibration page in the Method Editor. If you want to change the value, you must do this
Calculated Concentration: The concentration of the calibration standard calculated from
the calibration curve.
Residual Error: The amount the calibration standard deviates from the entered concentration
as a percent.
Reanalyze: The system reanalyzes all the calibration standards that have this option
selected and uses the new results to recalculate the calibration curve. With multi-element
instruments, this option affects the calibration curves for all the elements. The system will
measure the signals for all the elements selected in the method and use the new values to
produce new calibration curves for all the elements.
Note: Reanalyzing cannot be done with MSA (Method of Additions), if the curve was opened via
Recall Calibration. In this case, the Reanalyze check boxes are disabled and cannot be
selected.
Calibration Equation: This is the calibration equation selected on the Calibration page of
the Method Editor window.
Reanalyze Standards: This shows the number of selected standards to be reanalyzed.
Reanalyze: The system reanalyze the calibration standards and recalculates the calibration
curve using all the options that you have selected.
To edit a calibration curve:
1. Display the Edit Calibration dialog.
2. Select a desired Analyte from the drop-down menu to display the calibration
curve you want to change.
3. To include a standard listed in the table, click the corresponding check box in the
Include column.
4. To reanalyze one or more standards, click the check box of the desired standard in
the Reanalyze column.
The selected standard appears in the Reanalyze standards table. You can also select
to Reanalyze for all analytes or Reanalyze for selected analytes only.
5. To recalculate a new calibration curve using a different equation, select a different
Calibration equation from the drop-down list.
6. Press the Reanalyze button.
To edit calibration display options:
 Right-click on the graph and select Display Options. The Calibration Display
Options window appears. Select colors for the screen and printer.
To Delete a Calibration:
 On the Results tab, in the Calibration group, click on New Calibration.
Linear Calibration Algorithm
This calibration curve is established by assuming that the relationship between concentration
(the X values) and intensity (the Y values) is linear and that the following equation describes
this relationship:
Y = MX + B
where:
X = concentration
Y = intensity
M = slope of the calibration curve
B = y-axis intercept
Given two or more data points, the values for M and B are calculated using the following
equations [1, 2].
n = number of standards (includes the blank)
In this equation, the intensity of the blank is subtracted from all solutions and included in the
[1]
[2]
An example of this calculation is described below. The Syngistix Report shows the following
information for Ag: 328.068:
Where:
The intensity of the blank is subtracted from the Net Intensity to get the Corrected Intensity
which is calculated as:
52083.0 ( 59.6)=52142.9
Then the Corrected Intensity is used to calculate the concentration as …
(52142.9-0.0)/101200=0.5
… using the equation Y=MX+B to solve for X, so X=(Y-B)/M
Please note that the numbers derived from the calculation above may differ slightly from the
intensity value displayed in the Syngistix report, because Syngistix calculates Intensity values
using additional significant figures for the Concentration value; these additional significant
figures are not displayed on the printed Syngistix report.
Linear Forced through Zero

A calibration curve defined using this equation is forced to go through zero intensity and zero
concentration.
(the X values) and intensity (the Y values) is linear and that the following equation describes
this relationship:
Y = MX
where:
X = concentration
Y = intensity
M = slope of the calibration curve
The intercept is forced to be zero.
Given 2 or more data points, the values for M are calculated using the following equation.
N on-Linear Calibration Algorithm
(the X values) and intensity (the Y values) is a curvilinear one that can be described by the
following polynomial equation:
X = concentration
Y = intensity
A = curvature
B = slope
C = y-axis intercept
Given 3 or more data points, the values for A, B and C are calculated using the following
equations [1, 2, 3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Where:
N on-Linear Bracketing Algorithm
(the X values) and intensity (the Y values) is a curvilinear one that can be described by the
following polynomial equation:
where:
X = concentration
Y = intensity
A = curvature
B = slope
C = y-axis intercept
Given 3 or more data points, the values for A, B and C are calculated using the following
equations [1, 2, 3].
In this equation, the blank is subtracted from all solutions and included in the calculation of
the calibration curve.
The use of a blank is optional. If a blank is not used, a zero intensity is assumed. In this
equation, the intensity of the blank is subtracted from all solutions, but is not included in the
[1]
[2]
[3]
Where:
Correlation Coefficient
Correlation coefficients are calculated in Syngistix using three different formulas, based on
the current calibration equation.
Linear Calculated Intercept / Linear Bracketing
Where:
X = concentration
Y = intensity
n = number of standards+1
Based only on concentration (intensity) points, not the calculated curve.
Coefficient may be 1.0 even if points are not on the curve.
For Linear Calculated Intercept, the blank (0,0) point is included, which increases the number
of standards (n) by 1.
Linear Zero Intercept
Where:
X = concentration
Y = intensity
n = number of standards
Based only on concentration (intensity) points, not the calculated curve
Coefficient may be 1.0 even if points are not on the curve
Nonlinear (Calculated Intercept / Zero Intercept / Bracketing)
Where:
X = concentration (entered by user)
Y = concentration (measured from calibration curve)
n = number of standards
Based on actual and measured concentrations (the delta between the user-entered value and
the calculated curve).
Will work for linear or non-linear curves
Coefficient will be 1.0 only if all points are on the curve.
For Nonlinear Calculated Intercept, the blank (0,0) point is included, which increases the
number of standards (n) by 1.
Standard Deviation and P recision

The equation used to calculate Standard Deviation (SD) is as follows:
Where:
The equation used to calculate precision or the Relative Standard Deviation (RSD) is:
W eighted Linear Calibration
When working at low level concentrations it provides an alternative calibration scheme that
weighs the low standards to a greater degree.
Determine the slope, intercept, and correlation coefficient for the equation:
where x is the measured net corrected intensity (blank subtracted). The weights are applied
by multiplying the intensity by the weighting factor for each standard. In this calibration the
weighting factor is the reciprocal of the square of the user entered concentration value for
each standard.
Where:
x is the Concentration value of the standard
y is the measured intensity of the standard
n is the number of standards
i is the index for the standards
b0 is the intercept
b1 is the slope
C is the correlation coefficient
M ethod of Additions Sam ple Intercept
Use the analyte addition technique when the matrix causes an interference that varies from
sample to sample.
The calibration curve is forced to go through the point defined by the sample with no
addition added, and in the other the sample with no addition is treated as just another point
by the least squares routine.
The equation used for the sample intercept option is:
C is the concentration added to an aliquot of sample and I is the difference between the
intensity for the aliquot with added standard and the intensity measured for the sample. The
final sample concentration is calculated by multiplying the slope (-K1) times the intensity of
the sample.
M ethod of Additions Calculated Intercept
A least squares technique is used to determine the K1 coefficient when two or more
standards are used for calibration. This calibration curve is not forced to go through the point
defined by the unspiked sample and the intercept with the intensity axis is calculated.
The equation used for the calculated intercept option is:
The sample with no addition is treated as just another point by the least squares routine that
determines the K1 and K2 coefficients.
M ethod of Additions Calibrate
The system uses method of additions, with the zero intercept equation option for the first
sample then analyzes subsequent samples using the calibration curve generated for the first
sample. This is appropriate when the matrix causes an interference that is the same for all
the samples.
This calibration curve is forced to go through the point defined by the unspiked sample.
Overview of M ethod of Additions

The Method of Additions technique allows you to analyze samples where the sample matrix
has a significant effect on the slope of the calibration curve - an effect that is different for
each sample. To perform determinations using this method a "straight" sample (unspiked)
and sample aliquots to which known amounts of the analyte have been added (spiked) are
analyzed. The intensities of the unspiked samples are used to determine the slope of the
calibration curve.
Method of Additions requires that the following three conditions be met to yield accurate
results:
1. The calibration curve must be linear up to the concentration of the sample plus the
most concentrated addition.
2. The matrix must have the same effect on the added analyte as it has on the analyte
present naturally in the sample.
3. All volumes must be kept equal for each sample. All volumes must be kept equal for
each addition.
If these conditions are not satisfied, you should not use this technique for your analysis.
Overview for Creating a M ethod using M ethod of Additions

For more information on using the Method Editor, refer to Method Editor.
The following is a brief summary that describes the parameters that must be enabled in your
method in order to analyze samples using method of additions.
1. From the Method Editor select the Calibration tab then Define Standards.
2. Check Method of Additions.
3. Select the method of additions calibration equation you wish to use for the analytes
defined in your method. Your options are: Method of Additions, Sample Intercept,
Method of Additions, Calculated Intercept, Method of Additions Calibrate.
4. Specify an ID for each addition.
5. Select the Calibration Units and Concentrations tab.

6. On the Calibration Units and Concentrations page of the Method Editor, specify
the concentration of standard in each spiked sample (A1, A2, etc.). The
concentration of each standard in each spiked sample (A1, A2, etc.) is set to the
concentration added to each spiked sample.
Ex am ple: P reparing Standard Solutions

The example described below assumes a 20 mL total volume. Also, remember that you must
specify the concentration of the standard added to each spiked sample (A1 and A2) on the
Calibration Units and Concentrations page of the Method Editor.
1. Prepare the appropriate blank and stock standard.
2. Prepare the sample by combining 10 mL of sample and 10mL of diluent.
This is the unspiked sample.
3. Prepare the first addition sample by combining 10 mL of sample, 5 mL of diluent,
and 5 mL of the stock standard. This is referred to as addition 1.
4. Prepare the second addition sample by combining 10 mL of sample and 10 mL of
stock standard. This is referred to as addition 2.
Ex am ple: Creating a Sam ple I nform ation File

You must prepare the standard solutions and load them into the autosampler. The software
assumes that the aliquots of sample containing the additions (addition 1, addition 2, etc.)
immediately follow the original sample in the autosampler tray. The samples should be
placed in the autosampler in the following order: a blank, a sample (unspiked sample), A1
(sample + addition 1); and A2 (sample + addition 2). You perform a blank for the first
sample only. The blank will be used for all other samples.
The Sample Information File contains entries for samples only. Thus, in the Sample
Information File, assign a Sample ID for sample 1 and sample 2 (autosampler locations 1 and
4, respectively). You will notice that those spaces which are not filled in for the first sample
refer to the blank, addition 1 and addition 2 (autosampler locations 0, 2, 3, respectively).
Those spaces which are not filled in for the second sample refer to addition 1 and addition 2
(autosampler locations 5 and 6, respectively). Refer to the screen below.
You need to specify the concentration of standard in each spiked sample (A1 and A2) on the
Calibration: Calibration Units and Standard Concentrations page of the Method Editor. The
concentration of each standard in each spiked sample (A1 and A2) is set to the concentration
that is added to each spiked sample. The values of 10 and 20 used in this example (for A1
and A2, respectively) were obtained using the following formula:
Value = Vol. of stock std. X Conc. Of stock std.
Vol. of sample
Ex am ple: Analyzing Sam ples using M ethod of Additions -

M anual Analyses
1. Display the Manual Analysis Control window.
Note: If you are not using a sample information file, you can enter a Sample ID for each sample in
the Manual Analysis Control window. You can use the assigned ID or assign a name to each
sample. If you want to enter an individual ID, type a name, any combination of letters and
numbers, up to 25 characters.
2. Aspirate the unspiked sample.

3. Check that Sample appears in the drop down list. Click Analyze.
4. Aspirate the first addition solution.
5. Check that Addition 1 appears in the drop down list. Click Analyze.
6. Repeat the previous 2 steps for all other addition solutions.
7. Check, and if necessary, edit the calibration curve.
Ex am ple: Analyz e Sam ples using M ethod of Additions -

Autom ated Analyses
1. Prepare your own solutions.
2. Place the standard solutions in the autosampler locations.
You select the autosampler locations of the stock standard additions on the
Calibrate: Define Standards tab page of the Method Editor.
3. Display the Automated Analysis Control window.
4. In the Automated Analysis Control window, click Analyze All.
The system aspirates and analyzes the blank, sample (unspiked sample); A1 (sample
+ addition 1); and A2 (sample + addition 2).
Overview of M ethod of Additions Calibrate

Method of Additions Calibrate allows you to analyze a series of samples with the same
matrix. The technique provides a way of reducing analysis time while retaining some of the
analytical accuracy of the method of standard additions.
Method of Additions Calibrate is a variation of method of additions. You perform the standard
addition protocol for the first sample only. The calibration curve developed for your first
sample is then used to calculate concentrations for all remaining samples. This reduces the
overall number of analyses which must be performed.
The method of additions calibrate requires that the following three conditions be met to yield
accurate results.
1. The calibration curve must be linear up to the concentration of the sample plus the
most concentrated addition.
2. The matrix must have the same effect on the added analyte as it has on the analyte
present naturally in the sample.
3. All volumes must be kept equal for each sample. All volumes must be kept equal for
each addition.
If these conditions are not satisfied, you should not use this technique for your analysis.
Overview for Creating a M ethod using M ethod of Additions

For more information on using the Method Editor, see the chapter titled Method Editor.
The following is a brief summary that describes the parameters that must be enabled in your
method in order to analyze samples using method of additions.
1. From the Method Editor select the Calibration tab then Define Standards.
2. Check Method of Additions.
3. Select the method of additions calibration equation you wish to use for the analytes
defined in your method. Your options are: Method of Additions, Sample Intercept,
Method of Additions, Calculated Intercept, Method of Additions Calibrate.
4. Specify an ID for each addition.
5. Select the Calibration Units and Concentrations tab.

6. On the Calibration Units and Concentrations page of the Method Editor, specify the
concentration of standard in each spiked sample (A1, A2, etc.). The concentration of
each standard in each spiked sample (A1, A2, etc.) is set to the concentration added
to each spiked sample.
Ex am ple: Standard Solutions for M anual Analysis

The following example assumes a 20 mL total volume. Also, remember you must specify the
concentration of the standard added to each spiked sample (A1 and A2) on the Calibration
Units and Concentrations tab page of the Method Editor.
1. Prepare the appropriate blank and stock sample.
2. Prepare the sample by combining 10 mL of sample and 10 mL of diluent.
This is the unspiked sample.
3. Prepare the first addition sample by combining 10 mL of sample, 5 mL of diluent,
and 5 mL of the stock standard. This is referred to as addition 2.
4. Prepare the second addition sample by combining 10 mL of sample, 10 mL of the
stock standard. This is referred to as addition 2.
Ex am ple: Creating a Sam ple I nform ation File

You must prepare the standard solutions and load them into the autosampler. The software
assumes that the aliquots of sample containing the additions (addition 1, addition 2, etc.)
immediately follow the original sample in the autosampler tray. If there are two or more
samples to analyze, you perform the standard addition protocol for the first sample only. The
samples should be placed in the autosampler in the following order: a blank; a sample
(unspiked sample); A1 (sample + addition 1); and A2 (sample + addition 2) for the first
sample only. This calibration curve is then used to calculate concentrations for all remaining
samples.
The sample information file contains entries for samples only. Thus, in the Sample
Information File assign a Sample ID for sample 1 and sample 2. You will notice that those
spaces which are not filled in for the first sample refer to the blank, addition 1and addition 2
( autosampler ___location 0,2, and 3, respectively). Sample 1 is in ___location 1 and sample 2 is in
___location 4. Each remaining sample would follow in consecutive order.
Ex am ple: Analyzing Sam ples using M ethod of Additions

Calibrate - M anual Analyses
1. Display the Manual Analysis control window.
2. Aspirate the blank solution.

3. In the Manual Analysis Control window, click Analyze Blank.
Ex am ple: Analyzing the first sam ple and the additions

If you are not using a sample information file, you can enter a sample ID for each sample in
the manual Analysis Control window. You can use the assigned ID or assign a name to each
sample. If you want to enter an individual ID, type a name, any combination of letter and
numbers up to 25 characters.
1. Aspirate the unspiked sample.
2. Check that Sample appears in the drop-down list. Click Analyze.
3. Aspirate the first addition solution.
4. Check that Addition 1 appears in the drop down list. Click on Analyze.
5. Repeat the previous two steps for all the other addition solutions.
6. Check, and if necessary, edit the calibration curve.
7. Analyzing the remaining samples
8. Aspirate the next sample solution.
9. Click Analyze Sample.
Ex am ple: Analyzing Sam ples using M ethod of Additions

Calibrate - Autom ated Analyses
1. You must prepare your own solutions. The autosampler does not have this capability.
2. In the Automated Analysis Control window, click Analyze All.
The system aspirates and analyzes the blank, sample (unspiked sample); A1 (sample
+ addition1); A2 (sample + addition 2); and subsequent samples.
Glossary
A
Analyte. The element whose concentration is determined in an analysis.
Array detector. A silicon chip that is manufactured with a one or two-dimensional array of
photosensitive material on its surface. The photons that are absorbed by the units (pixels) of
the array are converted to electrons which are collected and read out. Examples include
Photodiode Arrays (PDAs), Charge-coupled Devices (CCDs), Charge-injection devices (CIDs)
and Segmented-array Charge-coupled Devices (SCDs).
Aspiration. A high-speed gas flow is directed across an open tube to draw solution into the
nebulizer.
Auxiliary flow. The flow of argon gas that is contained between the intermediate and the
injector tubes of the ICP torch.
Automatic Background Correction. Automatic Background Correction is the default
setting for Spectral Corrections in all new methods. Methods created before version 5.1 will
remain as previously saved, but will have the added option of setting the background
correction to automatic in the Method Editor.
Automatic background correction (ABGC) uses a propriety PerkinElmer algorithm that
dynamically creates a background correction spectrum for each ICP replicate and/or average
spectrum with no user interaction required. The algorithm takes the points in the sample
spectrum itself and calculates the best fit of background spectrum.
The Automatic Background Correction spectrum is then subtracted from the original sample
spectrum to get the background corrected spectrum.
B
Background correction. Process of correcting the intensity recorded for a particular
wavelength for intensity due to the ICP continuum background and other spectral
interferences. This is normally done by choosing one or two points at one or both sides of
the peak you want to correct. Points can be chosen manually. The software then measures
the intensity at these points, interpolates an intensity at the peak wavelength, and then
subtracts that intensity from the intensity recorded at the peak.
BEC test. Background Equivalent Concentration test. A test of instrument sensitivity. The
concentration of a solution whose intensity is equivalent to the intensity of the background at
the same wavelength is determined. The lower the concentration of this solution, the more
sensitive the instrument for that element.
Blank (solution). A solution that contains none (or rather, an undetectable amount) of the
analyte you are interested in. Used for a zero point in calibration.
C
Calibration curve. The plot or equation showing intensity versus concentration for an
analyte. Once this is established, the concentration of any solution containing this analyte
within the concentration range of the calibration can be found.
Calibration equation. Mathematical function used to convert a sample's measured
emission intensity into a concentration reading. See also Curve Type.
CCD. Charge-coupled Device. A two-dimensional array detector that uses a charge-coupled
readout of the photoelectrons generated by light absorption. This type of detector is used in
PerkinElmer Scanning CCD ICP spectrometers. See also Array detector, SCD.
Correlation coefficient. Indicates the quality of the fit between the calibration curve and
the points it is fitting. A value of 1.000 indicates a perfect fit.
Glossary
Curve type. Describes the calibration curve made using a particular calibration equation.
Using different curve types for the same standard and blank measurements may give
different analytical results.
CV test. Coefficient of Variation test. See Relative Standard Deviation (RSD).
D
Default settings. The instrument software contains standard settings which are the most
generally used settings. There are default settings for aqueous and organic analyses that are
available to use as a starting point when creating a new method.
Detection limit. The lowest concentration of an analyte whose presence can be determined
with a specified degree of certainty. Often defined as the concentration of an analyte that
results in signal intensity that is three times (or twice) the standard deviation of the
background intensity at the wavelength measured.
Detector. A photosensitive device that absorbs photons and converts them into electrons
with a certain efficiency. These photoelectrons can be measured to indicate the intensity of
the incoming light, that is, the number of photons from the emission source. See also Array
detector, CCD, and SCD.
Difference spectrum. Spectrum that results from subtracting one spectrum from another.
E
Echelle grating. Coarsely ruled diffraction grating used in multiple orders to achieve high
spectral resolution.
Excitation characteristics. The amount of energy required to promote an electron to a
higher energy level in an atom or ion. This excited state is necessary for the atom or ion to
emit light. Different elements have different excitation characteristics.
F
Firmware. Programmable silicon chips that form an interface between the computer
software and the instrument hardware that it controls. Firmware has a restricted set of
commands but operates extremely fast, thus allowing the software to be simpler and speed
up instrument response.
FIAS. Abbreviated for Flow Injection Analysis System
G
GPIB. General-Purpose Interface Bus. A commonly used protocol (agreement) on how
computers and electronic devices should communicate. The computer uses a GPIB card to
allow it to communicate with the instrument firmware.
I
IEC. See Interelement Correction.
IEEE-488. Common interface protocol for communications between computers and other
electrical devices.
Integration time. The time for which the detector absorbs photons from the plasma before
a signal is read out. The integration time multiplied by the number of reads specified equals
the read time.
Interelement Correction (IEC). A spectral interference correction technique in which
emission contributions from interfering elements that emit at the analyte wavelength are
subtracted from the apparent analyte emission after measuring the interfering element at
another wavelength.
Intercept. Where two lines meet. Commonly used in spectroscopy in calibration work, for
example, the y-intercept, meaning the point where the calibration curve cuts the x= 0 axis of
the calibration plot.
Interference. Anything that causes the analyte signal in a sample to differ from the analyte
signal in a calibration solution at the same concentration. See also Spectral interference.
Internal reference. IUPAC name for internal standard.
Internal standard. A nonanalyte element, present in all standards, blanks, and samples,
that is used to correct for physical or matrix interferences in an analysis.
L
Linear fit. Type of calibration curve where a straight line is drawn through the standard and
blank emission/concentration values.
M
Matrix. The components of the sample other than the elements of interest. The matrix can
substantially change results obtained, through spectral interference or viscosity change.
Mercury lamp. A lamp inside PerkinElmer simultaneous ICP spectrometers that emits light
at a mercury wavelength. This is periodically used to return the instrument to the current
wavelength calibration.
Method. Controls instrument settings and how the instrument acquires and processes data
in an analysis.
MRU. Most recently Used. Displays the last few most recently used Methods, etc.
MSF. See Multicomponent Spectral Fitting.
Multicomponent Spectral Fitting (MSF). A processing mode that distinguishes analyte
spectra from interfering spectra by the use of stored mathematical models. It uses a multiple
linear regression technique to fit the models created to unknown spectra during an analysis.
Since only the peak shapes need to remain constant, typically, the models are independent
of concentration, plasma conditions, and matrix effects.
Sources of information on MSF include the following two articles:

Ivaldi, Juan C. et al., "Multivariate methods for interpretation of emission spectra from the inductively coupled
plasma," Spectrochimica Acta, Vol. 47 B, No. 12, pp. 1361-1371, 1992.
Ivaldi, Juan C. and Barnard, Thomas W., "Advantages of coupling multivariate data reduction techniques with
simultaneous inductively coupled plasma optical emission spectra," Spectrochimica Acta, Vol. 48 B, No. 10, pp.
1265-1273, 1993.
N
Nebulizer Flow. The flow of argon gas that enters the nebulizer and carries the sample in
the form of an aerosol into the plasma.
Neon Correction. A neon reference spectrum is measured for use in wavelength correction
on PerkinElmer Scanning CCD ICP spectrometers.
O
Optimizing. The process of determining the best conditions and settings for an analysis.
Outer Flow. IUPAC term for plasma flow.
P
Peak algorithm. The way in which the emission data from the spectrometer is converted
into emission counts. This can be done in three ways: (1) by searching for a peak and
estimating its height (Peak height processing); (2) by summing the output of several detector
Glossary
pixels (Peak area processing); or (3) by treating the output mathematically and relating it to
existing spectral models (Multicomponent Spectral Fit processing).
Peak area processing. A processing mode that sums the intensities recorded by specified
pixels on a given subarray for an element.
Peak height processing. A mode of processing emission data where the highest intensity
points are searched for, and then an algorithm is applied to approximate the peak height.
See also Area processing and Multicomponent Spectral Fitting.
Pixel. Photosensitive unit of an array detector whose output can be read individually.
Polychromator. A type of spectrometer that can detect and process data for two or more
wavelengths at the same time.
Pre-shot. A quick "snapshot" of the plasma emission which is made by the spectrometer
when Auto Integration is selected. This is used to determine optimum integration times.
Precision. A measure of how reproducible a set of measurements is. Commonly used
statistical measurements are standard deviation (SD) and relative standard deviation (RSD),
also called coefficient of variation (CV).
R
Read time. The amount of time per replicate for which the detector measures light from the
plasma for the current sample. The total read time equals the integration time multiplied by
the number of integrations specified.
Relative Standard Deviation (RSD). The standard deviation of a group of measurements
divided by the mean of those measurements. A test used to measure relative precision for a
group of measurements. Often expressed as a percent. Also known as Coefficient of
Variation (CV) test.
Replicate. A sample can have one or more replicates, meaning that there will be repetitive
measurements taken.
Residual Error. The amount the calibration standard deviates from the entered concentration
as a percent. Calculated as: ((calConc - enteredConc) / enteredConc) * 100.00
Reslope. When there are small changes in instrumental conditions, the reslope feature of
the software allows you to compensate by making small corrections to the calibration curve
using a single calibration standard.
Resolution. The measure of a spectrometer's ability to separate adjacent wavelengths. The
High setting for resolution maximizes the resolving power on PerkinElmer simultaneous ICP
spectrometers.
RF Power. The amount of energy per unit time transmitted from the RF generator to the
ICP discharge. Measured in watts.
S
Sample uptake rate. IUPAC term for sample flow rate.
Scanning CCD ICP Spectrometer. A spectrometer that detects and processes data for
one wavelength at a time.
Simultaneous ICP Spectrometer. A spectrometer that detects and processes data for two
or more wavelengths at the same time.
SCD. Segmented-array Charge-coupled device Detector. A specialized type of array detector
(developed for and used in PerkinElmer simultaneous ICP spectrometers) that has groups of
photosensitive pixels, called subarrays, on the detector surface where important atomic
emission lines appear. The SCD uses charge-coupled readout like a CCD, but the subarrays
can be individually addressed. See also Array Detector, Detector, CCD.
Slit Steps. The number of positions used by the spectrometer entrance slit during data
collection for each replicate on simultaneous ICP spectrometers. The slit can be moved under
software control. When the spectral profiling is set to off, the spectrometer uses one slit step
(entrance slit position); when spectral profiling is on, the spectrometer uses four.
Shutter. A mechanical device used to block the plasma emission from entering the
spectrometer.
Spectral interference. An interference caused by the emission from elements or
compounds other than those of interest.
Spectral profiling. On PerkinElmer simultaneous ICP spectrometers, the spectrometer
entrance slit is adjusted by ¼ pixel steps during data collection, thus moving the slit image
across the detector sub-arrays. This increases the data density across the spectral peaks and
produces smoothed spectral displays.
Split-pixel. Reading a detector array so that information is taken from each half-pixel rather
than from each pixel.
Standard. A solution with accurately known concentrations of the elements to be
determined in an analysis. Two or more standards are used to make a calibration curve.
Standard deviation. A statistical definition of the variation in a group of similar
measurements.
Structured background. Spectral interference that is non-random, thereby altering
analytical results for nearby analyte lines.
Subarray. On PerkinElmer simultaneous ICP spectrometers, this is a group of pixels on an
SCD which are positioned to measure a small, specific wavelength range.
T-Z
Weighted linear fit. A curve type where the importance given to a calibration point in the
fitting process (the weighting) is directly related to the concentration of the standard
measured for that point.
I ndex
Automated Analysis Control
A overview ........................................... 187
Automated Analysis Control command
A/S Location entry .................................. 112 Tools menu ......................................... 20
active autosampler
method ............................................... 68 setting up............................................ 52
adding rows .......................................... 153 Autosampler command
Additional Message entry.................. 134, 136 Analysis menu...................................... 21
After Initial Calib entry ............................ 133 Autosampler Configuration dialog ............. 215
After Recalibration entry.......................... 133 Autosampler Loading List ........................ 256
algorithms ... 292, 295, 297, 298, 300, 302, 304 Autosampler Location Column Fill dialog .... 167
Aliquot Volume Column Fill dialog ............. 172 Autosampler Location entry ..................... 161
Aliquot Volume entry .............................. 162 autosampler model
An Overview of MSF Function................... 273 selecting ........................................... 215
analyses Autosampler page .................................... 95
performing Method Editor ...................................... 95
overview ......................................... 44 autosampler tray
analysis control windows selecting ........................................... 215
overview ........................................... 182 Aux entry ................................................ 91
Analysis Header ..................................... 246
Analysis menu commands.......................... 21
B
analysis schedule parameters ................... 164
Analyst Name entry ................................ 161 Background Correction entry.................... 105
analyte ................................................. 268 Background Correction Point option .......... 264
displaying in Examine Spectra/MSF ....... 268 Batch ID entry ....................................... 161
standard concentrations ...................... 116 BGC1 entry............................................ 105
Analyte information field................... 116, 127 BGC2 entry............................................ 105
Analytical Header ................................... 246 Buttons
Analytical Header command Toolbar ............................................... 10
Analysis menu...................................... 21
analytical sequence ................................ 187 C
Analyze QCs Before Column Fill dialog ....... 175
Analyze QCs Before entry ........................ 164 Calculate Factors for IEC ......................... 285
analyzing samples Calculate Limits button............................ 132
overview ............................................. 44 Calculate Limits dialog ............................ 127
archiving calculation
libraries.................................................8 disk storage space .............................. 200
Assign Internal Standards entries.............. 107 Calib Blank Action entry .......................... 118
Assign Internal Standards page Calib Std entry ....................................... 116
Method Editor .................................... 107 Calib Units entry .................................... 116
At End entry .......................................... 133 calibration ............................................. 172
Auto button creating new...................................... 124
Toolbar ............................................... 10 initial
Auto Dilution Factor ................................ 176 for automated analyses ................... 124
Auto Dilution Factor Column Fill ................ 176 selecting color.................................... 254
Automated Analysis command units
Analysis menu...................................... 21 editing .......................................... 116
using stored ...................................... 124 Copy command........................................ 18

Calibration (Calib) button copying
Toolbar ............................................... 10 methods ........................................ 69, 77
calibration algorithms 292, 295, 297, 298, 300, sample information files ...................... 147
302, 304, 305 Correlation Coefficient ............................ 302
Calibration and Calculations ..................... 292 Count as Sample entry............................ 131
Calibration and Reagent Blank Usage Page 118 creating
Method Editor .................................... 118 methods ............................................. 70
Calibration Blank 1 - 5 options ................. 112 sample information files ...................... 148
calibration blanks Current Sample option ............................ 177
internal standards in ........................... 107 Cut command .......................................... 18
Calibration command
Tools menu ......................................... 20 D
calibration curves
printing............................................. 255 Data Reprocessing command
Calibration Display Options dialog ............. 254 Tools menu ......................................... 20
Calibration Display window ...................... 254 Data Reprocessing window ...................... 196
Calibration Equation entry ....................... 119 Define Elements page ............................... 85
calibration equations.. 292, 295, 297, 298, 300, Method Editor ...................................... 85
302, 304 Define Standard page ............................. 112
Calibration Equations and Sample Units page Method Editor .................................... 112
Method Editor .................................... 119 Delete Rows command ........................... 153
calibration panes.................................... 254 deleting
Calibration Standard 1 - 20 options ........... 112 blanks and standards .......................... 112
Calibration Summary libraries ................................................ 8
Method Editor .................................... 243 methods ............................................. 69
Calibration Summary command rows................................................. 153
Analysis menu ..................................... 21 sample information files ...................... 147
Calibration Summary Header.................... 249 Detailled Calibration Summary Header and
Calibration Units and Standard Conc page.. 116 Information ....................................... 250
Method Editor .................................... 116 Diagnostics ............................................. 32
Cancel Analysis command Dilute Samples with ESI with prepFAST ..... 157
Analysis menu ..................................... 21 Diluted to Volume Column Fill dialog ......... 171
checking Diluted to Volume entry .......................... 162
performance ........................................ 48 dilution ................................................. 177
Checks page Dilution Factor ....................................... 162
Method Editor .................................... 127 disk storage
Clear Calibration Blank command for results ......................................... 200
Analysis menu ..................................... 21 displaying calibration .............................. 254
Clear command...................................... 153 dry weight ............................................ 175
Clear Reagent Blank command Duplicate option..................................... 177
Analysis menu ..................................... 21
Clear Results Display command E
Analysis menu ..................................... 21
Clear Spectra Display command editing
Analysis menu ..................................... 21 sample information files ........ 147, 153, 167
color units.ini ..................................... 116, 119
selecting for calibration display............. 254 Element information field .... 91, 103, 105, 118,
Column Fill command ............................. 153 119
column fill dialogs elements
Sample Information Editor ................... 167 selecting ........................................ 70, 71
commands Enable/Disable Elements command
Analysis menu ..................................... 21 Analysis menu ..................................... 21
Toolbar ............................................... 10 Entry dialog command ............................ 153
Tools menu ......................................... 20 entry fields
comments clearing ............................................ 153
about samples ................................... 177 user-defined ...................................... 166
Conc/Upper Limit/Lower Limit entries........ 132 equation
Concentration Units entry ........................ 127 disk storage space.............................. 200
concentrations Equation for Calculating Disk Storage for
sample reporting ................................ 162 Results ............................................. 200
Continuous Graphics equations.... 292, 295, 297, 298, 300, 302, 304
Display Window ................................. 239 errors
Index
in sample reporting units ..................... 162 IEC Factors

ESI with prepFAST Device Configuration ...... 45 editing .............................................. 282
Examine button IEC for multiple wavelengths per element .. 288
Toolbar ............................................... 10 IEC Model Builder ................................... 283
Examine Spectra window Calculate Factors page ........................ 285
overview ........................................... 260 Set Limits page .................................. 284
Examine Spectra/MSF command Set Up page ...................................... 283
Tools menu ......................................... 20 Summarize Factors page ..................... 287
Examine Spectra/MSF Window ................. 258 IEC Model Builder command
Example Tools menu ......................................... 20
Standards Dilution – Generating a IEC Model entry ..................................... 105
Calibration Curve Using a Single Stock116 IEC Process - Overview ........................... 280
exporting .............................................. 266 IEC standards
spectra ............................................. 266 analyzing new.................................... 282
Express Analysis....................................... 15 reanalyzing........................................ 282
IEC table............................................... 281
F creating ............................................ 281
modifying .......................................... 282
factors for IEC ....................................... 285 IEC window ........................................... 281
calculating ......................................... 285 information display windows .................... 238
Summarize Factors page ..................... 287 Initial Calibration page
Failure Actions for After-Calib QCs ............ 134 Method Editor .................................... 124
Method Editor .................................... 134 Initial Sample Volume entry ..................... 162
Failure Actions for At-End QCs.................. 136 Initial Sample Weight Column Fill dialog .... 170
Method Editor .................................... 136 Initial Sample Weight entry...................... 162
Failure Actions for Periodic QCs ................ 134 Insert Row command.............................. 153
Method Editor .................................... 134 instrument components
FIAS Control Window .............................. 235 status of ............................................. 29
Controls and Displays .......................... 217 Instrument Diagnostics ............................. 32
files..........................................................8 interelement correction ........................... 279
used in Syngistix ....................................8 multiple wavelengths per element ......... 288
using NT Explorer ...................................8 when to use ...................................... 279
filling a column interelement correction factors ................. 282
Sample Information Editor ............ 167, 170 editing .............................................. 282
Flush Rate entry (Sample Flush) ................. 95 Interelement Correction Model Builder....... 283
Flush Time entry (Sample Flush) ................ 95 Calculate Factors page ........................ 285
F'n information field...... 91, 103, 105, 118, 119 Factors page...................................... 287
Frequency entry ..................................... 133 Set Limits page .................................. 284
Function entry ......................................... 85 Set Up page ...................................... 283
Interelement Correction Model Builder window
G ....................................................... 281
interelement correction process................ 280
gas flows ................................................ 91 interelement correction standards............. 282
RF Power interelement correction table ................... 282
and Viewing Distance entry ................ 91 creating ............................................ 281
interference correction ............................ 276
H types of ............................................ 278
Internal Standard Blank option ................. 112
hardware control windows Internal Standard Options ....................... 107
overview ........................................... 222 internal standards
How to Use the Examine MSF Window....... 268 assigning .......................................... 107
How to Use the Examine Transient Peaks in Calib Blanks ................................... 107
Window ............................................ 269 reporting apparent concentrations ........ 107
introduction...............................................1
I Syngistix ...............................................1
ID entry ................................................ 112 L

identifying samples ................................. 168
IDs................................................ 146, 168 libraries ....................................................8
IEC and MSF library locations
Which to use ..................................... 279 methods ............................................. 68
Linear Calibration Algorithm ..................... 295 active ................................................. 68

Linear Forced through Zero ..................... 297 copying.......................................... 69, 77
creating new ....................................... 70
M deleting .............................................. 69
description .......................................... 68
Manual Analysis command modifying............................................ 79
Analysis menu ..................................... 21 opening .............................................. 77
Manual Analysis Control command printing............................................... 84
Tools menu ......................................... 20 renaming ............................................ 69
Manual Analysis Control window ............... 183 saving ................................ 68, 70, 79, 81
Manual Analysis Control window Quality setting survey and auto integration ......... 89
Control Sample .................................. 183 using .................................................. 69
Manual button modifying
Toolbar ............................................... 10 methods ............................................. 79
matrix check dilution .............................. 177 sample information files ...................... 151
matrix check duplicate ............................ 177 MSF ..................................................... 274
Matrix Check Sample Entry dialog ............. 177 overview ........................................... 273
Matrix Check Samples entry ..................... 164 Steps to Perform ................................ 274
Max Signif Fig entry................................ 119 MSF and IEC
Max. Decimal Places entry ....................... 119 Which to use ..................................... 279
Maximum Retries After QC Failure ............ 136 MSF Model entry .................................... 105
Mean Header and Information ................. 247 multicomponent spectral fitting ......... 274, 279
Method button overview ........................................... 273
Toolbar ............................................... 10 when to use ...................................... 279
Method Description entry .......................... 85 Multiline Calibration ......................... 121, 125
Method Editor .......................................... 91 multimethod.......................................... 124
Calibration pages ... 112, 116, 118, 119, 124 Multiple Wavelengths per Element ............ 288
Checks page ...................................... 127
Failure Actions for After-Calib QCs ........ 134
N
Failure Actions for At-End QCs.............. 136
Failure Actions for Periodic QCs ............ 134 Name entry ............................................. 85
overview ............................................. 68 Neb entry ............................................... 91
procedures .......................................... 69 New Calibration command
Process pages.................................... 107 Analysis menu ..................................... 21
Process pages............................. 103, 105 New Sample Info command ..................... 153
QC pages ................................... 131, 132 Nominal Sample Weight entry .................. 162
Sampler pages ..................................... 91 Non-Linear Bracketing Algorithm .............. 300
Schedule for QC Analyses page ............ 133 Non-Linear Calibration Algorithm .............. 298
Settings pages ..................................... 86
Spectrometer pages......................... 85, 95 O
using .................................................. 69
Method Editor (MethEd) button Open Sample Info command.................... 153
Toolbar ............................................... 10 opening
Method Editor command methods ............................................. 77
Tools menu ......................................... 20 sample information files ...................... 151
Method Editor Process Pages Time Processing optimizing performance ............................ 48
Page ................................................ 110 options
Method Editor Sample Limits Checks Page . 128 selecting for parameters........................ 80
Method Editor Sample Limits Page ............ 128 Overlap Correction entry ......................... 105
Method Editor Sampler Pages Autosampler Overview of Examine .............................. 258
Page - FIAS Technique .......................... 98 Overview of Examine Transient Peaks ....... 259
Method Editor Sampler Pages FIAS Page .. 100,
101 P
Method Editor Spectrometer Pages Settings
Page - FIAS Technique .......................... 89 packing
Method Header ...................................... 248 libraries ................................................ 8
Method of Additions................................ 310 panes
Method of Additions Calculated Intercept ... 308 calibration ......................................... 254
Method of Additions Calibrate .................. 309 Parameter List command......................... 153
Method of Additions Sample Intercept ....... 307 parameters
method parameters ................................ 266 adding ....................................... 160, 165
updating ........................................... 266 defining in sample information files 147, 149
methods editing .............................................. 153
Index
required for samples ........................... 162 Quick Start .............................................. 15

Peak Algorithm entry .............................. 103
peak wavelength .................................... 263 R
peaks ................................................... 266
exporting .......................................... 266 Read Delay entry ................................... 164
Perform Internal Standards Checks Page ... 108 Read Time entry ...................................... 86
performance Reagent Blank 1 - 5 options ..................... 112
checks during setup .............................. 48 Recalibrate Before Column Fill dialog......... 172
optimizing and verifying ........................ 48 Recalibration Before entry ....................... 164
performing analyses Recall Calibration command
overview ............................................. 44 Analysis menu...................................... 21
Periodic Table .......................................... 70 recovery check samples
Periodic Table button ................................ 85 analytes added to ............................... 127
Periodic Table command recovery sample..................................... 177
Tools menu ......................................... 20 Recovery Set 1 to 6 entries...................... 127
Periodically entry.................................... 133 Recovery Set Number option.................... 177
Peristaltic Pump page ............................... 95 Reference Sample option......................... 177
Method Editor ...................................... 95 Remarks entry ....................................... 161
Plasma button Remarks Entry dialog .............................. 177
Toolbar ............................................... 10 Remote Trigger...................................... 220
Plasma Control command renaming
Tools menu ......................................... 20 methods ............................................. 69
Plasma Control window ........................... 222 sample information files ...................... 147
Plasma entry ........................................... 91 Replicate Header and Information ............ 247
Plasma page ............................................ 91 Replicates entry ....................................... 86
Method Editor ...................................... 91 Reprocessing (Reproc) button
Plasma View entry .................................... 91 Toolbar ............................................... 10
Points per Peak entry .............................. 103 Reslope Standards option ........................ 112
pop-up menus Resolution entry....................................... 86
Sample Information Editor ................... 153 results
Power entry............................................. 91 printing ............................................. 250
Print command ...................................... 153 Results button
Print Preview command........................... 153 Toolbar ............................................... 10
printing Results command
calibration curves ............................... 255 Tools menu ......................................... 20
methods.............................................. 84 results data sets
results .............................................. 250 storage space .................................... 200
sample information files ...................... 151 Results Display window ........................... 243
spectra ...................................... 242, 267 retries after QC failure ............................ 136
profiling ................................................ 103 setting maximum ............................... 136
pump ................................................... 215 running samples
turning off between samples ................ 215 overview ............................................. 44
Pump Parameters ..................................... 95
Purge-gas Flow entry ................................ 86 S
sample description parameters ................. 161
Q
Sample Flow Rate entry ............................ 95
QC Autosampler Loc entry ....................... 131 Sample Flush
QC entry Flush Time entry .................................. 95
QC Samples Conc... and Limits page Sample Header ...................................... 248
Meth Ed ........................................ 132 Sample ID Column Fill dialog ................... 168
QC Sample Concentrations and Limits page 132 Sample ID entry..................................... 161
Method Editor .................................... 132 Sample Info button .................................. 10
QC Sample Definition page ...................... 131 Toolbar ............................................... 10
Method Editor .................................... 131 Sample Information (SamInfo) button ......... 10
QC Sample ID entry........... 131, 133, 134, 136 Toolbar ............................................... 10
QC Sample in Manual Analysis .................. 183 sample information designs ..................... 149
QCs...................................................... 133 Sample Information Editor
scheduling ......................................... 175 customizing ................................ 147, 149
scheduling ......................................... 133 overview ........................................... 146
quality control samples............................ 175
Sample Information Editor column fill dialogs printing...................................... 242, 267

....................................................... 167 Spectra button
Sample Information Editor command Toolbar ............................................... 10
Tools menu ......................................... 20 Spectra command
Sample Information Editor Pop-Up Menus .. 153 Tools menu ......................................... 20
sample information files Spectral Corrections page........................ 105
adding parameters ...................... 160, 165 Method Editor .................................... 105
copying............................................. 147 spectral interference correction ................ 276
creating new ..................................... 148 Spectral Peak Processing page ................. 103
deleting ............................................ 147 Method Editor .................................... 103
description ........................................ 146 spectral profiling .................................... 103
editing .............................................. 147 Spectral Profiling entry.............................. 86
modifying stored files.......................... 151 Spectral Windows page ............................. 89
opening ............................................ 151 Method Editor ...................................... 89
printing............................................. 151 Spectrometer Control command
renaming .......................................... 147 Tools menu ......................................... 20
saving .............................................. 151 Spectrometer Control window .................. 225
sample information parameters Spectrometer Options ............................... 86
editing .............................................. 153 Settings page
Sample Information Parameters dialog160, 165 Method Editor .................................. 86
Sample Prep Volume entry ...................... 162 spike .................................................... 177
Sample Preparation spike samples
An Example ....................................... 156 analytes added to............................... 127
sample preparation parameters standard concentrations
table ................................................ 162 analyte ............................................. 116
sample reporting units ............................ 169 Standard Deviation and Precision ............. 304
sample units storage space
editing .............................................. 119 for results ......................................... 200
no results displayed ............................ 162 Subtract Reagent Blank entry............ 118, 131
Sample Units Column Fill dialog................ 169 Summarize Factors page ......................... 287
Sample Units entry .......................... 119, 162 IEC Model Builder ............................... 287
sample volume ............................... 162, 172 survey .................................................... 89
sample volume diluted to ........................ 171 setting in Method Editor ........................ 89
sample volume units............................... 170 Symbol entry ........................................... 85
sample weight ......................... 162, 170, 175 Syngistix ................................................... 1
sample weight units................................ 170 important prerequisites ........................... 1
samples related documentation ............................ 1
comments on..................................... 177 Syngistix software ...................................... 1
preparing .......................................... 162 features ................................................ 1
preparing ............................................ 52 system monitors ...................................... 29
saturated .......................................... 252
saturated samples .................................. 252 T
saturation ............................................. 252
Save As Text command........................... 153 Technique - Continuous or FIAS ................. 17
Save Sample Info As command ................ 153 Times to retry QC entry ................... 134, 136
Save Sample Info command .................... 153 Toolbar................................................... 10
Save Sample Info Design As command ...... 153 Tools menu commands ............................. 20
saving tray type
data ................................................. 200 selecting ........................................... 215
methods .................................. 70, 79, 81 troubleshooting
Schedule for QC Analyses page during setup ........................................ 48
Method Editor .................................... 133
scheduling QCs ...................................... 175 U
Set Limits for IEC ................................... 284
Set Peak Wavelength .............................. 263 units
Set Up page .......................................... 283 calibration
Interelement Correction Model Builder ... 283 editing .......................................... 116
software ................................................... 1 sample
Solids Ratio Column Fill dialog.................. 175 editing .......................................... 119
Solids ratio entry .................................... 162 sample reporting ......................... 162, 169
Source Equilibrium Delay entry................... 91 sample volume .................................. 170
spectra ................................................. 266 sample weight ................................... 170
exporting .......................................... 266 specifying your own............................ 162
Index
Units entry ............................................ 132 Wavelength entry ..................................... 85

QC Sample Conc... and Limits page Wavelength Table .................................... 71
Meth Ed ........................................ 132 Wavelength Table button .......................... 85
units.ini Wavelength Table command
editing ....................................... 116, 119 Tools menu ......................................... 20
units.ini file ........................................... 162 wavelengths
Update Method Parameters dialog ............ 266 recommended.................................70, 71
Use Calibration Blank entry ...................... 118 selecting ........................................70, 71
User Defined entry ................................. 161 weight
User Defined Entry Field dialog................. 166 of sample ............................ 162, 170, 175
Weight Units Column Fill dialog ................ 170
V Weight Units entry ................................. 162
Weighted Linear Calibration .............. 119, 305
values wet weight ............................................ 175
entering in methods.............................. 80 When All Tries Fail entry .................. 134, 136
View Dist entry ........................................ 91 windows ................... 281, 283, 284, 285, 287
viewing calibration.................................. 254 analysis control overview ..................... 182
volume Automated Analysis Ctrl overview ......... 187
of sample ............................ 162, 171, 172 calibration display............................... 254
Volume Units Column Fill dialog................ 170 Data Reprocessing.............................. 196
Volume units entry ................................. 162 hardware control overview................... 222
information display ............................. 238
W interelement correction ....................... 281
Manual Analysis Control....................... 183
Wash entry.............................................. 95 Method Editor overview ......................... 68
Wash Frequency entry .............................. 95 Plasma Control ................................... 222
Wash Location entry ................................. 95 Results Display................................... 243
Wash Rate entry ...................................... 95 Sample Information Editor ................... 146
Wash Time Spectrometer Control .......................... 225
increase based on Concentration ............ 95 Workspace (Wrkspc) button
Wash Time entry............................... 95, 164 Toolbar ............................................... 10
wavelength workspaces
displaying in Examine Spectra/MSF ....... 268 creating .............................................. 11
setting peak....................................... 263

09931145H Syngistix For ICP Software Guide

Uploaded by

09931145H Syngistix For ICP Software Guide

Uploaded by

SYNGISTIX™ FOR ICP

Part Number Release Publication Date Software Version

Or on the internet go to: http://www.perkinelmer.com/contactus/

Copyright © 2020 PerkinElmer, Inc.

Introduction to Syngistix ...................................................................................... 1

Electronic Signature Points (ES only) ........................................................................... 24

1. Opening a Predefined Particle Counter Method.................................................. 58

Autosampler Page - Transient Technique .............................................................. 98

Failure Actions for At-End QCs .......................................................................... 137

Sample ID Column Fill Dialog ............................................................................... 168

Using this window .............................................................................................. 196

Information Display Windows .............................................................................. 237

Identifying Elements Using the Button ............................................................... 266

Weighted Linear Calibration ....................................................................................... 307

Im portant Features of the Syngistix Softw are

Related Docum entation

Tips and Hints

Upgrading from W inLab - W hat's N ew

Libraries and Files In Data M anager

About the Syngistix R ibbon

Workspace: When you click on Workspace, you can

 From the Applications button , click on Notifications.

To select sound notifications:

1. Select Play sounds for each of the following notifications.

3. Choose either a Default sound or Custom sound.

To select email notifications:

1. Select an Email/text for each notification.

The address appears on the button.

How Sw itch User W ork s

Non-ES m ode (folder “brow sing” is allow ed):

ES m ode (folder “brow sing” is not allow ed):

Ex press Analysis (Quick Start)

To use Quick Start, follow this procedure:

2. Click the Plasma on/off button to turn the plasma on.

1. Click the open button to display the Open Method dialog.

2. Browse for a method database Library to open.

4. Select a method then click the OK button.

Select a Sam ple I nform ation File

2. Browse for a Sample Information File to open.

Start the Analysis

The R ibbon Tabs

I nstrum ent Tab Com m ands

Spectrom eter Group

Analysis Tab Com m ands

Sam ple Inform ation Group

Data Correction Group

Results Tab Com m ands

Utilities Tab Com m ands

Techniques Com m ands

Continuous: The default technique is Continuous.

F10 Goto Location

Shift-F10 Goto Wash

F11 Probe Up/Down

Shift-F11 Load Tray

F12 Pump On/Off

Hide Login (N on ES only)

Electronic Signature P oints (ES only)

What settings are available for a signature point?

How do I add a reason for a signature point ?

M atrix of Groups and P erm issions

For Non-ES Only permissions:

Status P anel Display and Diagnostics

User Details Panel

Plasma Status Icons

Not Connected Radial Horizontal Radial Horizontal Radial Plasma Error

Not Connected Connecting Connected Spectrometer

Autosam pler Status Icons

Not Connected Connecting Connected

Scheduler Status Icon

Shows only if something is happening.

Particle Counter Status Icon

Shows only if the particle counter is connected.

Rem ote Access Status Icons

Remote client connected

Instrum ent Diagnostics W indow

Spectrom eter Page